Sapphire Total Flood Fire Suppression System - 25, 42, 70 Bar

SAPPHIRE® TOTAL FLOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION
25, 42, AND 70 BAR MARINE SYSTEM
DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
One Stanton Street | Marinette, WI 54143-2542, USA | +1-715-735-7411 | www.ansul.com

© 2022 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were
current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. | Part No. 14A-06MA
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression FOREWORD
25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System 2022-JUL-28 REV. 08
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
This manual is intended for use with the ANSUL®

SAPPHIRE® Clean Agent Total Flood Fire Suppression
25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System. These systems are
specifically engineered for total flooding application in
either unoccupied or occupied areas. Planning, design,
installation, operation, recharge, and maintenance of the
system must conform to the limitations detailed in this
manual. An individual holding a valid certification from a
SAPPHIRE system training program with training to plan,
install, and maintain the SAPPHIRE system shall install and
maintain the SAPPHIRE system.
Those who design, install, operate, reset, inspect, maintain,
and recharge these systems should read this entire manual.
Specific sections are of particular interest depending upon
one’s responsibilities.
As with all electrical, mechanical, and pneumatic equipment,
the system needs periodic care to provide maximum
assurance that it operates effectively and safely. Inspection
frequency shall be performed consistently, depending on
operating and environmental conditions. Maintenance shall
be performed semiannually, or more frequently, depending
on operating and environmental conditions.
The application and use of the SAPPHIRE system is limited
to the applications and uses described in this manual.
For other applications, contact an Authorized ANSUL®
Distributor, Territory Manager, or the Technical Services
Department.
Note: The converted values in this document are provided
for dimensional reference only and do not reflect an actual
measurement.
DISCLAIMER:
Johnson Controls does not make any representations,
warranties or guarantees, expressed or implied, as to the
accuracy or completeness of the manual. Users must be
aware that updates and amendments will be made from
time to time to the manual. It is the user’s responsibility
to determine whether there have been any such updates
or amendments. Neither Johnson Controls nor any of its
directors, officers, employees, or agents shall be liable
in contract, tort, or in any other manner to any person for
any loss, damage, injury, liability, cost, or expense of any
nature, including without limitation incidental, special, direct,
or consequential damages arising out of or in connection
with the use of the manual.
All instructions contained herein relate to a typical
installation.
Date: 2022-JUL-28
Part No.: 14A-06MA-08
3M and Novec are trademarks of 3M Company.

ANSUL®, SAPPHIRE, and the product names listed in this material are
marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY ALERTS SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
REV. 08 2022-JUL-28 25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
! DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person will experience
serious personal injury or death if the situation is not avoided.
! WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person could
experience serious personal injury or death if the situation is
not avoided.
! CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person could
experience minor or moderate personal injury if the situation
is not avoided.
CAUTION
Addresses practices not related to personal injury, such as a
system part malfunctioning, property damage, or system failure.
NOTICE
Addresses general practices or observations
related to system function that are not related
to personal injury.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression REVISION RECORD
25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System 2022-JUL-28 REV. 08 PAGE 1
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Date Page Description Date Page Description

2022-JUL-28 – Document title updated to 2022-JUL-28 2-6 to • Electrical earthing and safety
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire 2-8 clearances
Suppression 25, 42, and 70 bar • Engineered systems
Marine System.
• Completing the system design
– Foreword page revised. Added
the disclaimer section. • Nozzle drilling details
– Updated the explanation of safety • Pipework and fittings
alerts page. • Nozzles
– Table of contents updated as • Tee split design
applicable.
2-9 to Added new tables for the nozzle
1-1 Reworded and added new state- 2-13 drilling details for 7 port and
ments to the introduction section. 16 port nozzles.
1-1 Added a new section for general 2-14 Added a new section for pneumatic
information. actuation arrangements.
1-1 Added a new section for the 3-1 to Revised the entire components
description of SAPPHIRE systems. 3-140 section to include components
1-1 Added a new section for the from the approved hardware
properties of Novec 1230 fluid. consolidation platform, as appli-
cable for marine systems.
1-2 Added a note beneath the toxico-
logical data table. Added new 4-1 to Added a new section for general
sections for noise, turbulence, 4-3 installation steps and added
low temperature, visibility, exits, the container bracket mounting
post discharge ventilation, glazing heights table.
within protected areas, and 4-4 to Added a new section for installing
discharge testing. 4-10 the pilot container components.
2-1 Updated the first paragraph of 5-1 Added a new commissioning
the design standards to include section. Added a note for testing
references to ISO 14520 and EN the pneumatic actuator.
15004. Grammar improvements
5-2 to Added new pressure and
made to the general information
5-4 temperature charts for 25 bar, 41
section.
bar welded, 42 bar, and 70 bar
2-3 Reworded the special consider- systems.
ations section and revised the
pressure to 100 bar at 15 ºC. 5-5 Added new pressure and
temperature graphs for 25 bar, 42
2-3 to Added a new section for determi- bar, and 70 bar systems.
2-4 nation of Novec 1230 quantity.
6-1 to Added a new section for servicing
2-4 Changed the title of the sample 6-2 and maintenance and revised the
calculation section to Example inspection and testing section with
Calculation. references to MSC. 1/Circ. 1432
2-4 Added a new section for the and MSC. 1/Circ. 1516.
achieved Novec 1230 fluid Added an action to replace the
concentration. flexible discharge hoses to the
2-5 Added a new table for Novec five-year service section.
1230 fluid total flooding quantity Added an action to replace the
with temperatures of -20 ºC to electrical actuators in accordance
65 ºC with concentrations of with the replace by date to the
5.85% to 7.2%. ten-year service section. Added a
2-6 to Added the following sections to note for electrical actuators with a
2-8 the manual: life cycle of 25 years.
• Extended discharge 7-1 to Added a revised commissioning
7-4 schedule.
• Connected reserves
8-1 to Added a revised servicing and
• Stop valves and selector valve
8-4 maintenance schedule.
systems
9-1 to Added an updated material safety
• Room integrity
9-10 data sheet to the appendix only for
• Room pressurisation reference.
• Detection and control systems
REVISION RECORD SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
PAGE 2 REV. 08 2022-JUL-28 25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Date Page Description Date Page Description

2022-JUL-28 9-11 to Moved alternative system compo- 2022-JUL-28 – –
9-28 nents to the appendix. These
components have limited avail-
ability due to end-of-life phase out
processes.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression TABLE OF CONTENTS
25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System 2022-JUL-28 REV. 08 PAGE 1-1
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SECTION PAGE SECTION PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION 1-1 – 1-2 3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Introduction 1-1 Low Pressure Switch (25 bar Systems Only) - 3-70
Approvals 1-1 Alternate Transfer on Fall Option No. 1 -
General Information 1-1 GEMS
Description of SAPPHIRE Systems 1-1 Low Pressure Switch (25 bar Systems Only) - 3-71
Properties of Novec 1230 Fluid 1-1 Alternate Transfer on Fall Option No. 2 -
Safety of Novec 1230 Fluid 1-2 NASON
Low Pressure Switch - ATEX 3-72
2 SYSTEM DESIGN 2-1 – 2-14 (25 bar Systems Only)
Design Standards 2-1 Low Pressure Switch (42 bar Systems Only) 3-74
Special Considerations 2-3 Explosion-Proof Low Pressure Switch (25 bar) 3-76
Determination of Novec 1230 Quantity 2-3 Explosion-Proof Low Pressure Switch (70 bar) 3-77
Achieved Novec 1230 Fluid Concentration 2-4 Pneumatic Trip 3-78
Total Flooding Quantity 2-5 Discharge Nozzles 3-79
Extended Discharge 2-6 Container Brackets 3-84
Connected Reserves 2-6 Discharge Hoses for 25 and 42 bar Systems 3-85
Stop Valves and Selector Valve Systems 2-6 Discharge Hoses for 70 bar Systems 3-87
Room Integrity 2-6 Adjustable Height Adaptors 3-89
Room Pressurisation 2-6 Manifold Check Valves 3-90
Detection and Control Systems 2-6 Manifolds 3-92
Electrical Earthing and Safety Clearances 2-6 Manifold Inlet Socket 3-94
Engineered Systems 2-6 Selector Valve Manifold 3-95
Completing the System Design 2-8 Manifold Drop Sections 3-96
Nozzle Drilling Details 2-8 Manifold Union Adaptor 3-97
Pipework and Fittings 2-8 Manifold Bracket Assemblies 3-98
Nozzles 2-8 Selector Valves (25 bar and 42 bar Systems) 3-100
Tee Split Design 2-8 Selector Valve System (Pilot Container 3-102
Nozzle Drilling Details 2-9 Arrangement for 25 and 42 bar Systems)
Pneumatic Actuation Arrangements 2-14 Selector Valves (70 bar Systems) 3-103
Selector Valve System Components 3-113
3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 – 3-140 Pilot Container - Standard 3-115
System Components 3-1 Contacted Pressure Gauge (CE Pilot 3-117
Bulk Filling Container 3-7 Container)
SAPPHIRE Container and Valve Assemblies 3-8 Alternative Contacted Pressure Gauge 3-119
SAPPHIRE Container Labels 3-19 (CE Pilot Container)
SAPPHIRE Container Valves 3-20 Contacted Pressure Gauge - 3-121
Burst Disc 3-26 TPED, DOT, and PESO Pilot Container
Pressure Gauges 3-28 Pilot Container Safety Burst Disc 3-122
Union Adaptors 3-36 Pilot Container Actuation Burst Disc 3-122
Electrical Actuator 3-37 Pilot Container Solenoid - CE 3-123
Electrical Actuator Bridge Rectifier for 3-38 Pilot Container Solenoid - CE, VdS, UL, 3-124
70 bar Systems and FM
Electrical Actuator - Flameproof (ATEX) 3-40 Placement Indicator Switch Assembly - 3-125
ATEX Electrical Actuator - Support Brackets 3-41 Pilot Container Solenoid
Explosion-Proof Electrical Actuator 3-42 Manual Actuator - Pilot Container Solenoid 3-129
Local Manual Actuator 3-44 Pilot Container Valve 3-130
Pneumatic Actuator 3-45 Pilot Valve Adaptor 3-132
Manual Pneumatic Actuator 3-46 Pilot Line Non-Return Valve 3-133
CPM Actuator 3-47 Pilot Line Extended Non-Return Valve 3-133
Cable Pull Actuation Components 3-49 Pilot Container Bracket Assembly 3-134
Pneumatic Actuation Components 3-53 Decompression Screw 3-135
Discharge Pressure Switch - Standard 3-64 Vent Valve 3-135
Discharge Pressure Switch - ATEX 3-66 Manual Release Caution Plate 3-137
Low Pressure Switch (25 bar Systems Only) 3-68 Door Caution Plate - Lock-Off 3-138
Door Caution Plate - No Lock-Off 3-139
TABLE OF CONTENTS SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
PAGE 1-2 REV. 08 2022-JUL-28 25, 42, and 70 bar Marine System
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SECTION PAGE
4 INSTALLATION 4-1 – 4-10

Installation 4-1
Installing the Pilot Container Components 4-4
5 COMMISSIONING 5-1 – 5-6
6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 6-1 – 6-2

Inspection and Testing 6-1
7 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE 7-1 – 7-4
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 8-1 – 8-4

SCHEDULE
9 APPENDIX 9-1 – 9-28

Novec 1230 Fluid Safety Data Sheet 9-1
Alternative System Components 9-11
Union Adaptors 9-11
Container Brackets 9-12
Manifolds 9-15
Manifold Bracket Assemblies 9-17
Selector Valve System Components 9-18
Pilot Container Assembly 9-21
TPED Pilot Pressure Gauges 9-22
Nitrogen Pilot Valve 9-23
Low Pressure Switch (Nitrogen Pilot Valve) 9-24
Electrical Actuator - DIN Plug Version 9-26
Electrical Actuator - DIN Plug Power Leads 9-28
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
INTRODUCTION
SAPPHIRE fire suppression systems use dodecafluo- The components used in SAPPHIRE systems are designed
ro-2-methylpentan-3-one agent that is designated FK-5-1-12 and tested to operate in the temperature range of -20 °C to
by ISO 14520 Gaseous Fire-Extinguishing Systems and 50 °C, or as stated in separate component approvals. For
EN 15004 - Fixed Firefighting Systems. Gas Extinguishing applications outside this temperature range, contact the
Systems (BS EN 15004 in the UK) and NFPA 2001 - Product Manager. Handling and installation of SAPPHIRE
Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. equipment should only be carried out by persons experienced
This manual has been prepared primarily for the use of in dealing with this type of equipment.
designers and installers of SAPPHIRE fire suppression
equipment. Its purpose is to provide general information DESCRIPTION OF SAPPHIRE SYSTEMS
on 3M™ Novec™ 1230 fluid and its use in SAPPHIRE fire SAPPHIRE systems are designed to suppress fires involving
suppression systems and to give more detailed information flammable liquids, gases, and in electrical equipment. Novec
covering the design, installation, testing, and servicing of 1230 fluid suppresses fires through heat absorption. It does
these systems. not significantly deplete the oxygen content in the room and
tests have shown it to be less toxic than Halon 1301.
A system comprises of one or more containers connected to
! CAUTION
a system of pipework and nozzles. Novec 1230 fluid is stored
The manual covers the minimum requirements for the design under pressure in steel containers, each of which is fitted
of total flooding systems. This manual does not cover local with a valve specially designed to allow the contents of the
application and explosion suppression systems. While inert- container to discharge rapidly. When the valve opens, Novec
ing systems are not specifically excluded, these applications 1230 fluid flows into the distribution pipework to the discharge
require additional considerations. If in doubt, contact the nozzles where it rapidly disperses as a vapour.
Product Manager. If a total flooding system is not designed Discharging Novec 1230 fluid gives the appearance of a fog
and installed to the parameters set out in this manual, ANSUL® that may reduce visibility. This normally clears rapidly and
cannot guarantee the correct operation of the system. should not obstruct the ability of personnel to safely exit the
protected area.
This manual has been prepared based on the best infor-
SAPPHIRE fire suppression systems are particularly valuable
mation available at the time of publication. It is assumed that
in suppressing fires in enclosures containing hazards or
users of this manual have sufficient experience of fixed fire
equipment where a clean, electrically non-conductive medium
suppression systems to enable the correct interpretation to be
is essential, or where the cleaning up of foam, water, or
made of the contents.
powder is problematic. Consideration should be given to the
It must be recognised that the correct system design, instal- positioning of the nozzles to ensure that delicate equipment is
lation, and maintenance are fundamental to the safe and not subjected to cold shock.
effective use of any gaseous fire suppression system.
PROPERTIES OF NOVEC 1230 FLUID
APPROVALS
Under normal conditions, Novec 1230 fluid is an odourless
Novec 1230 fluid and its use in marine applications is liquid with a vapour density around 12 times greater than
approved by a number of marine agencies around the world. air. It has negligible vapour pressure and must be super-
For the latest list, contact the Product Manager. pressurised with dry nitrogen to 25 bar, 42 bar, or 70 bar
Novec 1230 fluid has been fully tested in accordance with nominal pressure when used in fire suppression applications.
the International Maritime Organisation MSC/Circ. 848 as It contains no particulates or oily residues and is produced
modified by MSC/Circ. 1267 on Revised Guidelines for under ISO 9001 guidelines to strict manufacturing specifica-
the Approval of Fixed Gas Fire Extinguishing Systems, as tions ensuring product purity.
referred to in SOLAS 74 for Machinery Spaces and Cargo Novec 1230 fluid decomposes at temperatures in excess of
Pump-Rooms. 482 °C. It is important to avoid applications involving hazards
where continuously hot surfaces are involved. Upon exposure
GENERAL INFORMATION to the flame, Novec 1230 fluid decomposes to form halogen
Novec 1230 fluid has been developed as an alternative to acids. Their presence is readily detected by a sharp, pungent
Halon 1301, production of which ceased at the end of 1993, odour before maximum hazardous exposure levels are
under the agreed adjustments made to the Montreal Protocol reached. It has been concluded from fire toxicity studies that
in November 1992. Novec 1230 fluid contains no bromine or decomposition products from the fire itself, especially carbon
chlorine and has an ozone depleting potential of zero. monoxide, smoke, oxygen depletion and heat, may create a
greater hazard.
SAPPHIRE systems utilise one or more storage containers
arranged to provide the protected area with a pre-determined
quantity of gas. SAPPHIRE storage containers are designed
to hold Novec 1230 fluid in liquid form and nitrogen, which
is used to super-pressurise the container to either 25 bar,
41 bar (welded containers), 42 bar (seamless containers),
thereafter referred to as 42 bar nominal, or 70 bar (seamless
containers).
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAFETY OF NOVEC 1230 FLUID POST DISCHARGE VENTILATION

To allow for the ventilation of Novec 1230 fluid or the post
TOXICITY fire atmosphere, a normally closed means of ventilation
The following table details the toxicological data on Novec with extract arrangements is required, as with any gaseous
1230 fluid and compares this with Halon 1301. suppression system. Any mechanical ventilation provided
should not form part of the normal ventilation system. Controls
TABLE 1-1: TOXICOLOGICAL DATA for the ventilation system should be outside the protected
enclosure and should preferably be key operated. In some
Novec Halon circumstances the normally closed means of ventilation may
1230 fluid 1301 be provided by doors and windows. Consideration should
be given to the leakage of agent into adjacent areas post
Cardiac sensitisation 10.0% 5.0% discharge. Adequate means of ventilation must be available
No observed adverse effect level in the these adjacent areas. Where mechanical ventilation is
(NOAEL) used, consideration should be given that the area where the
system is extracted to has adequate ventilation to prevent
Cardiac sensitisation >10.0% 7.5% excessive build up of agent concentration that may exceed
Lowest observed adverse effect the NOAEL and LOAEL.
level (LOAEL)
GLAZING WITHIN PROTECTED AREAS
Design concentration (minimum)* 5.85% 5.0% As with any gaseous agent, if the system is likely to give
Note: * For marine safety. rise to any significant under or over-pressurisation of the
enclosure, any glazing present should be wired or otherwise
As listed in this table, Novec 1230 fluid has extremely low suitable.
toxicity. As it suppresses fires at low concentrations, it does
not significantly reduce oxygen levels. DISCHARGE TESTING
NOISE Discharge testing is not generally considered necessary or
recommended. However, in instances where the performance
The discharge of a SAPPHIRE system can cause noise loud of the system cannot be established by room integrity testing,
enough to startle, but ordinarily insufficient to cause traumatic consider a discharge test. Before carrying out a discharge
injury. test, consult Product Management. Discharge testing should
be regarded as the least environmentally friendly means of
TURBULENCE testing the performance of the system. If possible, it should
High velocity discharge from nozzles may be sufficient be avoided.
to dislodge substantial objects directly in the path of the
discharge. General turbulence in the enclosure may be
sufficient to move light objects, such as unsecured paper.
Ceiling tiles in the vicinity of the nozzles should be clipped in
place to prevent them being dislodged during the discharge.
LOW TEMPERATURE
Direct contact with vapourising liquid Novec 1230 fluid has a
strong chilling effect on objects and can cause frostbite burns
to the skin. The liquid phase vapourises rapidly when mixed
with air and limits the hazard to the immediate vicinity of the
discharge nozzle.
VISIBILITY
Upon discharge some reduced visibility occurs, especially
in humid atmospheres, as a result of the water vapour’s
condensation. The period of reduced visibility is normally
brief.
EXITS
Adequate means of escape from the protected area should be
provided. Doors should open outwards if LOAEL is exceeded
and should be self-closing. They should be arranged to open
easily from the inside and any that need to be secured must
be fitted with escape overrides.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 2 – SYSTEM DESIGN
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DESIGN STANDARDS
The information contained in this manual has been based The volume of starting air receivers, converted to free
generally on ISO 14520 - Gaseous Fire-Extinguishing air volume should be added to the gross volume of the
Systems and EN 15004 - Fixed Firefighting Systems, and machinery spaces when calculating the necessary quantity of
Gas Extinguishing Systems (BS EN 15004 in the UK). The suppression medium. Alternatively, a discharge pipe from the
more specific details relating to the use of the SAPPHIRE safety valves may be fitted and led directly to the open air.
system in marine applications is based on the annexed – The objects that occupy volume in the protected space
guidelines of MSC/Circ. 848 as modified by MSC/Circ. 1267, should be subtracted from the gross volume of the
which specify the following (as it applies to halocarbon space. They include, but are not necessarily limited to the
agents). following:
Many features of SAPPHIRE systems follow the same • Auxiliary machinery
principles as Halon 1301 systems. Familiarity with Halon 1301
total flooding systems would assist in the application of the • Boilers
general principles for SAPPHIRE systems. • Condensers
The manual has been prepared to give an understanding in • Evaporators
the application of SAPPHIRE systems. Systems are suitable
• Main engines
only for the total flooding of hazard enclosures.
• Reduction gears
General information • Tanks
• Fixed gas fire suppression systems for use in machinery • Trunks
spaces of category A and cargo pump-rooms equivalent to
fire suppression systems required by SOLAS regulations – Subsequent modifications to the protected space that
II-2/10.4 and II-2/10.9 should prove that the systems have alter the net volume of the space shall require the
the same reliability that has been identified as significant quantity of suppression agent to be adjusted to meet
for the performance of fixed gas fire suppression systems the requirements of this paragraph and the following
approved under the requirements of FSS Code, Chapter 5. paragraph.
In addition, the system’s fire suppression capabilities should • No fire suppression agent should be used that is carcino-
be tested concerning the types of fires that can occur in a genic, mutagenic, or teratogenic at concentrations expected
ship’s engine room. The SAPPHIRE marine system has during use. All systems should be designed to allow the
several Marine Type Approvals granted by leading Marine evacuation of the protected spaces before the discharge.
Societies. Reference should be made to any technical Even at concentrations below the adverse effect level,
requirements contained in the appropriate Marine Type exposure to gaseous fire suppression agents should not
Approval when designing SAPPHIRE systems under the exceed five minutes. Halocarbon agents may be used up
jurisdiction of a particular Marine Class Society. to the NOAEL calculated on the net volume of protected
space at the maximum ambient temperature without
Principal requirements additional safety measures. If a halocarbon agent is used
• All requirements of the FSS Code, Chapter 5, regulation 2.1. above its NOAEL, means should be provided to limit
exposure to no longer than the time specified according to
• The minimum suppression concentration should be deter- a scientifically accepted physiologically based pharmaco-
mined by a cup burner test acceptable to the Administration. kinetic* (PBPK) model or its equivalent that clearly estab-
The design concentration should be at least 30% above the lishes safe exposure limits both in terms of suppression
minimum suppression concentration. These concentrations media concentration and human exposure time.
should be verified by full scale testing described in the test
Note: * Refer to document FP 44INF.2-Physiologically based
method, as set out in the appendix. pharmacokinetic model to establish safe exposure criteria for halocarbon
• For halocarbon clean agents, 95% of the design concen- suppression systems.
tration should be discharged in 10 seconds or less. • The system and its components should be suitably
• The quantity of suppression agent for the protected space designed to withstand ambient temperature changes,
should be calculated at the minimum expected ambient vibration, humidity, shock, impact, clogging, and corrosion
temperature using the design concentration based on the normally encountered in machinery spaces or cargo
net volume of the protected space, including the casing. pump-rooms in ships.
The calculated quantity of agent supplied should not • The system and its components should be designed
fall below its minimum design concentration when the and installed in accordance with international standards
temperature within the protected space falls below its acceptable to the organisation and manufactured and tested
minimum expected ambient temperature. to the satisfaction of the Administration. As a minimum, the
- The net volume of a protected space is that part of the design and installation standards should cover the following
gross volume of the space that is accessible to the free elements:
suppression agent gas.
- When calculating the net volume of a protected space,
the net volume should include the volume of the bilge, the
volume of the casing, and the volume of free air contained
in air receivers, that in the event of a fire when released
into the protected space, would seriously affect the
efficiency of the fixed fire suppression system.
SECTION 2 – SYSTEM DESIGN SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DESIGN STANDARDS (Continued) • When halocarbon systems are used as the fire suppression
media in total flooding systems, observe the following
Principal requirements (Continued) parameters:
– Safety: toxicity, noise, nozzle discharge, decompo- – The system should be arranged only for manual initiation
sition products, obscuration and minimum safe distance of power release.
required between nozzles and escape routes and
combustible materials – The system should be designed to operate within
a temperature range to the satisfaction of the
– Storage container design and arrangement and the Administration.
following strength requirements:
– The discharge should not endanger personnel engaged
• Maximum and minimum fill density and operating on the maintenance of equipment or using the normal
temperature range access ladders and escapes serving the space.
• Pressure and weight indication – Means should be provided for the crew to safely check
• Pressure relief, agent identification, installation date, the pressure within the containers.
and hazard classification • Agent containers may be stored in a protected machinery
– Agent supply, quantity, quality standards, and service life space, if the containers are distributed throughout the
of the agent and actuation devices space and the following provisions are met:
– Pipe and fittings: strength, material, properties, fire – Containers should be individually distributed throughout
resistance, and cleaning requirements that space.
– Valves: testing requirements and elastomer compatibility – Manually initiated power release, located outside the
– Nozzles: height and area testing requirements, protected space, should be provided. Duplicate sources
elevated temperature resistance, and mounting location of power should be provided for this release and should
requirements considering safe distances to escape routes be located outside the protected space.
and combustible materials – Electric power circuits connecting the containers should
– Actuation and control systems: testing requirements and be monitored for fault conditions and loss of power.
backup power requirements Visual and audible alarms should be provided to indicate
this.
– Alarms and indicators:
– Pneumatic or hydraulic power circuits connecting
• Predischarge alarm, agent discharge alarms as time the containers should be duplicated. The sources of
delays pneumatic or hydraulic pressure should be monitored for
• Abort switches, supervisory circuit requirements; loss of pressure. Visual and audible alarms should be
provided to indicate this.
• Warning signs and audible and visual alarms should
be located outside each entry to the relevant space as – In the protected space, electrical circuits essential for the
appropriate, and the annunciation of faults release of the system should be fire resistant according
to standard IEC 60331 or other equivalent standards.
• Agent flow calculation: approval and testing of the design
Pipe systems essential for the release of systems
calculation method, fitting losses and equivalent length, and
designed to be operated hydraulically or pneumatically
discharge time
should be of steel or other equivalent heat-resisting
• Enclosure integrity and leakage requirements: material to the satisfaction of the Administration.
– Enclosure leakage – Each pressure container should be fitted with an
– Openings and mechanical ventilation interlocks automatic overpressure release device which, in the
event of the container being exposed to the effects of
• Design concentration requirements and the total flooding
fire and the system not being operated, safely vents the
quantity
contents of the container into the protected space.
• Discharge time
– The containers should be monitored for a decrease
• Inspection, maintenance, and testing requirements in pressure due to leakage and discharge. Visual
• The nozzle type, maximum nozzle spacing, maximum and audible alarms in the protected area and on the
height and minimum nozzle pressure should be within navigation bridge or in the space where the fire control
tested limits to provide fire suppression per the proposed equipment is centralised should be provided to indicate
test method. this condition.
• Provisions should be made to ensure that escape routes – The arrangement of containers and the electrical circuits
that are exposed to leakage from the protected space and pipework essential for the release of any system
are not rendered hazardous during or after the discharge should be that in the event of damage to any one power
of the agent. Control stations and other locations that release line or container valve through mechanical
require manning during a fire situation should have provi- damage, fire, or explosion in a protected space, for
sions to keep hydrogen fluoride and hydrogen chloride example, a single fault concept, at least the amount
below 5 ppm at that location. The concentrations of other of agent needed to achieve the minimum suppression
products should be kept below concentrations considered concentration can still be discharged having regard to the
hazardous for the required duration of exposure. requirement for uniform distribution of medium throughout
the space.
• A minimum agent hold time of 15 minutes should be
provided.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DESIGN STANDARDS (Continued)

The containers should be located in areas that meet the
Principal requirements (Continued)
following guidelines:
• The release of a suppression agent may produce signif-
• Suitable ventilation
icant over and under pressurisation in the protected space.
Measures to limit the induced pressures to acceptable limits • Protected from a fire
should be provided. • Not exposed to weather, mechanical damage, or corrosion
• For all ships, the fire suppression system design manual • Easily accessible for maintenance and the operation of the
should address recommended procedures for the control local manual release, where applicable
of products of agent decomposition, including HF vapour
• Floor loading should also be taken into account
generated from fluorocarbon suppression agents that
could impair escape. Longer exposure of the agent to high The following notes provide additional information to assist
temperatures would produce greater concentrations of the designer in providing the correct system for the hazard.
these gases. The type and sensitivity of detection, coupled SAPPHIRE systems are suitable for the protection of
with the rate of discharge, should be selected to minimise hazards involving Class A, B, and C materials. Providing
the exposure time of the agent to the elevated temperature. a Class A fire is detected quickly, the Novec 1230 fluid is
The performance of fire suppression arrangements on discharged promptly, and the concentration is maintained for
passenger ships should not present health hazards an adequate period of time to allow embers to cool, surface
from decomposed suppression agents. For example, on fire and embers associated with the burning of solid materials
passenger ships the decomposition products should not are quickly suppressed. SAPPHIRE systems are suitable for
be discharged in the vicinity of muster (assembly) stations. use on fires involving live electrical equipment. SAPPHIRE
Other mitigating steps include evacuation and putting on systems are not effective on, and should not be used to fight
face masks. fires involving the following materials:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS • Chemicals containing their own supply of oxygen, such as

cellulose nitrate
If for practical reasons, such as space limitations, the require-
ments of the Section 2 – Principal Requirements cannot be • Mixtures containing oxidising agents such as sodium
implemented in full, then an agreement should be reached chlorate or sodium nitrate
with the Authority. • Chemicals capable of undergoing auto-thermal decompo-
The recommended minimum design temperature is 0 ºC but sition, such as some organic peroxides
in cases where the minimum enclosure space temperature • Reactive metals
is higher than 0 ºC then an agreement on an appropriate • Solid materials in which fires quickly become deep seated
minimum design temperature should be reached with the
Authority. • Enclosure already protected by a gaseous system utilising
a different gas
If an agreement is reached with the Authority, the system can
be operated by a suitable pneumatic control box (supplied Class B and C fires are quickly suppressed by Novec 1230
by others) providing that the pressure at the discharge of the fluid at the appropriate concentrations, but in the case
pilot containers used in the pneumatic control box does not of Class C fires the risk of explosion should be carefully
exceed 100 bar at 15 ºC. considered and where possible, the flammable gas flow
should be isolated before or as soon as possible after
DETERMINATION OF NOVEC 1230 QUANTITY suppressing.
Before commencing with the design of any SAPPHIRE Determine the gross volume of the protected space. The
system, the designer should have, as a minimum, the net volume can only be considered if there are permanent
following details: impermeable objects within the area. The objects that occupy
volume in the protected space should be subtracted from the
• Enclosure dimensions gross volume of the space. They include, but are not neces-
• Specific details of the hazard, such as fuel types, sarily limited to the following:
chemicals, and excessive fire load • Auxiliary machinery
• The minimum and maximum temperatures of the hazard • Boilers
enclosure
• Condensers
• Confirmation that the containment is adequate
• Evaporators
• Details of the ventilation system
• Main engines
• Intended occupancy of the enclosure
• Reduction gears
• Storage container location. This may be either inside or
outside the protected space providing the requirements of • Tanks
FSS Code, Chapter 5 are satisfied. • Trunks
The net volume of a protected space is that part of the gross
volume of the space, that is accessible to the fire suppression
agent.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DETERMINATION OF NOVEC 1230 QUANTITY Where

(Continued) P1 = 30 bar
Additionally, when calculating the net volume of a protected V1 = 0.5 m³
space, the net volume should include the volume of the
bilge, the volume of the casing, and the volume of free air P2 = 1 bar
contained in air receivers that in the event of a fire may be
P1 x V1 30 x 0.5
released into the protected space. V2 = =
T1 1
Establish the minimum anticipated temperature of the
protected space. Novec 1230 fluid may not be used where V2 = 15 m³
the hazard temperature is below -20 °C, subject to special Add 15 m³ per air receiver to volume = 30 m³
considerations and approval by the authority. The system
Net volume but including air receivers = 546 m³ + 30 m³ =
must be designed using the minimum design temperature.
576 m³.
Determine the minimum design concentration required for the
Quantity of Novec 1230 fluid to give a design concentration of
hazard involved. For marine applications, this is a minimum
5.85% and based on minimum temperature of 0 °C. (Flooding
of 5.85%. If in doubt, contact the Product Manager. All design
factor) = 0.9358 kg/m³.
concentrations in this manual are based on the published
minimum extinguishing concentration, plus a 30% safety 576 m³ x 0.9358 kg/m³ = 539.0 kg of Novec 1230 fluid.
factor. Therefore use 4 x 147 L containers each complete with
135 kg of Novec 1230 fluid (540 kg).
Multiply the volume by the appropriate flooding factor from
Table 2-1 or determine the agent quantity required by using
ACHIEVED NOVEC 1230 FLUID CONCENTRATION
the formula:
In the event that it is suspected that the achieved concen-
W = V
S ( C
)
100 – C
tration may approach or exceed 10%, a check using the
following formula is to be made:
Where W = Agent weight required (kg) W•S•100

C =
V = Hazard volume (m³) V + (W•S)
S = Specific vapour volume (m³/kg)
Where W = Agent weight (kg)
(S = 0.0664 + 0.000274t)
V = Enclosure volume (m³)
t = Design temperature in hazard volume (°C)
S = Specific vapour volume (m³/kg)
C = Design concentration (% by volume)
C = Concentration (% by volume)
EXAMPLE CALCULATION
The following is offered as an example of how the quantity of Novec 1230 fluid must not be used in concentrations greater
Novec 1230 fluid may be calculated. than 10% (the NOAEL) without the use of two separate
Machinery Space (with allowable deductions of 97 m³) controls for releasing gas into the protected space and to
ensure the activation of the alarm. In this event, one control
Minimum Temperature = 0 °C shall be used to discharge Novec 1230 fluid from the storage
Maximum Temperature = 30 °C container. A second control shall be used for opening the
Gross Volume = 643 m³ valve of the piping which conveys the Novec 1230 fluid into
the protected space. The two controls shall be located inside
Net Volume (Gross Volume less allowable deductions) = a release box clearly identified for the particular space.
546 m³
Check whether Novec 1230 fluid concentration exceeds
Volume of free air in air receivers = 500 L NOAEL or LOAEL at maximum temperature (30 °C).
Number of receivers = 2 C = W.S.100 / V + (W.S)
If the air receivers vent within the protected space, an C = (540 x 0.0746 x 100) / 576 + (540 x 0.0746)
additional quantity of Novec 1230 fluid is required.
C = 4028.4 / 616.284
Allowance for air receivers:
C = 6.54%
P1 x V1 P2 x V2 Therefore NOAEL is not exceeded.
=
T1 T2
NOTICE
At constant temperature: For LPG carriers, the minimum design
concentration is 6.5% and LNG is 7.2%.
P1 x V1 = P2 x V2 Note that these values are not inerting
concentrations. They are to be used as the
suppression design concentration for these
risks.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TOTAL FLOODING QUANTITY
TABLE 2-1: NOVEC 1230 FLUID TOTAL FLOODING QUANTITY

Specific
Vapour Weight Requirements of Hazard Volume, W/V (kg/m3)
Temp. Volume Minimum Design Concentration (% by volume)
ºC (m3/kg) 5.85 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.1 7.2
-20 0.0609 1.0203 1.0295 1.0481 1.0667 1.0854 1.1040 1.1228 1.1415 1.1603 1.1792 1.1981 1.2170 1.2359 1.2549 1.2740
-15 0.0623 0.9973 1.0064 1.0246 1.0427 1.0610 1.0792 1.0975 1.1159 1.1343 1.1527 1.1711 1.1896 1.2082 1.2267 1.2454
-10 0.0637 0.9754 0.9843 1.0020 1.0198 1.0376 1.0555 1.0734 1.0913 1.1093 1.1273 1.1454 1.1635 1.1816 1.1998 1.2180
-5 0.0650 0.9559 0.9646 0.9820 0.9994 1.0169 1.0344 1.0519 1.0695 1.0871 1.1048 1.1225 1.1402 1.1580 1.1758 1.1936
0 0.0664 0.9358 0.9443 0.9613 0.9784 0.9955 1.0126 1.0298 1.0470 1.0642 1.0815 1.0988 1.1162 1.1336 1.1510 1.1685
5 0.0678 0.9164 0.9248 0.9414 0.9582 0.9749 0.9917 1.0085 1.0253 1.0422 1.0592 1.0761 1.0931 1.1102 1.1272 1.1443
10 0.0691 0.8992 0.9074 0.9237 0.9401 0.9566 0.9730 0.9895 1.0061 1.0226 1.0392 1.0559 1.0726 1.0893 1.1060 1.1228
15 0.0705 0.8813 0.8894 0.9054 0.9215 0.9376 0.9537 0.9699 0.9861 1.0023 1.0186 1.0349 1.0513 1.0676 1.0841 1.1005
20 0.0719 0.8642 0.8720 0.8878 0.9035 0.9193 0.9351 0.9510 0.9669 0.9828 0.9988 1.0148 1.0308 1.0469 1.0630 1.0791
25 0.0733 0.8477 0.8554 0.8708 0.8863 0.9017 0.9173 0.9328 0.9484 0.9640 0.9797 0.9954 1.0111 1.0269 1.0427 1.0585
30 0.0746 0.8329 0.8405 0.8556 0.8708 0.8860 0.9013 0.9166 0.9319 0.9472 0.9626 0.9780 0.9935 1.0090 1.0245 1.0400
35 0.0760 0.8176 0.8250 0.8399 0.8548 0.8697 0.8847 0.8997 0.9147 0.9298 0.9449 0.9600 0.9752 0.9904 1.0056 1.0209
40 0.0774 0.8028 0.8101 0.8247 0.8393 0.8540 0.8687 0.8834 0.8982 0.9130 0.9278 0.9427 0.9575 0.9725 0.9874 1.0024
45 0.0787 0.7895 0.7967 0.8111 0.8254 0.8399 0.8543 0.8688 0.8833 0.8979 0.9125 0.9271 0.9417 0.9564 0.9711 0.9858
50 0.0801 0.7757 0.7828 0.7969 0.8110 0.8252 0.8394 0.8536 0.8679 0.8822 0.8965 0.9109 0.9253 0.9397 0.9541 0.9686
55 0.0815 0.7624 0.7693 0.7832 0.7971 0.8110 0.8250 0.8390 0.8530 0.8670 0.8811 0.8952 0.9094 0.9235 0.9377 0.9520
60 0.0829 0.7495 0.7563 0.7700 0.7836 0.7973 0.8110 0.8248 0.8386 0.8524 0.8662 0.8801 0.8940 0.9079 0.9219 0.9359
65 0.0842 0.7379 0.7446 0.7581 0.7715 0.7850 0.7985 0.8121 0.8256 0.8392 0.8529 0.8665 0.8802 0.8939 0.9077 0.9215
1. Agent weight requirements (kg/m³) - kilograms of agent required per cubic metre of protected volume.
2. Temperature (t) - the design temperature of the hazard area.
3. Specific vapour volume (S) (m³/kg) - specific volume of superheated Novec 1230 vapour.
4. Concentration (C) - volumetric concentration of Novec 1230 fluid in air at the temperature indicated.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
EXTENDED DISCHARGE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

In general, extended discharges are excluded from this Detection and control systems associated with fixed fire
manual. However, it is recognised that there are instances fighting systems are outside the scope of this manual.
where longer discharges provide enhanced protection, such Reference should be made to the applicable equipment
as control cabinets, and are permitted up to 20 seconds manufacturer’s manuals and relevant standards.
provided that the minimum design concentration is achieved Delayed operation may give rise to greater levels of agent
within 10 seconds. decomposition and the products of combustion. High levels
If extended discharges are required because of run down of decomposition products could result in corrosion. Early
times on extraction systems, the system should maintain the warning detection and release of agent is considered best
minimum design concentration in the risk for a minimum of 10 practice.
minutes. This is normally achieved by a secondary extended For electrical isolation of the system refer to the electrical
discharge system using its own pipework system. operating instructions. Mechanical actuation devices used in
Consult the Product Manager for applications where an the system are removable and may be removed to isolate the
extended discharge beyond this period may be required. system mechanically.
The detection and control systems should ensure, by suitable
CONNECTED RESERVES alarms and time delays, the safe evacuation of the protected
Connected reserve containers can be accommodated in risk before the discharge of the agent.
the system. The means by which this is achieved varies If the system is to be in compliance with EN 15004 the
depending on the specific circumstances of the project. For following criteria shall be met:
the most suitable method on a specific project, contact the
Product Manager. • Fire detection components shall be approved to the
relevant part of EN 54 or EN 15004, whichever applies.
STOP VALVES AND SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEMS • Electrical manual releases shall be approved in accordance
Stop valves and selector valves can be accommodated with EN 12094-3.
in the system. Both types of arrangement create closed • Electrical automatic control and delay devices shall be
sections of pipework and require pressure relieving devices approved in accordance with EN 12094-1.
(pressure relief valves). The arrangements vary according
• Stop devices, such as abort switches, shall be approved in
to the specific details applicable on the project. For the most
accordance with EN 12094-3.
suitable method on a specific project, refer to the Product
Manager.
ELECTRICAL EARTHING AND SAFETY CLEARANCES
ROOM INTEGRITY For guidance on the requirements for earthing and safety
clearances, see the appropriate section of the design
The successful performance of a gaseous total flooding
standards listed in Section 2 – Design Standards.
system is largely dependent on the integrity of the protected
enclosure. It is a requirement that a room integrity test is
ENGINEERED SYSTEMS
performed on any protected enclosure to establish the total
equivalent leakage area and enable a prediction to be made Hydraulic software
of the enclosure’s ability to retain Novec 1230 fluid. The
required retention time varies depending on the particulars of The SAPPHIRE hydraulic flow programme contains a sophis-
the hazard but is not normally less than 15 minutes. Longer ticated calculation routine for predicting the two phase, two
retention times may sometimes be necessary if enclosures component flow of nitrogen and Novec 1230 fluid through a
contain hazards that may readily become deep seated. The system of pipework. Three software packages are available,
procedure provided in ISO 14520 and EN 15004 should be JENSEN HUGHES (JH), VdS, and the Suppression Design
used for performing the room integrity test. Centre (SDC). See Table 2-2 on where each platform can be
used.
ROOM PRESSURISATION TABLE 2-2: SAPPHIRE SOFTWARE PACKAGES
In considering room integrity the designer should be aware
Software Type Nominal System Pressure
that the discharge of any gaseous suppressing agent into
an enclosure gives rise to a change in the pressure within JENSEN HUGHES1 SAPPHIRE 25 bar
that enclosure, which under some conditions could affect the VdS 2
SAPPHIRE 25 bar or 42 bar
structural integrity of the enclosure. Over and under pressure
SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS 70 bar
relief should be considered as detailed in the PD CEN ISO/
Notes: 1. T
he JENSEN HUGHES flow programme assumes a nominal agent
TS 21805 (Guidance on design, selection and installation
temperature of 21 °C. When the storage temperature varies by
of vents to safeguard the structural integrity of enclosures more than +/- 5.5 °C, for a single unbalanced system protecting
protected by gaseous fire-extinguishing systems, anticipated two or more enclosures, there is a risk that the system will not
to become a full standard EN ISO 21805:2022). For further supply the designed quantity of suppressing agent to the respective
information on this subject, refer to the Product Manager. enclosure.
2. T
he VdS software requires the designer to enter the storage
temperature of the containers. If the storage temperature varies,
enter the minimum storage temperature.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ENGINEERED SYSTEMS (Continued)
Hydraulic software (Continued)

Consider the following parameters in Table 2-3 to avoid a
system reject when running the calculation:
TABLE 2-3: SOFTWARE DESIGN PARAMETERS

JH 25 bar VdS 25/42 bar SDC 70 bar
software software software Notes
Minimum nozzle pressure 5.5 bar 7.0 bar 6.33 bar
Maximum variation in nozzle – – 32 bar
pressure
Maximum agent in pipe 80% 90% 80%
(unbalanced)
Discharge time 6 s to 10 s VdS software only gives a
warning if the calculated
discharge time exceeds
inputted discharge time. No
warning given if the discharge
time is under 6 seconds.
Side tee split 10% to 35% VdS software only gives a
warning on tee splits below 9%.
Bull tee splits 30% to 70%
Fill density 0.5 to 1.2 kg/L 0.5 to 1.2 kg/L 0.3 to 1.4 kg/L VdS software only gives a
(25 bar) warning on fill density below
0.5 to 1.0 kg/L 0.4 kg/L.
(42 bar)
Maximum liquid arrival time 1.0 s imbalance – 0.7 s
imbalance
Maximum liquid run out time 2.0 s – –
Arrival / run out time – 21% of liquid 3.8 s limit
imbalance discharge time
Maximum elevation in pipe 9.1 m 8.2 m
run
Maximum nozzle height 5m
Minimum agent in pipe before 10% VdS software gives no warning
the first tee below 10%.
Maximum pressure drop – – 45% to 93%
before the first tee of container
pressure
Maximum nozzles per system 20 200 No limit
Maximum enclosures per 10 21 –
system
Ratio of nozzle area to pipe 20% to 80% (20 mm to 10.1% to 78.5% VdS software gives no warning
cross sectional area5 50 mm nozzles) below minimum or above
10% to 80% (15 mm nozzle) maximum.
Both the JENSEN HUGHES and VdS hydraulic flow calculation programmes are copy-protected and historically, have been
supplied as standalone versions with the software protection key included. SAPPHIRE PLUS 70 bar software is not available
as a standalone version and is only available within the SDC through a web based application.
Additionally, both JENSEN HUGHES and VdS hydraulic flow calculation programme applications are currently under devel-
opment in the SDC utilising the same calculation engine as the standalone version. A technical bulletin will be released
on completion and certification. Until this time, continue to use the JENSEN HUGHES and VdS standalone software for
SAPPHIRE 25 and 42 bar hydraulic software calculations.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
COMPLETING THE SYSTEM DESIGN

Once the programme has completed its calculations and the
Design Engineer has taken account of any warnings and
corrected as required to produce a valid design calculation,
the appropriate discharge nozzles can then be ordered.
The calculated orifice area is used to provide drilling
information from Tables 2-4 to 2-8.
NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS

Tables 2-4 to 2-8 detail the available orifice drill sizes for
each size and type of nozzle. When ordering it is necessary
to quote the nozzle part number and orifice drill size.
PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

Pipework and fittings shall comply with the appropriate
national standards, shall be non-combustible and able to
withstand the expected pressures and temperatures without
damage. In respect of pipe material, galvanised or stainless
steel pipe is preferred but black pipe may be acceptable in
combination with the application of an appropriate surface
protection.
Consult ISO 14520 - Gaseous Fire Extinguishing Systems,
EN 15004 - Fixed Fire fighting Systems, FIA Pipe Guidance
Document, or NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire
Extinguishing Systems to determine the grade of pipework
and fittings to be used in the system.
NOZZLES
Nozzles are available in brass or stainless steel, BSPT or
NPT threads with a 180º or 360º discharge pattern. For
further information on nozzle drill sizes and coverage details,
see Section 3 – Discharge Nozzles.
TEE SPLIT DESIGN

All tee outlets must be in the same horizontal plane. The
incorrect orientation of the side and bull tee could result in
the separation of the Novec 1230 fluid from the nitrogen, due
to the greater density of Novec 1230 fluid. The design would
also be outside the parameters permitted by the calculation
software.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS
TABLE 2-4: 50 mm x 180° (7 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

DETAILS
Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area
(mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software
6.0 197.9 SDC 10.6 617.7 JENSEN 15.2 1270.2 JENSEN HUGHES
SAPPHIRE HUGHES and and VdS Sch40,
6.1 204.6 10.7 629.4 15.3 1287.0
PLUS Sch80 VdS Sch40, VdS VdS Sch80, SDC
6.2 211.3 10.8 641.3 15.4 1303.9
Sch80, SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS
6.3 218.2 10.9 653.2 SAPPHIRE PLUS 15.5 1320.8 Sch40, SDC
6.4 225.2 SDC Sch40, SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS
11.0 665.2 15.6 1337.9
SAPPHIRE SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
6.5 232.3 11.1 677.4 Sch80 15.7 1355.1
PLUS Sch40
6.6 239.5 and SDC 11.2 689.6 15.8 1372.5
6.7 246.8 SAPPHIRE
11.3 702.0 15.9 1389.9
PLUS Sch80
6.8 254.2 11.4 714.5 16.0 1407.4
6.9 261.7 11.5 727.1 16.1 1425.1
7.0 269.4 11.6 739.8 16.2 1442.8
7.1 277.1 11.7 752.6 16.3 1460.7
7.2 285.0 11.8 765.5 16.4 1478.7
7.3 293.0 11.9 778.5 16.5 1496.8 JENSEN HUGHES
7.4 301.1 and VdS Sch40,
12.0 791.7
VdS Sch80, and
7.5 309.3 12.1 804.9 16.6 1515.0 SDC SAPPHIRE
7.6 317.6 12.2 818.3 PLUS Sch40
7.7 326.0 12.3 831.8 16.7 1533.3 JENSEN HUGHES
7.8 334.5 and VdS Sch40,
12.4 845.3 16.8 1551.7
SDC SAPPHIRE
7.9 343.1 12.5 859.0 16.9 1570.2 PLUS Sch40
8.0 351.9 12.6 872.8 17.0 1588.9
8.1 360.7 12.7 886.7 17.1 1607.6
8.2 369.7 12.8 900.8 17.2 1626.5
8.3 378.7 12.9 914.9 17.3 1645.4
8.4 387.9 VdS Sch80, 13.0 929.1 17.4 1664.5
SDC SAPPHIRE
8.5 397.2 13.1 943.5 17.5 1683.7
PLUS Sch40,
8.6 406.6 and SDC 13.2 957.9 17.6 1703.0 JENSEN HUGHES
8.7 416.1 SAPPHIRE and VdS Sch40
13.3 972.5 17.7 1722.4
PLUS Sch80
8.8 425.7 13.4 987.2
8.9 435.5 JENSEN 13.5 1002.0
HUGHES and
9.0 445.3 13.6 1016.9
VdS Sch40,
9.1 455.3 VdS Sch80, 13.7 1031.9
9.2 465.3 SDC SAPPHIRE
13.8 1047.0
PLUS Sch40,
9.3 475.5 13.9 1062.2
SDC SAPPHIRE
9.4 485.8 PLUS Sch80 14.0 1077.6
9.5 496.2 14.1 1093.0
9.6 506.7 14.2 1108.6
9.7 517.3 14.3 1124.2
9.8 528.0 14.4 1140.0
9.9 538.8 14.5 1155.9
10.0 549.8 14.6 1171.9
10.1 560.8 14.7 1188.0
10.2 572.0 14.8 1204.2
10.3 583.3 14.9 1220.6
10.4 594.6 15.0 1237.0
10.5 606.1 15.1 1253.6
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS (Continued)

DETAILS
Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area
(mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software
4.6 116.3 SDC SAPPHIRE 9.0 445.3 JENSEN 12.9 914.9 JENSEN
PLUS Sch80 HUGHES and HUGHES and VdS
4.7 121.4 9.1 455.3 13.0 929.1
VdS Sch40, VdS Sch40, and SDC
4.8 126.7 9.2 465.3 Sch80, SDC 13.1 943.5 SAPPHIRE PLUS
4.9 132.0 9.3 475.5 SAPPHIRE PLUS 13.2 957.9 Sch40
Sch40, and SDC
5.0 137.4 SDC SAPPHIRE 9.4 485.8 13.3 972.5
SAPPHIRE PLUS
PLUS Sch40 and 9.5 496.2 Sch80 13.4 987.2
5.1 143.0
SDC SAPPHIRE
5.2 148.7 PLUS Sch80 9.6 506.7 13.5 1002.0
5.3 154.4 9.7 517.3 13.6 1016.9
5.4 160.3 9.8 528.0 13.7 1031.9
5.5 166.3 9.9 538.8 13.8 1047.0 JENSEN
HUGHES and VdS
5.6 172.4 10.0 549.8
Sch40
5.7 178.6 10.1 560.8
5.8 184.9 10.2 572.0
5.9 191.4 10.3 583.3
6.0 197.9 10.4 594.6
6.1 204.6 10.5 606.1
6.2 211.3 10.6 617.7
6.3 218.2 10.7 629.4
6.4 225.2 10.8 641.3
6.5 232.3 VdS Sch80, SDC 10.9 653.2
SAPPHIRE PLUS 11.0 665.2
6.6 239.5
Sch40, and SDC
6.7 246.8 SAPPHIRE PLUS 11.1 677.4
6.8 254.2 Sch80 11.2 689.6
6.9 261.7 11.3 702.0
7.0 269.4 JENSEN 11.4 714.5
HUGHES and 11.5 727.1
7.1 277.1
VdS Sch40, VdS
7.2 285.0 Sch80, SDC 11.6 739.8
7.3 293.0 SAPPHIRE PLUS 11.7 752.6
Sch40, and SDC
7.4 301.1 11.8 765.5
SAPPHIRE PLUS
7.5 309.3 Sch80 11.9 778.5
7.6 317.6 12.0 791.7
7.7 326.0 12.1 804.9
7.8 334.5 12.2 818.3
7.9 343.1 12.3 831.8
8.0 351.9 12.4 845.3
8.1 360.7 12.5 859.0
8.2 369.7 12.6 872.8
8.3 378.7 12.7 886.7
8.4 387.9 12.8 900.8 JENSEN
HUGHES, VdS
8.5 397.2
Sch40, VdS
8.6 406.6 Sch80, and SDC
8.7 416.1 SAPPHIRE PLUS
Sch40
8.8 425.7
8.9 435.5
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

DETAILS
Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area
(mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software
4.0 88.0 SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS 8.6 406.6 JENSEN HUGHES
Sch80 and VdS Sch40,
4.1 92.4 8.7 416.1
VdS Sch80, SDC
4.2 97.0 8.8 425.7 SAPPHIRE PLUS
4.3 101.7 SDC SAPPHIRE 8.9 435.5 Sch40, and SDC
PLUS Sch40 and SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS
4.4 106.4 9.0 445.3
SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
4.5 111.3 Sch80 9.1 455.3
4.6 116.3 9.2 465.3
4.7 121.4 9.3 475.5
4.8 126.7 9.4 485.8
4.9 132.0 9.5 496.2
5 137.4 9.6 506.7
5.1 143.0 9.7 517.3
5.2 148.7 9.8 528.0
5.3 154.4 9.9 538.8
5.4 160.3 10.0 549.8
5.5 166.3 VdS Sch80, SDC 10.1 560.8
SAPPHIRE PLUS
5.6 172.4 10.2 572.0
Sch40, and SDC
5.7 178.6 SAPPHIRE PLUS 10.3 583.3
5.8 184.9 Sch80 10.4 594.6
5.9 191.4 10.5 606.1
6.0 197.9 JENSEN HUGHES 10.6 617.7
and VdS Sch40,
6.1 204.6 10.7 629.4
VdS Sch80, SDC
6.2 211.3 SAPPHIRE PLUS 10.8 641.3
6.3 218.2 Sch40, and SDC 10.9 653.2 JENSEN HUGHES
SAPPHIRE PLUS and VdS Sch40, VdS
6.4 225.2 Sch80 Sch80, and SDC
6.5 232.3 SAPPHIRE PLUS
6.6 239.5 Sch40
6.7 246.8 11.0 665.2 JENSEN HUGHES

and VdS Sch40 and
6.8 254.2 11.1 677.4
SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS
6.9 261.7 11.2 689.6 Sch40
7.0 269.4 11.3 702.0
7.1 277.1 11.4 714.5
7.2 285.0 11.5 727.1
7.3 293.0 11.6 739.8
7.4 301.1 11.7 752.6
7.5 309.3 11.8 765.5 JENSEN HUGHES and

VdS Sch40
7.6 317.6
7.7 326.0
7.8 334.5
7.9 343.1
8.0 351.9
8.1 360.7
8.2 369.7
8.3 378.7
8.4 387.9
8.5 397.2
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

DETAILS
Drill Size Total Area Drill Size Total Area
(mm) (mm2) Software (mm) (mm2) Software
3.0 49.5 SDC SAPPHIRE 7.4 301.1 JENSEN HUGHES
PLUS Sch80 and VdS Sch40,
3.1 52.8 7.5 309.3
VdS Sch80, SDC
3.2 56.3 SDC SAPPHIRE 7.6 317.6 SAPPHIRE PLUS
PLUS Sch40 and Sch40, and SDC
3.3 59.9 7.7 326.0
SAPPHIRE PLUS SAPPHIRE PLUS
3.4 63.6 Sch80 7.8 334.5 Sch80
3.5 67.3 7.9 343.1
3.6 71.3 8.0 351.9
3.7 75.3 8.1 360.7
3.8 79.4 8.2 369.7 JENSEN HUGHES
and VdS Sch40,
3.9 83.6
VdS Sch80, and
4.0 88.0 SDC SAPPHIRE
4.1 92.4 PLUS Sch40
4.2 97.0 VdS Sch80, SDC 8.3 378.7 JENSEN HUGHES

SAPPHIRE PLUS and VdS Sch40,
4.3 101.7 8.4 387.9
Sch40, and SDC VdS Sch80, and
4.4 106.4 8.5 397.2 SDC SAPPHIRE
SAPPHIRE PLUS
Sch80 8.6 406.6 PLUS Sch40
4.5 111.3
4.6 116.3 JENSEN HUGHES 8.7 416.1
and VdS Sch40, 8.8 425.7
4.7 121.4
VdS Sch80, SDC
4.8 126.7 8.9 435.5
SAPPHIRE PLUS
4.9 132.0 Sch40, and SDC 9.0 445.3 JENSEN HUGHES
SAPPHIRE PLUS and VdS Sch40
5.0 137.4 Sch80
5.1 143.0
5.2 148.7
5.3 154.4
5.4 160.3
5.5 166.3
5.6 172.4
5.7 178.6
5.8 184.9
5.9 191.4
6.0 197.9
6.1 204.6
6.2 211.3
6.3 218.2
6.4 225.2
6.5 232.3
6.6 239.5
6.7 246.8
6.8 254.2
6.9 261.7
7.0 269.4
7.1 277.1
7.2 285.0
7.3 293.0
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

DETAILS
Total
Drill Size Area
(mm) (mm2) Software
2.0 50.3 SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
2.1 55.4
2.2 60.8 SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch40 and SDC
SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
2.3 66.5
2.4 72.4
2.5 78.5
2.6 84.9
2.7 91.6
2.8 98.5 VdS Sch80, SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch40
and SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
2.9 105.7
3.0 113.1 JENSEN HUGHES and VdS Sch40, VdS
Sch80, SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch40,
3.1 120.8
SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS Sch80
3.2 128.7
3.3 136.8
3.4 145.3
3.5 153.9
3.6 162.9
3.7 172.0
3.8 181.5
3.9 191.1
4.0 201.1
4.1 211.2
4.2 221.7
4.3 232.4
4.4 243.3
4.5 254.5
4.6 265.9
4.7 277.6
4.8 289.5
4.9 301.7
5.0 314.2
5.1 326.9
5.2 339.8
5.3 353.0
5.4 366.4 JENSEN HUGHES and VDS Sch40 and
VDS Sch80 and SDC SAPPHIRE PLUS
Sch40
5.5 380.1 JENSEN HUGHES and VdS Sch40 and
5.6 394.1 SDC SAPP PLUS Sch40
5.7 408.3
5.8 422.7
5.9 437.4 JENSEN HUGHES and VdS Sch40
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PNEUMATIC ACTUATION ARRANGEMENTS

Depending on the configuration and layout of the system, one
of two actuation methods may be chosen:
1. 6 mm pipe
2. Flexible actuation hoses
Notes:
• On actuation systems using 6 mm pipe (see Figure 2-1c) and at the location of the 6 mm tee on the last subordinate,
add 1 off 1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm stud coupling (Part No. 30880061).
• On systems using flexible actuation hoses (see Figure 2-1f) and at the location of the 1/4 in. tee on the last subordinate,
add 1 off 1/4 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. BSPP swivel female adaptor (Part No. 309.013.048).
• On manifolded systems with connected reserves, it is necessary to fit bleed valves (Part No. 302.200.076) at the location of
the pneumatic actuator of the last subordinate container of both duty and reserve actuation lines.
3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in.

3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm
BSPP ADAPTOR
STUD COUPLING
6 mm TUBING
FLEXIBLE PILOT HOSE
1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in.

BSPP MALE ADAPTOR
1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm
SINGLE MASTER
SINGLE MASTER STUD COUPLING
FIGURE 2-1a – Single container using 6 mm pipe FIGURE 2-1d – Single container using flexible actuation hose
3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm

STUD COUPLING 1/4 in. MALE
1/4 in. NPT ELBOW
6 mm TEE x 6 mm
STUD COUPLING 1/4 in. TEE
6 mm TUBING
FLEXIBLE PILOT
HOSE
1/4 in. BSPT
x 6 mm STUD
COUPLING 1/4 in. BSPT x
1/4 in. BSPP MALE
ADAPTOR
MASTER SUBORDINATE
MASTER SUBORDINATE
FIGURE 2-1b – Two containers using 6 mm pipe
FIGURE 2-1e – Two containers using flexible actuation hoses
FLEXIBLE
3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm STUD COUPLING PILOT HOSE
TO OTHER
SUBORDINATES TO OTHER
6 mm TEE SUBORDINATES
6 mm TEE
1/4 in. TEE
6 mm TUBING 1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm 1/4 in. TEE
FLEXIBLE
STUD COUPLING
PILOT HOSE
1/4 in. BSPT x
6 mm STUD 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4
COUPLING in. BSPP MALE
ADAPTOR
MASTER SUBORDINATE
MASTER SUBORDINATE
FIGURE 2-1c – Multiple containers using 6 mm pipe FIGURE 2-1f – Multiple containers using flexible actuation hoses
Item description Part No. Item description Part No.

6 mm copper nickel pipe 308.002.001 Flexible pilot hose 306.205.003
1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm stud coupling 30880061 Male tee 309.200.021
1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm stud coupling 30880007 Male elbow 309.013.009
3/8 in. x 6 mm stud coupling 30880060 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male adaptor 309.013.005
6 mm compression tee 30880015 3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male adaptor 309.013.036
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 3 – SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
System components Part No.

Empty SAPPHIRE tote deposit 300.207.040
SAPPHIRE drum 300.207.039
15 L container assembly (Seamless TPED) - 25 bar systems only 303207300
15 L container assembly and ATEX electrical actuator assembly (TPED) - 25 bar systems only 303207330
15 L container assembly (Seamless TPED) - 42 bar systems only (VdS Approval) 303207400
15 L container assembly (Seamless DOT/TPED) - 25 bar systems only 303207310
15 L container assembly and ATEX electrical actuator assembly (DOT/TPED) - 25 bar systems only 303207340
15 L container assembly (Seamless DOT/TPED) - 42 bar systems only (VdS Approval) 303207410
34 L container assembly (Seamless IS:7285) - 25 bar systems only (PESO) 303.207.099
34 L container assembly (Seamless IS:7285) - 25 bar systems only (PESO - ATEX) 303207420
34 L container assembly (Welded IS:7285) - 42 bar systems only (PESO) 303.207.092
SECTION 3 – SYSTEM COMPONENTS SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

4.5 L container assembly (Welded DOT) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.010
8 L container assembly (Welded DOT) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.001
4.5 L container and ATEX electrical actuator assembly (DOT) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.051
8 L container and ATEX electrical actuator assembly (DOT) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.052
8 L container assembly (Welded) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.015
8 L container and ATEX electrical actuator assembly (TPED Welded) - 25 bar systems only 303.207.059
106 L container liquid level indicator 300.015.127
15 L container assembly (TPED) - 70 bar systems only 452134
15 L container assembly (DOT/TPED) - 70 bar systems only 452141
120 L container assembly (DOT/TPED)- 70 bar systems only 452145
150 L container assembly (DOT/TPED)- 70 bar systems only 452146
34 L container assembly (PESO) - 70 bar systems only 452148
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

15 L, 30 L, 32 L, 45 L, 60 L, 106 L, 120 L, 147 L, 150 L, and 180 L 25 and 42 bar container labels A163815NC3
4.5 L, 8 L, 16 L, and 52 L 25 and 42 bar welded container labels A163815NC5
15 L, 30 L, 32 L, 45 L, 60 L, 106 L, 120 L, 147 L, 150 L, and 180 L 70 bar container labels A163815NC7
25 mm container valve (standard) - 25 bar systems only 302.209.001
25 mm container valve (fitted with solenoid adaptor for ATEX electrical actuator) - 25 bar systems only 302.209.015
50 mm container valve (fitted with solenoid adaptor for ATEX electrical actuator) - 25 bar systems only 302.209.016
80 mm container valve with plug - 25 bar systems only 445977
80 mm container valve - 25 bar systems only 302.207.009
25 mm container valve - 70 bar systems 302700001
50 mm container valve - 70 bar systems 302700002
25 mm container valve - Standard PESO containers A163813962
25 mm container valve - 42 bar nominal systems only for PESO containers A163813965
25 mm container valve - 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS 34 L PESO containers A163813967
50 mm container valve - Standard PESO containers A163813964
50 mm container valve - 42 bar nominal systems only for PESO containers A163813966
50 mm container valve - 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS 80 L, 120 L, and 180 L PESO containers A163813968
M18 53.4 bar burst disc (MATRIX) 21981
M18 53.4 bar burst disc (WEHBERG) 26108
M18 180 bar burst disc (WEHBERG) 26140
M18 180 bar burst disc (MATRIX) 26141
SAPPHIRE 0 bar to 60 bar pressure gauge (TPED) - 25 bar systems only (CE) 302.207.010
SAPPHIRE 0 bar to 60 bar pressure gauge (TPED) - 25 bar systems only (CE/UL) 302.207.017
SAPPHIRE 0 bar to 60 bar pressure gauge (TPED) - 42 bar systems only (CE) 302.209.026
Contacted pressure gauge - 42 bar systems only 302209028
Alternative contacted pressure gauge - 42 bar systems only 302209029
SAPPHIRE 0 bar to 48 bar pressure gauge (DOT) - 25 bar systems only (UL) 302.207.003
302207018
SAPPHIRE pressure gauge - 70 bar systems only 302700003
SAPPHIRE contacted pressure gauge - 70 bar systems only 302700004
25 mm union adaptor 309002016
50 mm union adaptor 309002017
25 mm union adaptor - BSPT 309002018
50 mm union adaptor - BSPT 309002019
3 in. Flared to 3 in. BSPT outlet adaptor 309.002.013
3 in. Flared to 3 in. NPT outlet adaptor 309.002.014
3 in. Flared to 3 in. Grooved outlet adaptor 309.002.015
Electrical actuator - conduit version (US origin) 304205030
Electrical actuator - conduit version (China origin) 304205040
Electrical actuator - standard (suppression diode) 304.205.001
Electrical actuator - standard (UL) (suppression diode) 304.205.010
Electrical actuator - standard (bridge rectifier) 304.209.001
Electrical actuator - standard (bridge rectifier for 70 bar systems) 304700001
Electrical actuator - flameproof (ATEX) 304.205.002
ATEX electrical actuator - 25 mm valve support brackets 304.209.011
ATEX electrical actuator - 50 mm valve support brackets 304.209.012
Explosion-proof electrical actuator 453978
Local manual actuator 304.209.002
Pneumatic actuator 304.209.004
Manual pneumatic actuator 304700003
Cable pneumatic actuator 304.209.013
436796
15.2 m (50 ft) 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) cable with swaged end fitting 304.207.010
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

Cable clamp 304.207.013
Thread adaptor 304.207.016
Flared end fitting 304.207.014
Corner pulley 304.207.015
710 mm flexible pilot hose 306.205.003
815 mm flexible pilot hose 306205010
1070 mm flexible pilot hose 306205011
Male pilot hose connector (1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. BSPP) 309.013.007
Male adaptor (1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in. BSPP) 309.013.005
Male adaptor (3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP) 309.013.036
Male adaptor (1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP) 309.013.006
Male elbow (1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP) 309.013.009
Male tee (1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. NPT) 309.200.021
Street elbow (1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. NPT) 309.013.008
6 mm copper nickel pipe 308.002.001
6 mm half hard copper tube 308.002.002
6 mm compression tee 30880015
6 mm straight coupling 30880020
Stud coupling (3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm) 30880060
Stud coupling (1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm) 30880007
1/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male adaptor 309.013.011
Stud coupling (1/4 in. BSPP x 6 mm) 30880062
Stud coupling (1/4 in. BSPP female x 6 mm) 30880063
Socket (1/4 in. NPT) 309.001.002
Bleed valve (1/4 in. NPT) 302.200.076
Bleed valve (1/4 in. BSPP) 302.200.075
1/4 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. BSPP swivel female adaptor 309.013.048
Dowty seal (1/4 in.) 31199816
Equal tee (1/4 in. BSPP) 309013049
1/4 in. BSPP swivel female x 1/4 in. BSPP fixed female 309013050
Discharge pressure switch - standard 305.209.009
Discharge pressure switch - ATEX 305.205.003
Low pressure switch - standard (open on fall) - 25 bar systems only 304.205.006
Low pressure switch - special (close on fall) - 25 bar systems only 305.209.005
Low pressure switch - alternate transfer on fall #1 - 25 bar systems 305.209.007
Low pressure switch - alternate transfer on fall #2 - 25 bar systems 305.209.007
Low pressure switch - ATEX- 25 bar systems only 305.205.004
Low pressure switch - 42 bar systems only 305.207.001
Exposion-proof low pressure switch (25 bar) 453979
Exposion-proof low pressure switch (70 bar) 453980
Pneumatic trip 305.200.001
Standpipe adaptor 304.001.004
Brass nozzles - BSPT 310.207.205 to
310.207.211
Brass nozzles - NPT 310.207.217 to
310.207.223
Stainless steel nozzles - BSPT 310.207.305 to
310.207.311
Stainless steel nozzles - NPT 310.207.317 to
310.207.323
Discharge nozzle filters 310.209.001
310.209.002
310.209.005
310.209.006
Container brackets 311700002 to
311700014
25 mm discharge hose 306.207.002
50 mm discharge hose 306.207.003
25 mm discharge hose for 70 bar systems 306700001
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

50 mm discharge hose for 70 bar systems 306700002
Adjustable height adaptor (25 mm hose) 306700003
Adjustable height adaptor (50 mm hose) 306700004
25 mm manifold check valve 302.209.004
50 mm manifold check valve 302.209.005
2.5 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.040
3 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.033
4 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.034
2.5 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.041
3 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.035
4 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush galvanised 3000 lb 309.008.036
2 1/2 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb 309.001.010
3 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb 309.001.011
4 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb 309.010.012
1/2 in. NPT plug galvanised 3000 lb 309.007.003
1/2 in. BSPT plug galvanised 3000 lb 309.007.013
2 1/2 in. NPT blind cap 35009006
3 in. NPT blind cap 35009007
4 in. NPT blind cap 35009008
Manifolds (65 mm pipe size) 307.209.001 to 307.209.003
Manifolds (80 mm pipe size) 307700004 to 307700008
Manifold inlet socket 17036, 17037, 17038, and
17467
Selector valve manifold (65 mm - 2 port) 36266000
Selector valve manifold outlet nipple 31280611 to 31280619
Manifold drop sections (900 mm centres) 19263006 to 19263008
Manifold drop sections (1500 mm centres) 19263014 to 19263016
Manifold union adaptor (NPT to NPT) 30888002 to 30888008
Manifold union adaptor (NPT to BSPT) 30888028 to 30888034
Manifold bracket assemblies 311.205.015, 311.205.010,
311.205.011, and 311700001
Selector valves for 25 bar and 42 bar systems 308.209.101 to 308.209.111
Selector valve assembly with 6 mm O.D. tube fittings for 70 bar systems 445044-C5M to 445050-C5M
Placement indicator switch assembly kit - selector valve solenoid actuator 441893
Selector valve microswitch 30116011
Relief valve 302.209.021
Manifold burst disc assembly for 25 bar systems 13281
Manifold burst disc assembly for 42 bar systems 302.200.070
Manifold burst disc assembly for 70 bar systems 302700007
Pilot container - 3 L TPED 50 ºC CPG 304700009
Pilot container - 3 L TPED CE 50 ºC CPG NO 304700008
Pilot container - 3 L TPED CE 50 ºC CPG NC 452491
Pilot container - 3 L DOT 50 ºC CPG 304700010
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

Pilot container - 13 L PESO 50 ºC CPG 304700014
Pilot container - 50 L PESO 50 ºC CPG 304700026
CE pilot container contacted pressure gauge 42116068
Alternative pilot container pressure gauge assembly 42116069
Contacted pressure gauge - TPED, DOT, and PESO pilot container 30213401
Pilot container safety burst disc 29999911 and 22000001
Pilot container actuation burst disc 20938000
Pilot container solenoid - CE 3023024B
Pilot container solenoid - VdS, UL, and FM 21006401
Placement indicator switch assembly - pilot container solenoid 441872
Manual actuator - pilot container solenoid 30180APB and 31009401
Pilot container valve 441400, 20012128, 29012804,
29012804NC, and A16381396F
Pilot valve adaptor 35116381
Pilot line non-return valve 20006020 and 20006025
Pilot line extended non-return valve 302700015
3 L pilot bracket assembly (DOT) 30621310
13 L pilot bracket assembly (TPED and PESO) 30621310
3 L pilot bracket assembly (TPED) 30620310
13 L pilot bracket assembly (DOT) 441408
50 L pilot bracket assembly (DOT, TPED, and PESO) 30625010
Decompression screw 30027301
Vent valve 302700014
Manual release caution plate - English 314.207.003
Manual release caution plate - Polish 314.207.007
Manual release caution plate - French 314.207.079
Manual release caution plate - Spanish 314.207.066
Door caution plate (lock-off) - English 314.207.002
Door caution plate (lock-off) - Polish 314.207.008
Door caution plate (lock-off) - French 314.207.080
Door caution plate (lock-off) - Spanish 314.207.067
Door caution plate (no lock-off) - English 314.207.001
Door caution plate (no lock-off) - Polish 314.207.009
Door caution plate (no lock-off) - French 314.207.081
Door caution plate (no lock-off) - Spanish 314.207.068
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
BULK FILLING CONTAINER

Where alternate manufacturing locations order empty
container assemblies for initial filling, Novec 1230 fluid is
supplied in either 1100 kg totes or 300 kg drums. The tote
is reusable. The drums are disposed of after use. The tote
comes complete with forklift pockets and connections located
on top and can subsequently be hoisted. The 2 in. camlock
located on the front of the tote connects to the agent fill
pump. The 1 in. NPT fill head connects to the nitrogen pad
through a two-stage regulator. For the drum, the 2 in. BSPP
connection connects to the agent fill pump. The 3/4 in. BSPP
connection connects to the nitrogen pad through a two-stage
regulator.
For both bulk container types, pressure relief set at 0.20 bar
and a nitrogen pad using a 2-stage regulator set at 0.14 bar
is available and ordered separately as part of the fill station
equipment hardware package. Alternatively, an air dryer can
be utilized.
Technical specification - empty SAPPHIRE tote deposit

FIGURE 3-1
Part No.: 300.207.040 (Supply from UK) EMPTY SAPPHIRE TOTE DEPOSIT
E001525
Bulk container type: Intermediate Bulk Container (IBC)
Material: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Color: White color contained with blue color
integrated pallet
Nominal capacity: 757 L
Maximum fill: 1100 kg
Working pressure: 0.4 bar
Test pressure: 1 bar
Liquid port: 2 in. male camlock
Nitrogen pad port: 1 in. NPT fill head via micromatic valve
Nominal tare weight: 178 kg (392 lb)
Dimensions: 1.2 m (W) x 1.2 m (D) x 1.4 m (H)
Pressure relief: 0.35 bar - historical relief set point
0.2 bar - new relief set point
Technical specification - SAPPHIRE drum

Part No.: 300.207.039 (Supply from UK)
Bulk container type: Drum
FIGURE 3-2
Color: White (black pre May 2021) METAL DRUM
Nominal fill: 300 kg E001526
Nominal capacity: 208 L

TABLE 3-1: BULK FILLING CONTAINER DETAILS
Working pressure: 0.4 bar
Test pressure: 2.5 bar Agent weight
Liquid port: 2 in. BSPP Part No. Description kg (lb)
Nitrogen pad port: 3/4 in. BSPP 300.207.040 Empty SAPPHIRE tote – –
Nominal tare weight: 25 kg (55.1 Ib) deposit
Dimensions: 597 mm (Dia) x 874 mm (H) 300.207.039 Metal drum 300 (661)
Nitrogen pad: 3/4 in. BSPP 1/4 in. quick connect
300.207.001 Novec 1230 fluid – –
pressure gauge
Note: When ordering a filled SAPPHIRE tote from UK, order the empty
2 stage regulator: 0.14 bar SAPPHIRE tote deposit (Part No. 300.207.040) and 1100 kg (2425 lb) of
Pressure relief: 0.35 bar - historical relief set point Novec 1230 fluid (Part No. 300.207.001) as separate line items.
0.2 bar - new relief set point
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES

• SAPPHIRE systems are configured around a range of TPED and DOT/TPED seamless container
container and valve assemblies. technical specification
• Each basic assembly consists of a container, a valve, and a The 15 L, 30 L, 45 L, 60 L, 120 L, 150 L, and 180 L
syphon tube. containers are manufactured in accordance with ISO 9809-1
• Each assembly may be provided with a range of fills to suit or ISO 9809-2 as applicable, and are stamped TPED or DOT/
the design requirements. After filling, the containers are TPED. The following table lists the paint specification for
super-pressurised with dry nitrogen to a nominal charge TPED or DOT/TPED containers.
pressure of 25 bar, 42 bar, or 70 bar at a temperature of Hydraulic test pressure: 200 bar
20 ºC
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar
• The maximum filling density for 25 bar SAPPHIRE systems
is 1.2 kg/L and the minimum is 0.5 kg/L. Material: Alloy steel
• The maximum filling density for 42 bar (nominal) PESO seamless container technical specification
SAPPHIRE systems is 1.0 kg/L and the minimum is 0.5
The containers are manufactured in accordance with IS:7285
kg/L.
(pt 2) under BIS and PESO (CCoE) approval.
• The maximum filling density for 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS
systems is 1.4 kg/L and the minimum is 0.3 kg/L.
34 L and 80 L
• Dimensions and weights of each assembly are shown in (Dia 267 mm) 120 L, 140 L,
the following tables.
120 L and 150 L and 180 L
(Dia 356 mm) (Dia 406 mm)
Hydraulic test 334 bar 250 bar
pressure:
Maximum 200 bar 150 bar
working
pressure:
Material: Alloy steel Alloy steel
Paint Red epoxy top coat or red acrylic
specification: polyurethane top coat
DOT welded container technical specification

The 4.5 L container is manufactured to DOT 4BW500. The
8 L, 16 L, 32 L, 52 L, 106 L, 147 L, and 180 L containers are
manufactured in accordance with DOT 4BW450 or 4BW500.
Material: Carbon steel

Paint specification: Red epoxy polyester or red
polyester powder coated
4BW450
Hydraulic test pressure: 62.1 bar

FIGURE 3-3
Maximum working pressure: 31.0 bar
CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(SHOWING HEIGHT TO VALVE OUTLET)
E001413
4BW500
TABLE 3-2: PAINT SPECIFICATION Hydraulic test pressure: 69.0 bar
Container Maximum working pressure: 34.5 bar
description Coating system Color
15 L to 30 L Wet paint system - Red body TPED welded container technical specification
Seamless Epoxy primer, acryl-poly- (RAL3000) The 8 L, 16 L, 32 L, 52 L, 106 L, 147 L, and 180 L containers
urethane top coat are manufactured in accordance with EN13322-1 (8 L to
45 L to 180 L Powder paint system – 147 L), EN14208 (180 L) and EC Directive 84/527/EEC and
Seamless Akzo nobel D1036 are stamped TPED.
4.5 L to 180 L Red epoxy polyester or Federal red Hydraulic test pressure: 61.0 bar
Welded red polyester powder
coated Maximum working pressure: 47.0 bar
Material: Carbon steel
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES

(Continued)
Containers with ATEX actuator

• The ATEX flameproof electrical actuator is supplied
factory fitted to the 25 bar SAPPHIRE container and valve
assembly only. See Section 3 - Electrical Actuator (Flame-
proof [ATEX]) for actuator details.
• Each basic assembly consists of a container, a valve, a
syphon tube, an ATEX flameproof electrical actuator, and
support brackets for the ATEX actuator.
• As with the standard assemblies, after filling the containers
are super-pressurised with dry nitrogen to 25 bar +3% at a
temperature of 20 °C.
• The maximum filling density for SAPPHIRE systems is
1.2 kg/L and the minimum is 0.5 kg/L.
General container information

• Containers are painted red as standard.
• All containers are designed for vertical mounting only.
• A liquid level indicator may be provided for 106 L, 147 L,
and 180 L DOT welded containers. The following part
numbers are available:
FIGURE 3-4
106 L: 300.015.127 CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
147 L: 300.015.128
180 L: 300.015.129 WITH ATEX FLAMEPROOF ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
025827
• These units are factory fitted and cannot be fitted on-site.

• Tables 3-3 to 3-19 list the following pressure gauge types:
- PG (standard pressure gauge)
- CPG (contacted pressure gauge)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Continued)
Seamless TPED container assemblies

TABLE 3-3: S
EAMLESS TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO ISO 9809-1
OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
from gross weight
Minimum and floor to Nominal at max. fill
maximum fills outlet
Container Valve tare density
size Pressure Temp. Fill density (weight) size (nom.) Diameter weight excluding N2
gauge Min. Max. Min. Max.
Part No. L type ⁰C kg/L kg/L kg kg mm mm mm kg kg
303207300 15 PG 50 0.5 1.2 7.5 18 25 695 204 29.3 47.3
303207301 30 PG 50 0.5 1.2 15 36 25 1010 229 38.8 74.8
303207302 45 PG 50 0.5 1.2 22.5 54 25 1110 267 60.4 114.4
303207303 60 PG 50 0.5 1.2 30 72 50 1428 267 80.1 152.1
303207304 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1543 360 140.6 284.6
303207305 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1893 360 166.6 346.6
303207306 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 216 50 1743 406 214.8 430.8
TABLE 3-4: S
EAMLESS TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR (ATEX) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
Minimum and from gross weight
maximum floor to Nominal at max. fill
fills outlet
303207330 15 PG 50 0.5 1.2 7.5 18 25 695 204 31.1 49.1
303207331 30 PG 50 0.5 1.2 15 36 25 1010 229 40.6 76.6
303207332 45 PG 50 0.5 1.2 22.5 54 25 1110 267 62.2 116.2
303207333 60 PG 50 0.5 1.2 30 72 50 1428 267 82.0 154.0
303207334 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1543 360 142.5 286.5
303207335 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1893 360 168.5 348.5
303207336 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 216 50 1743 406 216.7 432.7
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-5: SEAMLESS TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 42 BAR (NOMINAL) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
from Gross weight
303207400 15 PG 50 0.5 1 7.5 15 25 695 204 29.3 44.3
CPG
303207401 30 PG 50 0.5 1 15 30 25 1010 229 38.8 68.8
CPG
303207402 45 PG 50 0.5 1 22.5 45 25 1110 267 60.4 105.4
CPG
303207403 60 PG 50 0.5 1 30 60 50 1428 267 80.1 140.1
CPG
303207404 120 PG 50 0.5 1 60 120 50 1543 360 140.6 260.6
CPG
303207405 150 PG 50 0.5 1 75 150 50 1893 360 166.6 316.6
CPG
303207406 180 PG 50 0.5 1 90 180 50 1743 406 214.8 394.8
CPG
Seamless DOT/TPED container assemblies
TABLE 3-6: S
EAMLESS DOT/TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO ISO 9809-1
OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
fills outlet
303207310 15 PG 50 0.5 1.2 7.5 18 25 695 204 29.3 47.3
303207311 30 PG 50 0.5 1.2 15 36 25 1010 229 38.8 74.8
303207312 45 PG 50 0.5 1.2 22.5 54 25 1110 267 60.4 114.4
303207313 60 PG 50 0.5 1.2 30 72 50 1428 267 80.1 152.1
303207314 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1543 360 140.6 284.6
303207315 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1893 360 166.6 346.6
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-7: S
EAMLESS DOT/TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR (ATEX) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED
TO ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
fills outlet
Part No. L type ºC kg/L kg/L kg kg mm mm mm kg kg
303207340 15 PG 50 0.5 1.2 7.5 18 25 695 204 31.1 49.1
303207341 30 PG 50 0.5 1.2 15 36 25 1010 229 40.6 76.6
303207342 45 PG 50 0.5 1.2 22.5 54 25 1110 267 62.2 116.2
303207343 60 PG 50 0.5 1.2 30 72 50 1428 267 82.0 154.0
303207344 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1543 360 142.5 286.5
303207345 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1893 360 168.5 348.5
TABLE 3-8: S
EAMLESS DOT/TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 42 BAR (NOMINAL) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
from gross weight
303207410 15 PG 50 0.5 1 7.5 15 25 695 204 29.3 44.3
CPG
303207411 30 PG 50 0.5 1 15 30 25 1010 229 38.8 68.8
CPG
303207412 45 PG 50 0.5 1 22.5 45 25 1110 267 60.4 105.4
CPG
303207413 60 PG 50 0.5 1 30 60 50 1428 267 80.1 140.1
CPG
303207414 120 PG 50 0.5 1 60 120 50 1543 360 140.6 260.6
CPG
303207415 150 PG 50 0.5 1 75 150 50 1893 360 166.6 316.6
CPG
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
IS: 7285 (PESO) container assemblies
TABLE 3-9: S
EAMLESS PESO CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO IS: 7285 (PT 2)
WITH BIS AND PESO APPROVAL
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
Minimum and Nominal at max. fill
outlet
Container maximum fills Valve tare density
Part No.1 L type ⁰C kg/L kg/L kg kg mm mm mm kg kg
303.207.099 34 PG 50 0.5 1.2 17 40.5 25 865 267 47 87.5
303.207.096 80 PG 50 0.5 1.2 40 96 50 1792 267 93 189
303.207.0972 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1622 356 144 288
303.207.104 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1317 406 160 304
303.207.105 140 PG 50 0.5 1.2 70 168 50 1492 406 175 343
303.207.098 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1952 356 170 350
303.207.106 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 216 50 1837 406 210 426
Notes: 1. IS:7285 (Pt 2) container assemblies are for use in India only.
2. Only available on special order.
3. Add the suffix CR to part numbers for high corrosion-resistant painted container assemblies. For example, Part No. 303.207.099 uses standard paint
and Part No. 303.207.099CR uses high corrosion-resistant paint.
TABLE 3-10: S
EAMLESS PESO CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR (ATEX) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO IS: 7285
(PT 2) WITH BIS AND PESO APPROVAL
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
outlet
303207420 34 PG 50 0.5 1.2 17 40.5 25 865 267 48.8 89.3
303207421 80 PG 50 0.5 1.2 40 96 50 1792 267 94.8 190.8
3032074222 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1622 356 145.8 289.8
303207423 120 PG 50 0.5 1.2 60 144 50 1317 406 161.8 305.8
303207424 140 PG 50 0.5 1.2 70 168 50 1492 406 176.8 344.8
303207425 150 PG 50 0.5 1.2 75 180 50 1952 356 171.8 351.8
303207426 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 216 50 1837 406 211.8 427.8
3. Add the suffix CR to part numbers for high corrosion-resistant painted container assemblies. For example, Part No. 303207420 uses standard paint
and Part No. 303207420CR uses high corrosion-resistant paint.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-11: S
EAMLESS PESO CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 42 BAR (NOMINAL) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
IS: 7285 (PT 2) WITH BIS AND PESO APPROVAL
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
Container maximum fills Valve outlet tare density
PG
303.207.092 34 50 0.5 1 17 34 25 865 267 47 81
CPG
PG 80 50 1792 267 93 173
303.207.089 80 50 0.5 1 40
CPG
PG 120 50 1622 356 144 264
303.207.0902 120 50 0.5 1 60
CPG
PG 120 50 1317 406 160 280
303.207.101 120 50 0.5 1 60
CPG
PG 140 50 1492 406 175 315
303.207.102 140 50 0.5 1 70
CPG
PG 150 50 1952 356 170 320
303.207.091 150* 50 0.5 1 75
CPG
PG 180 50 1837 406 210 390
303.207.103 180* 50 0.5 1 90
CPG
3. A
dd the suffix CR to part numbers for high corrosion-resistant painted container assemblies. For example, Part No. 303.207.092 uses standard paint
and Part No. 303.207.092CR uses high corrosion-resistant paint.
TABLE 3-12: W
ELDED DOT CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO DOT 4BW450 OR
4BW500
Nominal
Height gross weight
from floor
to outlet
Part No. L type °C kg/L kg/L kg kg mm mm mm kg kg
303.207.010 4.5 PG 50 0.5 1.2 2.5 5 25 324 178 7.7 12.7
303.207.001 8 PG 50 0.5 1.2 4 9.5 25 305 254 14.8 24.3
303.207.002 16 PG 50 0.5 1.2 8 19 25 504 254 18.4 37.4
303.207.003 32 PG 50 0.5 1.2 16 38 25 836 254 26.1 64.1
303.207.004 52 PG 50 0.5 1.2 26 62 50 595 406 49.1 111.1
303.207.005 106 PG 50 0.5 1.2 53 127 50 1022 406 71.8 198.8
303.207.006 147 PG 50 0.5 1.2 73.5 176 50 1356 406 89.9 265.9
303.207.007 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 208 50 1635 406 105.8 313.8
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-13: W
ELDED DOT CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO DOT 4BW450 OR
4BW500
Height Nominal
from
Minimum and gross weight
floor to
maximum Nominal at max. fill
outlet
Container fills Valve tare density
303.207.051 4.5 PG 50 0.5 1.2 2.5 5 25 324 178 9.5 14.5
303.207.052 8 PG 50 0.5 1.2 4 9.5 25 305 254 16.6 26.1
303.207.053 16 PG 50 0.5 1.2 8 19 25 504 254 20.2 39.2
303.207.054 32 PG 50 0.5 1.2 16 38 25 836 254 27.9 65.9
303.207.055 52 PG 50 0.5 1.2 26 62 50 595 406 51.0 113.0
303.207.056 106 PG 50 0.5 1.2 53 127 50 1022 406 73.7 200.7
303.207.057 147 PG 50 0.5 1.2 73.5 176 50 1356 406 91.8 267.8
303.207.058 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 208 50 1635 406 107.7 315.7
Note: D
OT welded container assemblies are only for use outside the UK and the EEA.
TABLE 3-14: W
ELDED TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO EN13322-1 OR
EN14208 AS APPLICABLE
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
outlet
303.207.015 8 PG 50 0.5 1.2 4 9.5 25 305 254 17.4 26.9
303.207.016 16 PG 50 0.5 1.2 8 19 25 504 254 23.4 42.4
303.207.017 32 PG 50 0.5 1.2 16 38 25 836 254 27.5 65.5
303.207.012 52 PG 50 0.5 1.2 26 62 50 595 406 68.7 130.7
303.207.013 106 PG 50 0.5 1.2 53 127 50 1022 406 88.8 215.8
303.207.014 147 PG 50 0.5 1.2 73.5 176 50 1356 406 108.8 284.8
303.207.018 180 * PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 208 50 1635 406 128.8 336.8
Note: The 180 L container is manufactured to EN14208.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-15: W
ELDED TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 25 BAR (ATEX) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO EN13322-1
OR EN14208
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
303.207.059 8 PG 50 0.5 1.2 4 9.5 25 305 254 19.2 28.7
303.207.060 16 PG 50 0.5 1.2 8 19 25 504 254 25.2 44.2
303.207.061 32 PG 50 0.5 1.2 16 38 25 836 254 29.3 67.3
303.207.062 52 PG 50 0.5 1.2 26 62 50 595 406 70.6 132.6
303.207.063 106 PG 50 0.5 1.2 53 127 50 1022 406 90.7 217.7
303.207.064 147 PG 50 0.5 1.2 73.5 176 50 1356 406 110.7 286.7
303.207.065 180 PG 50 0.5 1.2 90 208 50 1635 406 130.7 338.7
Note: The 180 L container is manufactured to EN14208.
TABLE 3-16: W
ELDED TPED CONTAINER DETAILS FOR 42 BAR (NOMINAL) SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
EN13322-1 OR EN14208
Height Nominal
from gross weight
floor to
303.207.030 8 PG 50 0.5 1 4 8 25 305 254 17.4 25.4
303.207.031 16 PG 50 0.5 1 8 16 25 504 254 23.4 39.4
303.207.032 32 PG 50 0.5 1 16 32 25 836 254 27.5 59.5
303.207.033 52 PG 50 0.5 1 26 52 50 595 406 68.7 120.7
303.207.034 106 PG 50 0.5 1 53 106 50 1022 406 88.8 194.8
303.207.035 147 PG 50 0.5 1 73.5 147 50 1356 406 108.8 255.8
303.207.036 180 PG 50 0.5 1 90 180 50 1635 406 128.8 308.8
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TPED Container Assemblies - Available from Great Yarmouth, UK

TPED containers are not available for US and Canadian markets.
TABLE 3-17: T
PED CONTAINER ASSEMBLY DETAILS FOR 70 BAR SAPPHIRE PLUS SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
from gross weight
Nominal maximum fills Valve outlet tare density
size Temp. Fill density (weight) size (nom.) Dia. weight excluding N2
Pressure
452134 15 PG 50 0.3 1.4 4.5 21 25 695 204 29.3 50.3
CPG
452135 30 PG 50 0.3 1.4 9.0 42 25 1010 229 38.8 80.8
CPG
452136 45 PG 50 0.3 1.4 14.0 63 25 1110 267 60.4 123.4
CPG
452137 60 PG 50 0.3 1.4 18.0 84 50 1428 267 80.1 164.1
CPG
452138 120 PG 50 0.3 1.4 36.0 168 50 1543 360 140.6 308.6
CPG
452139 150 PG 50 0.3 1.4 45 210 50 1893 360 166.6 376.6
CPG
452140 180 PG 50 0.3 1.4 54.0 252 50 1743 406 214.8 466.8
CPG
Notes: 1. The minimum temperature is -20 °C.
2. When ordering containers, the gauge type, fill weight, and container label must be specified at the time of shipment.
DOT/TPED Container Assemblies - Available from Marinette, USA

TABLE 3-18: D
OT/TPED CONTAINER ASSEMBLY DETAILS FOR 70 BAR SAPPHIRE PLUS SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
ISO 9809-1 OR ISO 9809-2
Height Nominal
from gross weight
size Pressure Temp. Fill density (weight) size (nom.) Dia. weight excluding N2
452141 15 PG 50 0.3 1.4 4.5 21 25 695 204 29.3 50.3
CPG
452142 30 PG 50 0.3 1.4 9 42 25 1010 229 38.8 80.8
CPG
452143 45 PG 50 0.3 1.4 14 63 25 1110 267 60.4 123.4
CPG
452144 60 PG 50 0.3 1.4 18 84 50 1428 267 80.1 164.1
CPG
452145 120 PG 50 0.3 1.4 36 168 50 1543 360 140.6 308.6
CPG
452146 150 PG 50 0.3 1.4 45 210 50 1893 360 166.6 376.6
CPG
452147 180 PG 50 0.3 1.4 54.0 252 50 1743 406 214.8 466.8
CPG
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PESO Container Assemblies - Available from Mumbai, India

PESO containers are only available for the Indian market.
TABLE 3-19: P
ESO CONTAINER ASSEMBLY DETAILS FOR 70 BAR SAPPHIRE PLUS SYSTEMS MANUFACTURED TO
IS: 7285 (PT 2) WITH BIS AND PESO APPROVAL
Height Nominal
from gross weight
size Pressure Temp. Fill density (weight) size (nom.) Dia. weight excluding N2
452148 34 PG 50 0.3 1.4 10.5 47.5 25 865 267 48 95.5
CPG
452149 80 PG 50 0.3 1.4 24 112.0 50 1792 267 94 206.0
CPG
452150 120 PG 50 0.3 1.4 36 168.0 50 1317 406 178 346.0
CPG
452151 180 PG 50 0.3 1.4 54 252.0 50 1837 406 214 466.0
CPG
2. Add the suffix CR to part numbers for high corrosion-resistant painted container assemblies. For example Part No. 452148 uses standard paint and
452148CR uses high corrosion-resistant paint.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER LABELS

A container label is mounted to each container assembly Technical specification
displaying specific container fill information within the clear Material: 140 micron clear PVC
window and general information relating to maintenance,
recharging, and recycling. The container fill information Overall size: 266.7 mm × 190.5 mm or
includes the part number, charge pressure, agent weight, 558.8 mm × 50.8 mm
tare weight, gross weight, fill density, fill date, fill location, and Weight: 0.05 kg
temperature range.
Container labels must be ordered separately but are Language English (GB), French (FR), German (DE),
configured as part of the container valve assembly. translations: Italian (IT) and Spanish (ES)
TABLE 3-20: CONTAINER LABELS
Nominal
Part No. charge pressure Language Certification Label size Where used
A163815NC3 25 and 42 bar English, German, European 266.7 mm × 190.5 mm Seamless container: 15 L,
French, Italian, 30 L, 34 L, 45 L, 60 L, 80 L,
and Spanish 120 L, 140 L, 150 L, and 180 L
Welded container: 32 L, 106 L,
147 L, and 180 L
A163815NC5 25 and 42 bar English, German, European 558.8 mm × 50.8 mm Welded container: 4.5 L, 8 L,
French, Italian, 16 L, and 52 L
and Spanish
A163815NC7 70 bar English, German, European 266.7 mm x 190.5 mm Seamless container: 15 L,

French, Italian, 30 L, 34 L, 45 L, 60 L, 80 L,
and Spanish 120 L, 150 L, and 180 L
FIGURE 3-5
CONTAINER LABEL
E002122
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER VALVES

• The SAPPHIRE container valve is available in
25 mm and 50 mm sizes, depending on the size of
container used. See Table 3-21.
• The valve is designed for high discharge rates to allow the
full container contents to be released within a nominal ten
seconds. It operates on the pressure differential principle
and is constructed with a brass body and piston.
• The valve operates through an electrical actuator, manual
actuator, pneumatic actuator, or manual pneumatic
actuator. The operation of any one of the actuators
depresses the valve core which relieves pressure above the
pressure differential piston. This allows the valve to open
fully through the pressure in the container.
• A pressure gauge is fitted as standard to provide an
indication of the container pressure.
• A safety burst disc is incorporated in the valve and is
designed to rupture at a nominal pressure of 53.4 bar for 25
bar systems and at a nominal pressure of 60.0 bar (welded
containers) or 65.5 bar (seamless containers) for 42 bar
nominal system pressure at 50 °C reference temperature.
• A low pressure switch (25 bar system with seamless or
welded containers or 42 bar nominal system pressure
with welded containers) or a contacted pressure gauge
(42 bar nominal system pressure with seamless or welded
containers) may be fitted to provide a signal in the event of
a fall in container pressure.
• A pilot port in the 25 mm and 50 mm valves is provided to
allow the container pressure during a discharge to operate
a pressure switch or pneumatic actuators. The connection
is 1/4 in. BSPP for the 25 mm and 50 mm valves. A
maximum of 30 m of pneumatic actuation tubing, with up
to ten subordinate containers may be actuated from one
master container. For additional containers or actuation
tubing, sub-master containers should be created. Refer to
Section 4 - Installation for further information.
• After discharge, the valve requires refurbishment before
refilling.
Note: The nominal burst disc specification can vary in accordance with
approved supplier models used at time of assembly.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE CONTAINER VALVES (Continued)
TABLE 3-21: CONTAINER VALVE DETAILS

Valve Container
size size
Part No. mm Valve type L Notes
302.209.001 25 Standard 4.5, 8, 15, Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
16, 30, 32, packaging.
302.209.015 ATEX (25 bar systems only) and 45 The ATEX valve includes the factory fitted
solenoid adaptor, ready for on-site assembly
of the ATEX electrical actuator (see Section
3 - Electrical Actuator (Flameproof [ATEX]).
302.209.006 42 bar systems only for seamless Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
containers packaging.
302.209.022 41 bar systems only for welded Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
302700001 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS systems –
A163813962 Standard for PESO containers 34 The valve assembly contains 302.209.001
plus additional PESO markings, no pressure
gauge, and is individually packaged.
A163813965 42 bar sytems only for PESO The valve assembly contains 302.209.006
containers plus additional PESO markings, no pressure
A163813967 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS PESO The valve assembly contains 302700001
302.209.002 50 Standard 52, 60, Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
80,106, 120, packaging.
302.209.016 ATEX (25 bar systems only) 140, 147, The ATEX valve includes the factory fitted
150, and solenoid adaptor, ready for on-site assembly
180 of the ATEX electrical actuator (see Section
3 - Electrical Actuator (Flameproof [ATEX])
302.209.007 42 bar systems only for seamless Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
302.209.023 41 bar systems only for welded Add the suffix P to ship the valve in separate
302700002 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS systems –
A163813964 Standard for PESO containers 80, 120, The valve assembly contains 302.209.002
140, 150, plus additional PESO markings, no pressure
and 180 gauge, and is individually packaged.
A163813966 42 bar sytems only for PESO The valve assembly contains 302.209.007
A163813968 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS PESO 80, 120 and The valve assembly contains 302700002
containers 180 plus additional PESO markings, no pressure
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

66 mm 87 mm
89 mm 130 mm
157 mm 211 mm
40 mm
52 mm
FIGURE 3-6 FIGURE 3-7

25 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS 50 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 25 BAR SYSTEMS
(PART NO. 302.209.001 AND 302.209.015) (PART NO. 302.209.002 AND 302.209.016)
025223 025224
Technical specification Technical specification

Body material: Brass CW617N (CZ122) Body material: Brass CW617N (CZ122)
Thread type: 2 in. 8UN Thread type: 3 1/4 in. 8UN
Outlet connection: 1 in. BSPP Outlet connection: 2 in. BSPP
Outlet safety cap material: Brass CW614N (CZ121) Outlet safety cap material: Brass CW617N (CZ122)
Maximum working pressure: 28.6 bar (CE) Maximum working pressure: 28.6 bar (CE)
34 bar (UL and FM) 34 bar (UL and FM)
Test pressure: 51 bar Test pressure: 51 bar
Free flow cross sectional area: 507 mm² Free flow cross sectional area:
1810 mm²
Equivalent length: 6.096 m Equivalent length: 10.668 m
Syphon tube: Rigid straight Syphon tube: Rigid straight
Maximum actuation force: 26.0 N at max. working Maximum actuation force: 26.0 N at max. working
pressure pressure
Burst disc rating: 53.4 bar +/-5% (50.7 bar to Burst disc rating: 53.4 bar +/-5% (50.7 bar to
56.1 bar) at 50 °C 56.1 bar) at 50 °C
Burst disc port: M18 x 1.0 Burst disc port: M18 x 1.0
Low pressure port: 1/8 in. NPT (plugged off) Low pressure port: 1/8 in. NPT (plugged off)
Gauge port: 1/8 in. NPT Gauge port: 1/8 in. NPT
Pilot pressure port: 1/4 in. BSPP Pilot pressure port: 1/4 in. BSPP
Solenoid adaptor port: 1/8 in. NPT Solenoid adaptor port: 1/8 in. NPT
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB)
-18°C to 54 °C (UL and FM) -18°C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
Weight: 3.36 kg Weight: 8.74 kg
Approvals (302.209.001): LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM Approvals (302.209.002): LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
Approvals (302.209.015): LPCB and VdS Approvals (302.209.016): LPCB and VdS
Certification: EN 12094-4 Certification: EN 12094-4
CE Certification No. 0832-CPD-2039, 0832-CPR- CE Certification No. 0832-CPD-2039, 0832-CPR-
(302.209.001): S0072, or 2831-CPR-S0072 (302.209.002): S0072, or 2831-CPR-S0072
CE Certification No. 2831-CPR-S0072 CE Certification No. 2831-CPR-S0072
(302.209.015): (302.209.016):
Year of CE marking 2009, 2019, and 2021 Year of CE marking 2009, 2019, and 2021
(302.209.001): (302.209.002):
Year of CE marking 2021 Year of CE marking 2021
(302.209.015): (302.209.016):
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No.,
No., DN25, Serial No., and DN50, Serial No., and CE0832
CE0832 or CE2831 or CE2831
Part number marked on 302.209.001 Part number marked on 302.209.002
component (302.209.001): component (302.209.002):
Method of marking: Laser or engraved Method of marking: Laser or engraved
Valve type: Type 2 Valve type: Type 2
Overall size: 157 mm x 100 mm Overall size: 211 mm x 138 mm
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

66 mm 87 mm
89 mm 130 mm
157 mm 211 mm
40 mm
52 mm

25 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 42 AND 41 BAR SYSTEMS 50 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 42 AND 41 BAR SYSTEMS
(PART NO. 302.209.006 AND 302.209.022) (PART NO. 302.209.006 AND 302.209.022)
025223 025224

Maximum working pressure: 48 bar Maximum working pressure: 48 bar
Free flow cross sectional 507 mm² Free flow cross sectional 1810 mm²
area: area:
Maximum actuation force: 34.9 N at maximum working Maximum actuation force: 34.9 N at maximum working
pressure pressure
Burst disc rating 65.5 bar +/-5% (62.2 bar to Burst disc rating 65.5 bar +/-5% (62.2 bar to
(302.209.006): 68.8 bar) at 50 °C (302.209.007): 68.8 bar) at 50 °C
Burst disc rating 60.0 bar +/-5% (57.0 bar to Burst disc rating 60.0 bar +/-5% (57.0 bar to
(302.209.022): 63.0 bar) at 50 °C (302.209.023): 63.0 bar) at 50 °C
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C
Approvals: LPCB and VdS Approvals: LPCB and VdS
CE Certification No. 0832-CPD-2039, 0832-CPR- CE Certification No. 0832-CPD-2039, 0832-CPR-
(302.209.006): S0072, or 2831-CPR-S0072 (302.209.007): S0072, or 2831-CPR-S0072
CE Certification No. 0832-CPR-S0030 or CE Certification No. 0832-CPR-S0030 or
(302.209.022): 2831-CPR-S0030 (302.209.023): 2831-CPR-S0030
Year of CE marking 2013, 2019, and 2021 Year of CE marking 2013, 2019, and 2021
(302.209.006): (302.209.007):
Year of CE marking 2015 and 2021 Year of CE marking 2015 and 2021
(302.209.022): (302.209.023):
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No., CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No.,
DN25, Serial No., and CE0832 DN50, Serial No., and CE0832
or CE2831 or CE2831
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

The valve assembly is factory-fitted to the container and
is supplied pre-assembled with a pressure gauge. A
replacement valve assembly is available. The 25 mm (1 in.)
and 50 mm (2 in.) valve assemblies are supplied with a
plug in the pressure gauge port. The replacement pressure
gauge (Part No. 302700003) and the replacement contacted
pressure gauge (Part No. 302700004) must be ordered
separately. The replacement valve is 100% leak tested before
it leaves the factory. 87 mm
66 mm
130 mm
89 mm
211 mm
157 mm
40 mm 52 mm

25 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 70 BAR SYSTEMS 50 mm CONTAINER VALVE FOR 70 BAR SYSTEMS
(PART NO. 302700001) (PART NO. 302700002)
025223
025224

Valve size: 25 mm Valve size: 50 mm
Part No. 302700001 Part No. 302700002
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar Maximum working pressure: 120 bar
Maximum system pressure: 102.3 bar at 50 °C at 1.4 kg/L Maximum system pressure: 102.3 bar at 50 °C at 1.4 kg/L
Free flow cross sectional area: 507 mm² Free flow cross sectional area: 1810 mm²
Minimum actuation force: 76 N Minimum actuation force: 76 N
Burst disc rating: 180 bar ± 5% at 50 °C Burst disc rating: 180 bar ± 5% at 50 °C
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) -18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM)
Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM
CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0072, or CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0072, or
2831-CPR-S0072 2831-CPR-S0072
Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021 Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer's mark, Part No., CE marking requirements: Manufacturer's mark, Part No.,
DN25, Serial No., and CE0832 DN50, Serial No., and CE0832
or CE2831 or CE2831
Part number marked on 302700001 Part number marked on 302700002
component: component:
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Location on system
The SAPPHIRE container valve is connected to the container.
Installation instructions (25 mm valve)

• The discharge valve is supplied factory fitted to the
container.
• Before connecting to the pipework or discharge hose,
ensure the container is secured with the appropriate
container brackets.
• When connecting to the pipework, fit the 25 mm union
adaptor and tighten securely.
• When connecting to a discharge hose, directly fit the hose
to the outlet and tighten securely.
Installation instructions (50 mm valve)

• The discharge valve is supplied factory fitted to the
container.
• Before connecting to the pipework or discharge hose,
ensure the container is secured with the appropriate
container brackets.
• When connecting to the pipework, fit the 50 mm union
adaptor and tighten securely.
• When connecting to a discharge hose, directly fit the hose
to the outlet and tighten securely.
Operating instructions
The discharge valve actuates manually, pneumatically, or
electrically. The discharge valve actuates automatically upon
actuation and discharges agent through the piping system
into the protected area. After discharge, the valve requires
refurbishment before refilling.
Maintenance Instructions
1. Verify that the container is empty.
2. Remove the top cap locking the grubscrew behind the
chain fixing screw.
3. Remove the top cap using a top cap spanner.
4. Remove the shuttle bottom cap using a shuttle wrench.
5. Replace the shuttle o-rings, apply PFTE lubricant to the
shuttle o-rings, and refit the shuttle into the bore of the
valve.
6. Replace the top cap o-ring and refit the top cap to the
valve.
7. Refit the grub screw, chain, and chain fixing screw.
8. Refurbish the valve after each discharge. Replace the
valve when the container is hydraulically pressure tested
(H testing).
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
BURST DISC
Each valve incorporates a safety burst disc assembly. It is 20 mm
designed to relieve pressure if the container becomes over

pressurized when subjected to temperatures above the
designed storage temperature of the container. The burst
discs can be used on either the 25 mm valve or the M18 X
1.0 6g
50 mm valve.
TABLE 3-22: BURST DISC DETAILS

Part No. Description Where used
21981 M18 53.4 bar burst disc 25 mm and FIGURE 3-12
(MATRIX*) 50 mm valve BURST DISC
E001144
26108 M18 53.4 bar burst disc 25 mm and
(WEHBERG*) 50 mm valve
(MATRIX) 50 mm valve
26140 M18 180 bar burst disc 25 mm and
(WEHBERG) 50 mm valve
26141 M18 180 bar burst disc 25 mm and
Technical specification
Valve size: 25 mm and 50 mm valve 25 mm and 50 mm valve
Part No.: 21981 (MATRIX) 26108 (WEHBERG)
Body material: Brass Brass
Rating: 53.4 bar ±5% (50.7 to 56.1 bar) at 50 °C 53.4 bar ±5% (50.7 to 56.1 bar) at 50 °C
Thread: M18 x 1.00 M18 x 1.00
Hole orientation: 90° to Body 90° to Body
Torque: 35 N•m 25 N•m
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C -20 °C to 50 °C
Overall size: 20 mm (L) x 18 mm (Dia) 20 mm (L) x 18 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.028 kg 0.028 kg
Certification: CE CE
Part number marked on component: 21981 26108
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
Valve size: 25 mm and 50 mm valve 25 mm and 50 mm valve

Part No.: 24925 (MATRIX) 26628 (MATRIX)
Rating: 65.5 bar ±5% at 50 °C 60.0 bar ±5% at 50 °C
(62.2 to 68.8 bar at 50 °C) (57.0 to 63.0 bar at 50 °C)
Thread: M18 x 1.00 M18 x 1.00
Certification: CE CE
Part number marked on component: 24925 26628
Approvals: LPCB and VdS LPCB and VdS
* WEHBERG and MATRIX are trademarks of their respective owners.

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
BURST DISC (Continued)
Valve size: 25 mm (1 in.) and 50 mm (2 in.) valve 25 mm (1 in.) and 50 mm (2 in.) valve
Part No.: 26141 (MATRIX) 26140 (WEHBERG)
Body material: Brass Brass
Rating: 180 bar ± 5% at 50 °C 180 bar ± 5% at 50 °C
Thread: M18 x 1.00 M18 x 1.00
Part number marked on 26141 26140
component:
Approvals: LPCB, UL, and FM LPCB, UL, and FM
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PRESSURE GAUGES
30 mm +/-0.5 mm 10 mm
TPED pressure gauges
(Part No. 302.207.010, 302.207.017, and 302.209.026)
A pressure gauge is fitted to every container valve. The
device continuously monitors the container and in the event
of the pressure dropping, provides a visual indication if the DIA 55 mm
pressure loss is outside the allowable limits as indicated by DIA 50 mm
colored segments on the gauge face.
1/8 in. NPT
Technical specification SW 14
47 mm +/-1 mm
Type: Bourdon tube pressure gauge
5.5 mm
Entry: Back axial
Measurement system: Copper alloy FIGURE 3-13
Movement: Copper alloy TPED PRESSURE GAUGE
025007
Nominal size: 50 mm (Dia) x 53 mm (L)
Units of outer scale: Bar
Units of inner scale: psi
SAPPHIRE 0 to 60 bar gauge (Part No. 302.207.010)
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT
(Alternate for TPED)
Connection material: Brass CZ121 (CW614N)
Nominal charge pressure: 25 bar
Case: Stainless steel, glycerin filled
Pressure range: 0 to 60 bar
Ingress Protection class: IP65
Approvals: LPCB
Window: Polycarbonate
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2042
Restrictor: Brass 0.5 mm (Dia)
2831-CPR-S2042
Class accuracy: Class 1.6
Year of CE marking: 2011 and 2021
Language: English
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C
Weight: 0.073 kg SAPPHIRE 0 to 60 bar gauge (Part No. 302.207.017)
Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1 (Default for TPED and alternate for DOT welded
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar (psi), containers)
CL1.6, EN837-1, and CE0832 Nominal charge pressure: 25 bar
or CE2831 Pressure range: 0 to 60 bar
Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork Approvals: LPCB, UL, and FM
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPR-S0054
2831-CPR-S0054
Location on system Year of CE marking: 2017 and 2021
The pressure gauge is fitted to every container discharge
valve. SAPPHIRE 0 to 60 bar gauge (Part No. 302.209.026)
Installation instructions
• The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the pressure Approvals: LPCB and VdS
gauge installed. CE Certification No.: 0832-CPR-S0054
• Following installation of the complete system on-site, the 2831-CPR-S0054
nipple on the rubber bung on the back of the pressure Year of CE marking: 2017 and 2021
gauge must be cut or pierced with a needle.
The pressure gauge is designed to work within the
pre-determined system operating conditions.
Maintenance instructions
• In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
services to organise a replacement part.
• If pressure loss exceeds 10% when adjusted for
temperature, refill or replace the container. See the
pressure/temperature tables in Section 5 - Commissioning.
• End users should check the pressure gauges weekly.
• The pressure gauges are field-replaceable.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PRESSURE GAUGES (Continued)

36 mm +/-0.5 mm 10 mm
SW 14
Contacted pressure gauge (42 bar systems)
1/8 in. NPT
(Part No. 302209028)
DIA 55 mm
The contacted pressure gauge is factory fitted and can be +/-0.5 mm DIA 50
mm +/-
specified as an alternative to the standard pressure gauge 0.5 mm
for 42 bar systems. The device continuously monitors the

container pressure and in the event of the pressure falling
below the setpoint, the contacts operate to provide an 8 mm 49 mm
electrical signal. The setpoint is factory set and no adjustment
may be carried out on-site. FIGURE 3-14
Note: The contacted pressure gauge is designated normally open under zero CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE
pressure (container empty) and as such is normally closed under the nominal E001549
working pressure. The contact breaks (opens) on falling pressure.
Installation instruction
• The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the pressure
SAPPHIRE 0-60 bar gauge installed.
contacted pressure gauge Part No. 302209028 • The CPGs are connected in parallel with an end-of-line
Model type: PGS21.050 (EOL) device. The CPG contacts are normally closed at
Type: Bourdon tube pressure gauge 42 bar nominal charge pressure. The contacts open on
Entry: Back axial fall of pressure at 38 bar. The required voltage range is
Measurement system: Copper alloy 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC. Figure 3-15 illustrates the wiring
Movement: Copper alloy diagram.
Units of outer scale: Bar NC at system pressure (NO at zero pressure)
STANDARD CABLE
Connection material: Brass CZ121 (CW614N) TO
EOL RESISTOR
CONTROL
Case: Stainless steel GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE PANEL
WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW
BROWN GREEN BROWN GREEN
GAUGE CONTACTS SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION (ALARM CONDITION)
Language: English
FIGURE 3-15
Pressure range: 0 bar to 60 bar
CPG ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Setpoint: Open on fall at 38 bar E001881
(± 1.2 bar)
Weight: 0.12 kg NOTICE
Cable: 4 core x 1 m
The set point of the contacted pressure
Voltage: 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC
gauge is 38 bar giving an indication of a
Current: 5 mA to 100 mA 10% loss in pressure. At low temperatures,
Maximum consumption: 2.4 W the developed pressure of nitrogen can fall
Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1 below 38 bar giving the impression that the
CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30095 container pressure is low. For this reason,
Year of CE marking: 2019 the effects of low temperatures should
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar (psi), be taken into account. For installations
CL1.6, EN837-1, and CE0786 susceptible to low temperatures, the use of
Approvals: LPCB temperature controlled areas for container
storage should be considered.
Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork
Location on system
valve.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Contacted pressure gauge (42 bar systems, Continued)
! WARNING
Pressure gauges should not be exposed to high pressure
water streams.
The contacted pressure gauges should not be exposed to

excess mechanical shock or vibration. The limits for the
gauges are < 0.5 g (5 m/s2) for mechanical shock and a
frequency range < 150 Hz for vibration. If the gauges are
exposed to mechanical shock or vibration outside of these
specified limits they may send a false signal to the panel
indicating low container pressure, resulting in a false alarm.
For SAPPHIRE systems that could be exposed to higher

levels of shock and vibration, then the alternative normally
open under nominal working pressure gauges (Part No.
302209029) should be used, and the installation of anti-
vibration mats and brackets considered.
temperature, refill or replace the container (see Tables 5-2
to 5-3 in Section 5 - Commissioning).
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Alternative contacted pressure gauge (42 bar systems) 36 mm +/-0.5 mm 10 mm

SW 14
(Part No. 302209029)
1/8 in. NPT
The contacted pressure gauge is factory fitted and can be
DIA 55 mm
specified as an alternative to the standard pressure gauge +/-0.5 mm DIA 50
for 42 bar systems. The device continuously monitors the mm +/-
0.5 mm
below the setpoint, the contacts operate to provide an
electrical signal. The setpoint is factory set and no adjustment
may be carried out on-site. 8 mm 49 mm
Note: The contacted pressure gauge is designated normally closed under

zero pressure (container empty) and as such is normally open under the FIGURE 3-16
nominal working pressure. The contact connects (closes) on falling pressure. CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE
E001549
SAPPHIRE 0-60 bar • The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the pressure
contacted pressure gauge Part No. 302209029 gauge installed.
Model type: PGS21.050
• The CPGs are connected in parallel with an end-of-line
(EOL) device. The CPG contacts are normally open at
Entry: Back axial 42 bar nominal charge pressure. The contacts close on
Measurement system: Copper alloy fall of pressure at 38 bar. The required voltage range is
Movement: Copper alloy 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC. Figure 3-17 illustrates the wiring
Nominal size: 50 mm (Dia) x 53 mm (L) diagram.
Units of outer scale: Bar • Following the installation of the complete system on-site,
Units of inner scale: psi the nipple on the rubber bung on the back of the pressure
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT gauge must be cut or pierced with a needle.
Case: Stainless steel NO at system pressure (NC at zero pressure)
STANDARD CABLE
BROWN WHITE WHITE BROWN BROWN WHITE
Language: English TO
EOL RESISTOR
CONTROL
GAUGE
GAUGE
GAUGE
Nominal charge pressure: 42 bar PANEL

Setpoint: Close on fall at 38 bar
(± 1.2 bar) GREEN YELLOW YELLOW GREEN GREEN YELLOW
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C GAUGE CONTACTS SHOWN IN CLOSED POSITION (ALARM CONDITION)
Weight: 0.12 kg
Cable: 4 core x 1 m
FIGURE 3-17
CPG ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Current: 5 mA to 100 mA E001881
Maximum consumption: 2.4 W

Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1 NOTICE
CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30095 The set point of the contacted pressure
Year of CE marking: 2019 gauge is 38 bar giving an indication of a
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar (psi), 10% loss in pressure. At low temperatures,
CL1.6, EN837-1, and CE0786 the developed pressure of nitrogen can fall
Approvals: LPCB below 38 bar giving the impression that the
Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork container pressure is low. For this reason,
the effects of low temperatures should
be taken into account. For installations
susceptible to low temperatures, the use of
Location on system temperature controlled areas for container
The pressure gauge is fitted to every container discharge storage should be considered.
valve.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Alternative contacted pressure gauge

(42 bar systems, Continued)
! WARNING
Pressure gauges should not be exposed to high pressure
water streams.

excess mechanical shock or vibration. The limits for the
gauges are < 0.5 g (5 m/s2) for mechanical shock and a
frequency range < 150 Hz for vibration. If the gauges are
specified limits they may send a false signal to the panel
indicating low container pressure, resulting in a false alarm.
For SAPPHIRE systems that could be exposed to higher

levels of shock and vibration, the installation of anti-vibration
mats and brackets should be considered.
temperature, refill or replace the container (see the
pressure/temperature tables in Section 5 - Commissioning).
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DOT pressure gauges

(Part No. 302.207.003 and 302207018)
The Novec 1230 fluid pressure gauge is fitted to every DOT
welded container valve assembly. The device continuously
monitors the container and in the event of the pressure
dropping, provides visual indication if the pressure loss is
outside the allowable limits as indicated by colored segments
on the gauge face.
• Part No. 302.207.003 (MIJA* - Default for DOT welded
containers)
• Part No. 302207018 (MILJOCO* - Alternate for DOT
welded containers, check stock availability with the factory) 27 mm
! CAUTION 11 mm
The DOT pressure gauge can only be used outside of the EU.
9 mm
The TPED gauge must be used within the EU.
Part No.: 302.207.003 (MIJA) DIA 41 mm
302207018 (MILJOCO) DIA 36 mm
Type: Dial gauge 1/8 in. NPT

Entry: Back axial 7/16 in. HEX
Body material: Stainless steel

Nominal size: 41 mm (Dia) x 27 mm (L) FIGURE 3-18
Units of outer scale: Bar MIJA DOT PRESSURE GAUGE
025240
Language: English
Working temperature range: 0 °C to 55 °C
Weight: 0.022 kg
Approvals: UL and FM (MIJA)
UL (MILJOCO)
Location on system
valve.
The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the pressure gauge
installed.
services to organise a replacement.
temperature (see Section 5 - Commissioning), refill or
replace the container.
• End users should check pressure gauges weekly.
• Pressure gauges are field-replaceable.
*MIJA and MILJOCO are trademarks of their respective companies.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Pressure gauge for 70 bar systems

(Part No. 302700003)
The pressure gauge is factory fitted to the valve, and is
field-replaceable.
Entry: Back axial
Measurement system: Copper alloy
Movement: Copper alloy
Nominal Size: 50 mm (Dia) x 53 mm (L) FIGURE 3-19
PRESSURE GAUGE
Units of outer scale: bar E001874

Case: Stainless steel
Accuracy: ± 1.6%
Language: English
Working temperature range -20 °C to 50 °C
(LPCB):
Working temperature range -18 °C to 50 °C
(UL and FM):
Nominal working pressure: 70 bar
(Charge pressure)
Maximum system pressure: 102.3 bar
Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM
Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1
CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0054
Year of CE marking: 2018
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar
(psi), CL1.6, EN837-1,
CE0832
Weight: 0.12 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Contacted pressure gauge for 70 bar systems

(Part No. 302700004)
The contacted pressure gauge is factory fitted to the valve,
and is field-replaceable.
Note: The contacted pressure gauge is designated normally open under zero
pressure (container empty) and as such is normally closed under the nominal
working pressure. The contact breaks (opens) on falling pressure.
Entry: Back axial FIGURE 3-20
Measurement system: Copper alloy CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE
Movement: Copper alloy E001875
Nominal size: 55 mm (Dia) x 60 mm

Contacted pressure gauge - agent container assembly
(50 mm nominal)
Units of outer scale: bar All agent container valves are fitted with a contacted pressure
gauge (CPG). The CPGs are connected in parallel with an
end-of-line (EOL) device. The CPG contacts are normally
Pressure range: 0 bar to 160 bar closed at 70 bar nominal charge pressure. The contacts open
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT on fall of pressure at 63 bar. The required voltage range is
Case: Stainless steel 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC. Figure 3-21 illustrates the wiring diagram
Ingress Protection class: IP65 for the CPG part numbers 302700004 (50 °C).
SERIES CONNECTION
Restrictor: Brass 0.5 mm (Dia) PRESSURE GAUGE NORMALLY OPEN (CONTACT BREAKS ON FALLING PRESSURE)
Accuracy: ± 1.6% of full scale
Language: English TO
EOL RESISTOR
CONTROL
Working temperature range -20 °C to 50 °C GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE PANEL
(LPCB):
Working temperature range -18 °C to 50 °C RED BLACK RED BLACK
(UL and FM):
Nominal working pressure: 70 bar GAUGE CONTACTS SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION (ALARM CONDITION)
(Charge pressure) FIGURE 3-21
Maximum system 102.3 bar CPG AGENT CONTAINER SERIES CONNECTION
pressure: 010529
Setpoint: Open on fall at 63 bar ± 4 bar

Current: 5 mA to 100 mA • If pressure loss exceeds 10% when adjusted for
Contact load Pmax: 2.4 W temperature, refill or replace the container (see the
pressure/temperature tables in Section 5 - Commissioning).
Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM
Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1
CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0054
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar (psi),
CL1.6, EN837-1, CE0832
Weight: 0.15 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
UNION ADAPTORS
The union adaptor is used to enable pipework to be easily TABLE 3-23: UNION ADAPTORS
connected to and disconnected from the SAPPHIRE Part No. Description
container valve outlet adaptor. It is available in two sizes, 309002016 1 in. BSPP x 1 in. NPT union adaptor
25 mm and 50 mm.
309002017 2 in. BSPP x 2 in. NPT union adaptor
One end is provided with a parallel female thread to provide a
compatible joint to the container outlet adaptor. The other end 309002018 1 in. BSPP x 1 in. BSPT union adaptor
is provided with a female taper thread to enable pipework to 309002019 2 in. BSPP x 2 in. BSPT union adaptor
be connected. A swivel joint makes disconnecting containers
from the pipework straight forward.
The connection of the adaptor to the valve outlet does
not require any seal. Whilst it is recommended that the
connection of the adaptor to the pipework is made using a
suitable pipe sealant.
75 mm 100 mm
24.2 mm 36.4 mm 44.2 mm

38.1 mm
2 in. BSP 2 in.

1 in. NPTF
47.35 mm x 1.78 mm PARKER
1 in. BSP NPTF NA151 UL APPROVED O-RING
21.95 mm x 1.78 mm PARKER FITTED TO THE SEALING FACE
NA151 UL APPROVED O-RING
FITTED TO THE SEALING FACE
FIGURE 3-22
25 mm UNION ADAPTOR (PART NO. 309002016) FIGURE 3-23
025828
50 mm UNION ADAPTOR (PART NO. 309002017)
025828
Union adaptor size: 25 mm Union adaptor size: 50 mm
Body material: Steel 230 M07 Pb 11SMnPb37 Body material: Steel 230 M07 Pb 11SMnPb37
Plating specification: ZINKLAD* 1000 plating Plating specification: ZINKLAD 1000 plating
(Hexavalent chromium-free) (Hexavalent Chromium-Free)
Seal material: Nitrile Seal material: Nitrile
Joint type: 1 in. BSPP swivel cone (hydraulic) x Joint type: 2 in. BSPP swivel cone (hydraulic)
1 in. NPT fixed female (Part No. x 2 in. NPT fixed female (Part No.
309002016) or 1 in. BSPT fixed 309002017) or 2 in. BSPT fixed
female (Part No. 309002018) female (Part No. 309002019)
Overall size: 75 mm (L in extended position) x Overall size: 100 mm (L in extended position) x
41 mm (A/F) 70 mm (A/F)
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42, and Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42, and
range: 70 bar system range: 70 bar system
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25 bar -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25 bar
system system
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70 bar -18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70 bar
system system
Part number marked 309002016 (NPT) Part number marked 309002017 (NPT)
on component: 309002018 (BSPT) on component: 309002019 (BSPT)
Maximum working 120 bar Maximum working 120 bar
pressure: pressure:
Weight: 0.38 kg Test pressure: 180 bar
Weight: 1.18 kg
* ZINKLAD is a trademark of MacDermid Acumen, Inc.

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR 44 mm 65 mm
Electrical actuator - conduit version for 25 bar and 42 bar

system 1/2 in.
NPT
(Part No. 304205030 and 304205040) CONDUIT
Country of origin: US (304205030) FITTING
China (304205040) 124 mm
The electrical actuator electrically operates the system’s

master container. The electrical actuator is fitted with an BLACK WHITE ORANGE YELLOW
internal placement switch to provide a fault indication at the

panel if incorrectly fitted. FIGURE 3-24
Specification: Body: Mild Steel
Note: If no additional actuator is fitted to the top of the electrical actuator, the Body Finish:
Actuation Pin:
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
Electroless Nickel Plate
Stainless Steel
- CONDUIT
protection cap must remain in place. 025839
Technical specification Technical specification (Continued)

Body: Mild steel CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part
Body finish: Electroless nickel plate No., Serial No., 24 VDC,
0.5A, CE0832 or CE2831
Actuation pin: Stainless steel
Part number marked on 304205030 (US)
Loose nut: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
component: 304205040 (China)
Nose and JB: Brass CW603N
Actuation type: Latching Location on system
Reset method: Manually via reset tool The electrical actuator is connected
Weight:
Life Span:
1.00Kg
tofrom
25 years the top of the container
manufacture
supplied discharge valve

Testing:
(between the valve
Max Humidity: and RH,manual actuator).
100% Check on start / finish position
80 to 90% non-condensing
Ingress Protection: IP54
Connection: 1 in. BSPP Approvals: LPCB, UL, FM
InstallationCertification:
instructions EN12094-4
Nominal voltage: 24 VDC CE Certification No: TBA
Mechanical Year
Installation:
CE Body Certification Install the
No: electrical actuator onto the
0832
Minimum firing voltage: UL864 65% of nominal of CE Marking: 2018
discharge valve to Requirements:
CE Marking hand tight only. Ensure
Manufacturers the
Mark, Partunit is reset
No, Serial in 0.50A,
No, 24 Vdc,
voltage (15.6 VDC), CE
the non-fire position (the height from the end of the pin to the
0832
CE 20.5 VDC
base is 6.09 mm) before fitting.
Minimum current: 0.32 A
Electrical installation: The electrical actuator is supplied with
Nominal current: 0.43 A
a 1/2 in. NPT conduit connection. Due to the design of the
Maximum current: 0.54 A
bridge rectifier, a positive supply from the control panel can
Minimum duration of trigger 1s be connected to either terminal 1 or 2 with the reverse for
signal: the negative supply. The nominal supply is 24 VDC. The
Maximum monitoring current: 30 mA maximum monitoring current is 30 mA.
Duty: Continuous
The electrical actuator is designed to form an earth path
Manual actuation force: 50 N through the actuator body, valve, and container. During
Nominal pin travel: 4.6 mm installation, take care to ensure that the container or brackets
Electrical connection: 1/2 in. NPT (F) Conduit conduct a suitable earth to ground.
connection
Back EMF protection: Bridge rectifier Operating instructions
Placement switch: Integral to unit The electrical actuator operates after receiving a 24 VDC
nominal voltage signal from the panel. The electrical actuator
Working temperature range: -20 ºC to 50 ºC (LPCB)
latches in the fire position after the signal terminates. The
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
electrical actuator requires manual resetting by removing the
Weight: 1.0 kg
unit from the valve and inserting (screwing in) the reset tool.
Life span: 25 years from manufacture
Factory testing: 100% Check on start / finish Maintenance instructions
position 1. Remove the actuator from the valve assembly.
Field testing of actuator: Possible 2. Check for free movement of the placement switch (circular
Maximum humidity: 80% to 90% RH, non section with cross surrounding the firing pin).
condensing
3. Confirm that the panel alarms ceases to alarm when the
switch is depressed.
Approvals: LPCB, UL, and FM
4. Apply 24 VDC and observe for correct functionality
Certification: EN 12094-4
(energised pin position of 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm from the base
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPR-S0072 or of the actuator).
2831-CPR-S0072
Year of CE marking 2019 and 2021 5. Terminate the supply voltage and reset the electrical
(304205030): actuator by fitting (screwing in) the plastic reset tool
into the base. Once reset, remove the reset tool and
Year of CE marking 2020 and 2021
reinstall on the valve assembly. In case of faults or
(304205040):
suspected faults, contact customer services to organise a
replacement part.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR BRIDGE RECTIFIER FOR

70 BAR SYSTEMS
(Part No. 304700001)
The electrical actuator electrically operates the system’s
master container. The electrical actuator is fitted with an
internal placement switch to provide a fault indication at
the panel if incorrectly fitted. A manual, manual-pneumatic,
pneumatic, or CPM actuator fits on top of the electrical
actuator.
The reset tool is attached to the actuator.
Note: If no additional actuator is fitted to the top of the
electrical actuator, the protection cap must remain in place.
Location on system
The electrical actuator is installed to the top of the container
valve. FIGURE 3-25
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
E001876
Life span: 25 years
Body: Mild steel Factory testing: 100% check on start / finish position
Body finish: Electroless nickel plate Field testing of actuator: Possible
Swivel nut: Brass Maximum humidity: 90% (65 °C)
Actuation pin: Stainless steel Ingress Protection class: IP54
Loose nut: Brass CW614N (CZ121) Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM
Actuation type: Latching Certification: EN 12094-4
Reset requirement: Manually with reset tool supplied CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0072
Connection: 1 in. BSPP 2831-CPR-S0072
Nominal voltage: 24 VDC Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021
Minimum firing voltage: CE 18 VDC CE marking Manufacturer’s mark, part
UL 864 65% of nominal voltage requirements: number, serial number, 24 VDC ,
(15.6 VDC) 0.90 A, CE0832 or CE2831
Minimum current: 0.67 A Method of marking: Laser or engraved
Nominal current: 0.90 A Overall size: 132 mm (L) x 73 mm (W)
Maximum current: 1.14 A Weight: 1.34 kg
Maximum monitoring 10 mA Actuation force / PIN Minimum 240 N at 1 mm
current: travel: from unactivated
Minimum duration of 1s Minimum 220 N at 2 mm
trigger signal: from unactivated
Maximum duration of 120 s Minimum 200 N at 3 mm
trigger signal: from unactivated
Manual actuation force: 50 N Minimum 180 N at 4 mm
from unactivated
Nominal pin travel: 4.6 mm
Electrical connection: 1/2 in. NPT Female conduit with
inbuilt bridge rectifier
Back EMF protection: Bridge rectifier
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB)
range: -18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM)
Part number marked on 304700001
component:
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR - FLAMEPROOF (ATEX)

(Part No. 304.205.002)
The ATEX electrical actuator is activated by a voltage signal
from the control panel. The voltage signal opens the solenoid
valve releasing pressure from the top chamber of discharge
valve. This causes the shuttle to actuate and the valve to
discharge. Once the signal to the ATEX actuator is termi-
nated, the solenoid valve automatically closes and the unit
resets itself.
Note: The ATEX electrical actuator and adaptor assembly including the
support bracket (as detailed in Section 3 - ATEX Electrical Actuator - Support
Brackets) are supplied separately for on-site installation as part of the ATEX
container and valve assembly (as detailed in Section 3 - SAPPHIRE Container
and Valve Assemblies) for use with 25 bar systems only.
112 mm
97 mm
85 mm
39 mm
M20 X 1.5 mm
20 mm
39 mm
FIGURE 3-26
FLAMEPROOF ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR (ATEX) AND
ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY (PART NO. 304.205.002)
025345
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR - FLAMEPROOF (ATEX)

(Continued)
Location on system
Technical specification The ATEX electrical actuator is fitted to the side solenoid port
Solenoid enclosure: Epoxy coated die-cast at the top of the discharge valve.
aluminium
Connection support: Stainless steel clamping
bracket Mechanical installation:
Minimum voltage: 21.6 VDC 1. Ensure the container is bracketed securely before
Nominal voltage: 24 VDC connecting the ATEX electrical actuator.
Maximum voltage: 26.4 VDC 2. Fit the 1/4 in. BSP end of the solenoid adaptor into
Minimum current: 0.420 A the ATEX actuator, hand tight only (fitted to Inlet Port
Nominal current: 0.467 A Reference No. 1).
Maximum current: 0.514 A 3. Ensuring that the actuator is orientated between 0° to 30°
Power consumption: 11.2 W degrees off vertical, hand tighten the actuator into the male
Rating: Specified for continuous duty end of the solenoid adaptor that is in the discharge valve.
Minimum duration of trigger 1s Note: The male end of the solenoid adaptor is factory fitted
signal: to the discharge valve before filling.
Circuit thread: M20 x 1.5 4. Whilst supporting the weight of the actuator, loosely fit the
Safety requirement: EExd Certified to EN50014 support bracket around the outer diameter of the valve,
and EN50018 (EN50281-1-1) lining up the holes of the bracket with the holes on the
Maximum working pressure: 34 bar underside of the actuator.
Proof pressure: 150 bar at 35 bar differential 5. Ensuring that the bolt threads point downwards, securely
Solenoid connection: Brass 1/4 in. BSPP female tighten the actuator to the bracket.
Adaptor connection: 1/8 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. 6. Securely tighten the bracket to the valve. After assembly,
BSPT male leak check adaptor with leak detection spray.
Inlet port reference number: 1 Electrical installation:
Cap screw torque range: 1.4 to 2.1 Nm
1. Remove the cover plate to access the wiring terminals.
Weight: 1.62 kg
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C 2. Connect 24 VDC across supply terminals (located side by
Field testing of actuator: Possible side) and earth to the earthing terminal (located on internal
fixing bracket). Ensure there is no actuation signal present
Conformity: ATEX 94/9/EC
before wiring the ATEX electrical actuator. Use appropriate
Approved location: Explosion atmospheres ATEX cable glands to suit the cabling.
Zone classification: Zones 1 and 2
Gas group: II C Operating instructions
Temperature class: T4 (135 °C maximum surface The ATEX electrical actuator operates after receiving a
temperature) 24 VDC nominal voltage signal from the panel. It is recom-
Ingress Protection class: IP65 mended that the signal is maintained until the discharge
Approvals: LPCB and VdS completes.
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2047 or Maintenance instructions
2831-CPR-S2047 The ATEX electrical actuator can be removed from the
Year of CE marking: 2009 and 2021 container in the following sequence:
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Serial 1. Remove the support bracket and turn the knurled adaptor
No., 24 VDC, and CE0832 or in a counter clockwise direction while supporting the weight
CE2831 of the ATEX electrical actuator.
Overall size: 137 mm x 100 mm x 115 mm 2. When separated, the ATEX electrical actuator can be
energised to check the functionality of the solenoid.
3. Before re-fitting, ensure the test signal is terminated to
avoid accidental discharge.
4. In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ATEX ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR – SUPPORT BRACKETS

(Part No. 304.209.011 and 304.209.012)
Support brackets must be fitted securely to the ATEX
electrical actuator and the discharge valve in order for the
actuator to be supported correctly. Two bracket assemblies
are available, one for the 25 mm discharge valve (Part No.
302.209.001), and one for the 50 mm discharge valve (Part
No. 302.209.002).
Note: The support bracket is supplied as part of the ATEX container and
valve assembly (as detailed in Section 3 - SAPPHIRE Container and Valve
Assemblies).
Material: Mild steel
Finish: Zinc plated and passivated
Color: Silver
Thickness: 2 mm

SUPPORT BRACKET FOR 25 mm VALVE SUPPORT BRACKET FOR 50 mm VALVE
(PART NO. 304.209.011) (PART NO. 304.209.012)
E001008
E001007
FIGURE 3-28
ARRANGEMENT OF ATEX ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
ON THE DISCHARGE VALVE USING THE SUPPORT
BRACKETS
025178
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
EXPLOSION-PROOF ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR

(Part No. 453978)
The explosion-proof electrical actuator electrically operates
a total flooding fire suppression system container. A voltage
signal from the control panel activates the explosion-proof
electrical actuator. The voltage signal de-energizes the
permanent magnet, allowing the spring to push and latch the
actuator pin into the fire position. The electrical actuator can
be reset using the supplied reset tool when the voltage signal
terminates.
The explosion-proof electrical actuator connects to the top
of the container discharge valve, between the valve and the
manual actuator.
FIGURE 3-30
Mechanical installation: Before installing the electrical
actuator onto the discharge valve, ensure that the unit is E002118
reset in the non-fire position, at a distance from the end of the
pin to the actuator base of 4.02 mm to 4.78 mm. Place the
electrical actuator on the discharge valve and install it until EARTHING GREEN
hand-tight. WIRE
Electrical installation: The electrical actuator is supplied with

a 1/2 in. NPT conduit connection. Due to the design of the YELLOW WIRE ORANGE WIRE
bridge rectifier, the positive supply from the control panel
can be connected to either terminal 1 or 2 with the reverse
N.C. SWITCH
for the negative supply. The nominal supply is 24 VDC with
YELLOW WIRE ORANGE WIRE
maximum monitoring current of 30 mA.
The electrical actuator operates after receiving a 24 VDC BLACK WHITE
WIRE WIRE
nominal voltage signal from the panel. The electrical actuator SOLENOID COIL
latches in the fire position after the signal terminates. The
FIGURE 3-31
electrical actuator requires a manual reset. Remove the unit
WIRING DIAGRAM
from the valve and insert or screw in the reset tool. E002119
Note: The explosion-proof electrical actuator is a purchased item and as such

does not fall under any works instructions used in manufacturing.
1. Remove the actuator from the valve assembly.
2. A
pply 24 VDC and observe for the correct functionality.
The energized pin position is 0.6 mm to 1.01 mm from the
base of the actuator.
3. T
erminate the supply voltage and reset the electrical
actuator by fitting or screwing in the reset tool into the
base.
4. W
hen reset, remove the reset tool, and reinstall the
actuator onto the valve assembly.
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact ANSUL®
customer services to organise a replacement part.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Body: 316 or 304 stainless steel, no
painted surfaces
Actuation pin: 304 SS
Loose nut (threaded swivel): 304 SS
Actuation type: Latching
Reset requirement: Manually through a reset tool
Connection: 1 in. BSPP male
Nominal voltage : 24 VDC
Current supply 0.5 A
Monitoring current: < 30 mA
Electrical connection: 1/2 in. NPT female conduit with
inbuilt bridge rectifier
Back EMF protection: Bridge rectifier
Placement switch: Integral to unit
Lead wire: Thermoplastic flexible fixture
nylon (TFFN) 6000 V, 90 °C
temperature
Minimum duration of trigger 1 s
signal:
Duty: Continuous
Nominal pin travel: 5 mm
Firing force: Minimum 180 N at 1.5 mm
stroke or 7.10 mm pin position
Manual actuation force: 50 N minimum.
Working temperature range: -18° C to 65° C (UL)
(70 bar system)
-18° C to 54° C (UL)
(25 bar system)
Life span: 25 years
Testing: 100% check on start / finish
position
Maximum humidity: 80 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Enclosure type: Type 4X
Approvals and listings: UL, ATEX, and IECEx
Certification: ATEX and IECEx Haz-loc:
II 2 G Ex db IIC T5 Gb
UL Haz-loc:
Class I Division I Groups A, B,
C, and D, T5
Class I Zone 1 AEx db IIC T5
Gb
Method of marking: Laser or engraved
Overall size: 182.8 mm (L) x 101.6 mm (Dia)
Weight: 5.5 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOCAL MANUAL ACTUATOR

(Part No. 304.209.002)
The local manual actuator is used to mechanically operate
the system at the container position and is fitted to the top
of the valve assembly or electrical actuator. When fitting it is 52 mm
only necessary for the unit to be hand-tight.
Accidental manual release is prevented by means of a steel
safety pin. The steel safety pin must be removed to allow the
use of the local manual actuator.
! CAUTION 41 mm
Failure to reset the actuator before fitting it onto the container FIGURE 3-32
valve results in the immediate operation of the container valve LOCAL MANUAL ACTUATOR
025013
and the potentially hazardous discharge of the container.
Location on system
Technical specification The local manual actuator is connected to the top of the
container discharge valve or mounted on top of the top
Body: Brass CW614N (CZ121) electrical actuator.
Knob: PVC (color - red)
Safety pin: Stainless steel 303 Installation instructions
Actuator pin: Brass CW614N CZ121 Install the local manual actuator directly to the discharge
Minimum actuation force: 25.5 N for 25 bar system valve or top mounted electrical actuator hand tight only.
34.9 N for 42 bar system Ensure the unit is reset in the non-fire position (height from
end of pin to base is 5 mm nominal) before fitting.
76 N for 70 bar system
Vent area: 31.76 mm² Operating Instructions
Stroke: 6 mm Remove the safety pin and apply pressure to the PVC red
Minimum duration of actuation 1s knob. The local manual actuator latches in the fire position
force: and requires manual resetting before re-fitting to the
Min. / Nom. / Max. trigger – discharge valve or top mounted electrical actuator.
pressure:
Weight: 0.26 kg Maintenance instructions
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 1. Remove the local manual actuator assembly from the
42, and 70 bar system discharge valve.
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and 2. Remove the safety pin and depress the strike knob.
FM) 25 bar system
3. Verify the correct functionality of the actuator (the strike
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and knob latches, free movement of the stem, and the nominal
FM) 70 bar system fire position of the pin from the base is 0.25 mm).
Field testing of actuator: Possible 4. Reset the actuation pin. The nominal non-fire position
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM of the pin from the base is 6.4 mm. Refit the safety pin.
Certification: EN 12094-4 Reinstall it onto the discharge valve.
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2039 5. In case of faults or suspected faults contact customer
0832-CPR-S0072 services to organise a replacement part.
2831-CPR-S0072
Year of CE marking: 2009, 2018, and 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part
No., Serial No., and CE0832
or CE2831
Part number marked on 304.209.002
component
Overall size: 41 mm x 52 mm
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
(Part No. 304.209.004)
The pneumatic actuator is used where container operation is
required by means of gas pressure from the system master
container or from a pilot container, through a small bore 48 mm
piping or flexible hose. The actuator is fitted to the top of the
valve assembly or electrical actuator. It is only necessary for
the unit to be fitted hand-tight.
Connection to the actuator is 1/4 in. NPT.
41 mm
! CAUTION
FIGURE 3-33
Failure to reset the actuator before fitting it onto the container PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
025015
valve will result in the immediate operation of the container
valve and the potentially hazardous discharge of the container. Location on system
The pneumatic actuator is connected to the top of the
Technical specification container discharge valve.
Body: Brass CW614N (CZ121) Installation instructions
Actuator pin: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
1. Install the pneumatic actuator directly on top of the
Pipe connection: 1/4 in. NPT female
discharge valve to hand tight only. Ensure the unit is reset
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar in the non-fire position (height from end of pin to base is
Test pressure: 180 bar 4.2 mm nominal) before fitting.
Vent area: 31.76 mm² 2. Apply PTFE tape to the tee and install into the 1/4 in. NPT
Stroke: 3.7 mm female port on the pneumatic actuator. Appropriate hose
Minimum trigger pressure: 4 bar for 25 bar and connections are used to connect between the tees and to
42 bar systems the pilot port adaptor on the master container.
5.2 bar for 70 bar systems
Operating Instructions
Nominal trigger pressure: 25 bar, 42 bar, or 70 bar
(Master) The pneumatic actuator actuates by pressure from a hose
connection from either the master container or pilot container.
50 bar or 100 bar (Pilot)
The pneumatic actuator remains in the fire position and
Maximum trigger pressure: 120 bar requires manual resetting before re-fitting to the discharge
Minimum duration of trigger 1s valve.
pressure:
Weight: 0.23 kg Maintenance instructions
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 1. Remove the pneumatic actuator assembly from the
42, and 70 bar system discharge valve.
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 2. Remove the hose connectors and the tee.
25 bar system
3. Verify the correct functionality of the actuator by manually
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) depressing the pin. Check for the free movement of the
70 bar system pin. The nominal fire position of the pin from the base is
Field testing of actuator: Possible 0.5 mm.
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM 4. Reset the actuation pin. The nominal non-fire position of
Certification: EN 12094-4 the pin from the base is 6.4 mm.
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2039, 5. Reinstall onto the discharge valve. In case of faults or
0832-CPR-S0072, or suspected faults contact customer services to organise a
2831-CPR-S0072 replacement part.
No., Serial No., WP-120bar,
CE0832 or CE2831
component:
Overall size: 48.0 mm (L) x 41.5 mm (Dia)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANUAL PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR

(Part No. 304700003)
The manual pneumatic actuator operates the system’s master
container. It does not actuate pilot containers. The actuator
fits to the top of the valve assembly or electrical actuator.
61 mm
Body: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
Actuation pin: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
Knob: PVC (red) 44 mm
Safety clip: Stainless steel 303

Piston: Brass CZ121 (CW614N) FIGURE 3-34
MANUAL PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
Inlet connection: 1/4 in. NPT female E001002

Test pressure: 180 bar Location on system
Vent area: 31.76 mm² The manual pneumatic actuator is connected to the top of the
Stroke: 3.5 mm container discharge valve or on top of top mounted electrical
Minimum duration of 1s actuator.
actuation force:
Minimum actuation force: 76.0 N
Minimum trigger pressure: 5.2 bar 1. Install the local pneumatic manual actuator directly to the
discharge valve or top mounted electrical actuator, to hand
Nominal trigger pressure: 25 bar, 42 bar, or 70 bar
tight only.
(Master)
2. Ensure that the unit is reset in the non-fire position before
50 bar or 100 bar (Pilot)
fitting (safety clip fitted and the height from the end of the
Maximum trigger pressure: 120 bar pin to the base is 3.35 mm nominal).
Minimum duration of trigger 1s
pressure: 3. Apply PTFE tape to the tee and install into the 1/4 in. NPT
female port on the actuator.
Weight: 0.4 kg
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 4. Ensure that appropriate hose connections are used to
42, and 70 bar system connect between the tees and the pilot port adaptor on the
lead container.
25 bar system Operating Instructions
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) Manual operation: Remove the safety clip and apply pressure
70 bar system to the PVC red knob. The local pneumatic manual actuator
Field testing of actuator: Possible latches in the fire position and requires manual resetting
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM before re-fitting to the discharge valve or top mounted
Certification: EN 12094-4 electrical actuator.
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPR-S0072 Pneumatic operation: The pneumatic actuator is actuated by
2831-CPR-S0072 pressure through a hose connection from either the leader
Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021 or pilot container. The pneumatic actuator remains in the fire
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part position and requires manual resetting before re-fitting to the
No., Serial No., WP-120bar, discharge valve.
CE0832 or CE2831
Part number marked on 304700003 Maintenance instructions
component: 1. Remove the local pneumatic manual actuator assembly
Method of marking: Laser or engraved from the discharge valve.
Overall size: 61.0 mm (L) x 44.0 mm (Dia) 2. Remove the safety pin and depress the strike knob.
knob latches, free movement of the stem, and the nominal
fire position of the pin from the base is 0.15 mm).
4. Reset the actuation pin (the nominal non-fire position of
the pin from the base is 3.35 mm) and refit the safety pin.
5. Reinstall onto the discharge valve. In case of faults or
replacement part.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CPM ACTUATOR
180
180 mm
(Part No. 304.209.013 and 436796 for 25 bar and 70 bar
systems)
The cable pneumatic manual actuator (CPM actuator) may
be used to operate the system from a remote position using
a manual release unit that is connected to the CPM actuator
by a wire rope run in conduit. Local manual actuation is also
possible using this actuator. In addition, pneumatic operation
is available through the actuation port in the body of the 136 mm
136
actuator.
The CPM actuator is designed so that it may be fitted to
the top of the valve assembly or used in conjunction with a
removable electrical actuator.
Inadvertent operation is prevented by a safety pin for manual
operation and a disable key for cable operation that has to be
removed before activation.
FIGURE 3-35
Normal manual operation requires that the safety pin be CPM ACTUATOR
pulled from the handle to allow the lever to be moved to 025260
the actuated position. With the safety pin inserted, cable

actuation is not inhibited. Both manual and cable operation Pneumatic limitations
can be disabled by a disable key. The disable key must be Pneumatic operation of the CPM actuator can be made
removed to put the actuator in service for manual or cable through a maximum pipe run length of 45.7 m using either
operation. 6 mm O.D. pipe with a 1 mm wall thickness of 1/4 in.
stainless steel tubing with a minimum wall thickness of
Technical specification 0.035 in..
Body: Brass C36000
Cable pull limitations
Lever arm: Brass C36000
Safety pin: Stainless steel Remote cable operation of the CPM actuator can be made
Actuator pin: Stainless steel through a maximum wire rope run length of 45.7 m protected
by a 3/8 in. conduit using a maximum of 10 brass watertight
Loose nut: Brass C36000
pulley elbows.
Loose nut connection: 1 in. BSPP
Pipe connection: 1/8 in. NPT female CPM actuator - manual actuation (lever operation)
Minimum actuation pressure: 6.9 bar The CPM actuator requires a pull force of less than 128.8 N
Nominal working pressure: 50 bar for 25 bar and 178 N for 70 bar in order to actuate by manual
Maximum working pressure: 56 bar mechanical means.
Stroke: 5.92 mm Normal manual operation requires that the safety pin is pulled
Minimum actuation force: 128.8 N for 25 bar systems from the handle to allow the lever to move to the actuated
178 N for 70 bar systems or up position. With the safety pin inserted, cable actuation
Minimum trigger pressure: 6.9 bar for 25 bar systems is not inhibited. Both manual and cable operation can be
14.6 bar for 70 bar systems disabled through the use of a disable key. The disable key
Nominal trigger pressure: 25 bar or 70 bar (Master) must be removed top put the actuator in service for manual or
50 bar or 100 bar (Pilot) cable operation. The CPM actuator does not have EN12094
Maximum trigger pressure: 120 bar approvals.
Weight: 1.20 kg
Working temperature range: -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
25 bar system
70 bar system
Field testing of actuator: Possible
Approvals: UL and FM
component:
Overall size: 180 mm (L) x 137 mm (H) x
79 mm (D)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CPM ACTUATOR (Continued)
Location on system
The CPM actuator is connected to the top of the container
discharge valve.
CABLE
CAM SWINGS 90º TO ACTUATE
• Install the CPM actuator directly on top of the discharge
PULL DIRECTION
valve, to hand tight only, in the correct orientation for
2 in. TRAVEL TO connection to the cable system.
ACTIVATE
• Ensure the unit is reset in the non-fire position (the lever
CONDUIT AND
CABLE FIELD and cam in the horizontal position, and the actuation pin
ASSEMBLED fully retracted) before fitting.
• For pneumatic actuation, connect the hose from the pilot
container to the 1/8 in. NPT side port using the appropriate
adaptor.
CABLE PULL ACTUATION
• For cable actuation, connect the cable through the conduit,
into the cam and secure it with the two grub screws.
Operating Instructions
The cable pneumatic manual actuator is actuated by the
following methods:
Manual:
CABLE
MOVE LEVER UP 90º TO ACTUATE Remove the safety pin and move the lever upward to 90º.
Pneumatic:
Actuate the pilot container to apply pressure to the side
actuation port.
CONDUIT AND Cable:
CABLE FIELD
ASSEMBLED Exert pull force on the wire to actuate.
REMOVE PIN TO ALLOW The cable pneumatic manual actuator latches in the fire
MANUAL ACTUATION position and requires manual resetting before re-fitting to the
discharge valve.
MANUAL LEVER ACTUATION
1. Disable the actuator by moving the disable pin on the
FIGURE 3-36 handle forward toward the actuator body, which locks the
CABLE AND MANUALLY ACTUATED POSITIONS operating mechanism in place.
025261
2. Remove the CPM actuator assembly from the discharge

valve.
3. Remove the safety pin and move the lever 90º upwards.
knob latches and the stem moves freely).
5. Reset the actuation pin and refit the safety pin.
6. Reinstall the CPM actuator onto the discharge valve.
7. Re-enable the actuator by moving the disarm pin on the
handle back away from the actuator body to unlock the
operating mechanism.
In case of faults or suspected faults contact customer
! CAUTION
Failure to reset the actuator before fitting it onto the container
valve results in the immediate operation of the container valve
and the potentially hazardous discharge of the container.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CABLE PULL ACTUATION COMPONENTS
Cable with swaged end fittings

The 1/16 in. diameter cable is used to attach remote manual
pull boxes to container valves, pull equalizers, and control
boxes. The cable is constructed of stranded, stainless steel
wire. The cable is available in lengths of 15.2 m, 30.5 m, and
45.7 m. The cable assemblies include a brass swaged end
fitting for attaching to the remote pull box.
TABLE 3-24: CABLES WITH SWAGED END FITTINGS

Part No. Description
304.207.010 15.2 m (50 ft) 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) cable with swaged end fitting
Cable material: Stainless steel
Swaged fitting material: Brass
Cable end overall size: 16 mm (L) x 10 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.178 kg (15.2 m cable)
0.341 kg (30.5 m cable)
0.519 kg (45.7 m cable)
SLOT IN COUPLING FOR STAINLESS STEEL CABLE WITH SWAGED

HANDLE
INSTALLATION OF CABLE END CABLE END FOR PULL BOX, CABLE END
FITTING HAVING RED PAINT MARK
CABLE END
(BRASS)
COUPLING
Note: The strength of the end fitting exceeds the breaking point of the cable.
FIGURE 3-37
CABLE WITH SWAGED END FITTING
000689
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CABLE PULL ACTUATION COMPONENTS (Continued)
Cable clamp
(Part No. 304.207.013)
The cable clamp is used to create a loop in the wire rope for
attachment of the wire rope to a lever release actuator.
Material: Brass
Overall size: 13 mm x 13 mm x 13 mm
Weight: 0.015 kg
13 mm
(1/2 in.)
CABLE CLAMP
1.6 mm (1/16 in.) CABLE
13 mm
(1/2 in.)
ALLEN HEAD
SET SCREW
(10-32 X 1/4 in. HEX 6 mm
OVAL POINT) (1/4 in.)
FIGURE 3-38
CABLE CLAMP
000693
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Flared end fitting

(Part No. 304.207.014)
The flared end fitting provides a smooth transition on the end
of a pipe run for the pull cable. When the wire rope exits the
pipe to connect to lever actuators on pilot cylinders, selector
valves, or globe valves the fitting prevents chaffing of the
wire rope due to sharp edges on the end of the pipe. Use the
flared end fitting on pipe ends any time the wire rope extends
beyond the piping.
Material: Brass
Overall size: 25 mm x 22 mm Hex
Weight: 0.042 kg
25 mm
22 mm HEX
3/8 in. STANDARD

PIPE THREAD 11 mm
FIGURE 3-39
FLARED END FITTING
000691
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Corner pulley Thread adaptor

(Part No. 304.207.015) (Part No. 304.207.016)
The corner pulley is required whenever a mechanical release A two-piece adaptor consisting of a coupling nut and a hex
pull cable run involves a change in direction. Corner pulleys nipple is available to simplify the installation.
are installed as part of the cable housing (pipe) and provide The coupling nut has a 3/8 in. - 18 NPT female thread on one
90° direction changes with minimal force loss and no induced end and a 0.625 in. 18 left hand female thread on the other.
kinking.
The hex nipple has a 3/8 in. - 18 NPT male thread on one
The corner pulley is made of forged brass and is threaded for end and a 0.625 in. 18 left hand male thread on the other.
3/8 in. NPT pipe. The pulley is watertight and is designed for
location inside or outside the protected space. Installation instructions
1. Thread the male NPT end of the hex nipple into the corner
68 mm
3/8 in. NPT
pulley.
29 mm
2. Engage the female 3/8 in. NPT end of the coupling nut
onto the 3/8 in. conduit. At the same time, engage the
male 0.625 in. - 18 left hand thread of the hex nipple and
the female 0.625 in. - 18 left hand thread of the coupling
nut into each other. This allows the two pieces to be pulled
together as you tighten the coupling nut.
3/8 in. NPT PIPE
REMOVABLE FACE 3/8 - 18 NPT FEMALE

FOR RUNNING 104 mm
CABLE
LEAD-CLAD
COPPER GASKET
ADAPTOR
THREAD
ADAPTOR
0.625 - 18 LEFT HAND FEMALE
FIGURE 3-40 0.625 - 18 LEFT HAND

MALE
CORNER PULLEY
000690
3/8 - 18 NPT
Material: Brass MALE
Thread type: 3/8 in. NPT

Weight: 0.46 kg
FIGURE 3-41
THREAD ADAPTOR
Material: Brass
Overall size: 38 mm x Hex
(Part No. SECTION
14A-06MA)2 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS HYGOOD
PNEUMATIC ACTUATION COMPONENTS
Flexible Flexible Pilot Hose

pilot hose Male Pilot Hose Connector
(Part No.The
306.205.003
flexible pilot[710 mm],
hose is used 306205010 [815acti-
to connect pressure The male pilot hose connector is used to connect two
mm], and Hose construction: Stainless steel wire braid
vated devices
306205011 [1070 mm]) to the system, e.g. slave container, pres- pilot hoses together for systems where a second con-
sure switch, etc.
PTFE liner to ISO 12086 Part 1
tainer of a different size is used to protect a different
The flexible pilot hose is used to connect pressure activated
enclosure.Connection: Zinc passivated
For example: a large container is protecting a mild steel
devices to the system, for example a subordinate containerroom and a separate smaller container protects 2 theoff 1/4 in. BSP straight female
sub-
Figure 16 - Flexible hose (Part No. 6490)
and a pressure switch. swivel union
floor, and both containers are to actuate simultaneously,
and a hose longer than Part No. 6490 is required.
Plating specification: ZINKLAD 1000 (Hexavalent
Figure 17a - Male Pilot Hose Connector chromium-free)
Internal hose
(Part No. inner diameter: 6.22 mm
12549)
Connection inner diameter: 4 mm
Minimum burst pressure: 724 bar
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42,
and 70 bar system
Technical Information
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25
FIGURE 3-42 bar system
Outer sheath: Stainless Steel FLEXIBLE
Braided HOSE
Inner sheath: PTFE to BS 4976
Technical Information
025016
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70
Location on system
Max. Working Pressure: 190 bar (2755 psi) bar system
Material: Steel, zinc passivated
Min. Burst Pressure:
The flexible
759 bar (11008 psi) Bend angle: 360°
MIn.pilot
Bendhose is connected
Radius: 60mmbetween
(2.4")@ 0 othe following
C (32 o
F) Connection: 1/4" BSPP x 1/4" BSPP
positions:Connections: 1/4" BSP swivel female Minimum bend radius: 60 mm at 0 °C according to
Length: 710mm (28") EN 12094-8
• Master container valve plot port and subordinate container Street Elbow
Hose volume: 20.07 cm3 / 23.5 cm3 / 31.2 cm3
pneumatic actuator
This elbowApprovals:
can be used to connect a pilot hose LPCB, to a VdS, UL, and FM
• Subordinate
Male to subordinate container pneumatic actuator
Adaptor 75mm (3")Certification:
valve. The street elbow’s 1/4" NPT male thread
EN 12094-8
screws into the valve body actuation port. The 1/4" NPT
• Pilot container to (91105)
masterconnects
container pneumatic
hose to theactuator CEmaleCertification
This adaptor the pilot 25mm thread of the adaptor (PartNo. 0832-CPD-2040
No. 12546) screws into
& 50mm container valve assembly. The male adapter the street elbow. (306.205.003): 0832-CPR-S0071
The flexible pilot hose (Part No. 6490)
(12546) connects to the 75mm container valve assy and would then screw onto the male adaptor. 2831-CPR-S0071
Ensure thatto the pressure
the switch.
container and the manifold complete with CE Certification No. 0832-CPR-S0071
check valves are bracketed securely and aligned correctly Figure 17b - Street Elbow (Part No. 15147)
(306205010 and 2831-CPR-S0071
before connecting the hoses.
Figure 17 - Male Adaptor 306205011):
Master to subordinate container: Year of CE marking 2008, 2018, and 2021
1. Apply PTFE tape to the 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in. BSPP (306.205.003):
adaptor. Year of CE marking 2018 and 2021
(306205010 and
2. Remove the pilot port plug and fit a 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in.
306205011):
BSPP adaptor and tighten securely.
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No.,
3. Connect the pilot
Technical hose to the pilot port adaptor and tee on
Information Batch No., WP-120 bar, hose
the pneumatic actuator fitted to the subordinate container type 3, and CE0832 or CE2831
Material: Brass Technical Information
and tighten securely. 1/4"BSPT x 1/4" BSPP
Connection: Method of marking: Laser (onto identification collar)
Subordinate to subordinate(Part No.91105)
container: Material: Part number marked Brass on 306.205.003 (710 mm)
1/4" NPT x 1/4" BSPP Connection: 1/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT
Connect pilot hose between(Part tee’s on pneumatic actuators
No.12546) component: 306205010 (815 mm)
fitted to subordinate containers and tighten securely.
FM-200® Installation Guide/11100/02.08.05/Issue 3.3 306205011
23 (1070 mm)
Pilot to master container:
Hose type: Type 3
1. Apply PTFE tape to the 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in. BSPP Overall size: 7 mm nominal O.D. x 710 mm /
adaptor and tighten securely to the pilot valve outlet 815 mm / 1070 mm
adaptor. Weight: 0.15 kg / 0.17 kg / 0.19 kg
2. Connect the pilot hose to the pilot port adaptor and tee on
the pneumatic actuator fitted to the master container and
tighten securely.
The flexible pilot hose is a pressure connector and requires
no operating instructions.
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PNEUMATIC ACTUATION COMPONENTS (Continued)
1/4 in. BSPP male pilot hose connector

Part No. Description Picture Technical specification
309.013.007 The male connector Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb,
connects the two female 30 mm zinc passivated
actuation hoses together. Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in.
BSPP
Maximum working 350 bar
pressure:
Overall size: 30.0 mm x 19.0 mm

hex A/F
Weight: 0.034 kg
025017
1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male adaptor

309.013.005 The 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb,
in. BSPP male adaptor zinc passivated
connects the pilot 34 mm
hose to the pilot port of
the 25 mm container Connection: 1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in.
valve assembly (Part BSPP
No. 302.209.001,
302.209.015 and Maximum working 350 bar
302.209.006) or to the pressure:
pilot port of the 50 mm
container valve assembly Overall size: 34.0 mm x 19.0 mm
(Part No. 302.209.002, hex A/F
302.209.016 and
302.209.007). 025018 Weight: 0.034 kg
3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male adaptor

309.013.036 The 3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb,
in. BSPP male adaptor 34 mm zinc passivated
connects the pilot Connection: 3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in.
hose to the standard BSPP
pressure switch (Part
No. 305.209.009). This Maximum working 350 bar
adaptor is supplied with pressure:
the standard pressure Overall size: 34.0 mm x 19.0 mm
switch. hex A/F
Weight: 0.036 kg
E001047
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

in. BSPP male adaptor 34 mm
zinc passivated
connects the pilot Connection: 1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in.
hose to the discharge BSPP
pressure switch (Part No.
305.209.009) and the Maximum working 350 bar
ATEX pressure switch pressure:
(Part No. 305.205.003 Overall size: 34.0 mm x 19.0 mm
and 305.205.004). hex A/F
Weight: 0.034 kg
025019
1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP male elbow

in. BSPP male actuation zinc passivated
elbow connects the
female pilot hose to the Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4
pneumatic actuator. The 33.9 mm
in. NPT
elbow’s 1/4 in. BSPP Maximum working 450 bar
thread connects to the pressure:
hose and the 1/4 in. NPT
thread connects to the Overall size: 33.9 mm x 33.0 mm
33.0 mm
pneumatic actuator on
the container discharge Weight: 0.05 kg
valve. E001059
1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. NPT male tee
309.200.021 The 1/4 in. BSPP x Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb,
1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. zinc passivated
NPT male actuation tee Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4
42.3 mm
connects the female pilot in. BSPP x 1/4 in.
hose to the pneumatic NPT
actuator. The actuation
tee’s 1/4 in. BSPP thread Maximum working 450 bar
33.3 mm
connects to the female pressure:
pilot hose and a 1/4 in. Overall size: 42.3 mm x 33.3 mm
NPT thread connects to
the pneumatic actuator on
the container discharge
Weight: 0.075 kg
valve.
E001048
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. NPT street elbow

in. NPT elbow can be zinc passivated
used to connect a pilot
hose to the 80 mm valve.
The street elbow’s 1/4 Connection: 1/4 in. NPT male x
28 mm
in. NPT male thread 1/4 in. NPT female
screws into the valve
body actuation port. The Maximum working 125 bar
1/4 in. NPT thread of the pressure:
male adaptor (Part No.
309.013.006) screws into
the street elbow. The Overall size: 28.0 mm x 18.0 mm
flexible pilot hose (Part
No. 306.205.003) would
then screw onto the male Weight: 0.042 kg
adaptor. E001049
6 mm copper nickel pipe

308.002.001 The 6 mm copper nickel Material: Copper nickel alloy
pipe connects pressure Specification CN102
activated devices to the
system, for example, a Maximum working 149.5 bar
subordinate container pressure:
or a pressure switch. Supplied length: Ordered per metre
The pipe is supplied per Diameter: 6.0 mm OD x
metre and is suitable for 4.4 mm ID
bending.
025023 Weight: 0.078 kg/m
6 mm half hard pipe

308.002.002 Where extensive Material: Phosphorous de-oxi-
actuation runs are dised copper
required, 6 mm half hard Specification BS6017 grade
copper pipe can be used. Cu-DHP
The pipe is supplied in
3 m lengths and is not Maximum working 149.5 bar
suitable for bending. pressure:
Supplied length: 3m
Diameter: 6.0 mm OD x
4.0 mm ID
025023 Weight: 0.078 kg/m

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
6 mm compression tee
30880015 The 6 mm compression Material: Brass
tee primarily connects Connection: 6 mm DIN 2353
pilot lines from one 27.5
27.5mm
MM compression fittings
subordinate container to
the next. Maximum working 150 bar
pressure:
4444 mm
MM
025831 Weight: 0.04 kg
6 mm straight coupling
30880020 The 6 mm straight Material: Brass
coupling connects the Connection: 6 mm DIN 2353
6 mm copper pipe. compression fittings
pressure:
32 MM
32 mm / 13.0 mm hex A/F
025832
Weight: 0.026 kg
3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm stud coupling

30880060 The 6 mm stud coupling is Material: Brass
used in the pilot line when
using copper nickel pipe to
connect to the discharge Connection: 3/8 in. NPT
40.5 mm
pressure switch (Part No.
305.209.009).
The stud coupling Maximum working 150 bar
is supplied with the pressure:
discharge pressure switch
(Part No. 305.209.009). Overall size: 40.5 mm x 18.0 mm
hex A/F
Weight: 0.05 kg
E001005
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

30880061 The 1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm Material: Brass
stud coupling is used in
the pilot line when using
copper nickel pipe and fits Connection: 1/4 in. NPT
into the pressure switch
(Part No. 305.209.009),
ATEX pressure switch
(Part No. 305.205.003
and 305.205.004), the Maximum working 150 bar
pneumatic actuator (Part pressure:
No. 304.209.004), the
manual/pneumatic actuator
(Part No. 304700003), and
26
26 mm
MM hex A/F
the bleed valve (Part No.
302.200.076).
Weight: 0.028 kg
025834
1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm stud coupling

30880007 The 1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm Material: Brass
stud coupling is used in
the pilot line when using
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPT
copper nickel pipe. The
1/4 in. BSPT x 6 mm
stud coupling allows a
connection to the pilot port Maximum working 150 bar
of the 25 mm container pressure:
valve assembly (Part No.
302.209.001, 302.209.006
and 302.209.015) or to Overall size: 26.0 mm x 14.0 mm
the pilot port of the 50 mm hex A/F
container valve assembly
26
26 mm
(Part No. 302.209.002, MM
302.209.007 and Weight: 0.028 kg

302.209.016).
025834
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

in. BSPP male adaptor 28 mm
28 MM zinc passivated
connects the ATEX Connection: 1/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in.
LPS through the pilot BSPP
hose to the LPS port on
the 25 mm container Maximum working 350 bar
valve assembly (Part pressure:
No. 302.209.015) or the Overall size: 28.0 mm x 19.0 mm
50 mm container valve
assembly (Part No. Weight: 0.034 kg
302.209.016). 025020

30880064 The 1/8 in. NPT x 6 mm Material: Brass
stud coupling connects
the ATEX LPS through Connection: 1/8 in. NPT
6 mm copper tubing to
the LPS port on the 25 Maximum working 150 bar
mm container valve pressure:
assembly (Part No.
302.209.015) or the Overall size: 26.0 mm x 14.0 mm
50 mm container valve hex A/F
26
26mm
assembly (Part No. Weight: 0.024 kg
MM
302.209.016).
025835
1/4 in. BSPP male x 6 mm stud coupling

30880062 The 1/4 in. BSPP male x Material: Brass
6 mm stud coupling allows
a connection between the
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP male x
6 mm copper tube and a
31.5 mm 6 mm stud coupling
6 mm BSPP female pilot
actuation hose. It is most
commonly used at the end Maximum working 150 bar
of the 6 mm copper tubing pressure:
to provide a female pilot Overall size: 18.95 mm hex A/F x
actuation hose (Part No. 31.5 mm
306.205.003) connection
to the discharge
Weight: 0.030 kg
pressure switch (Part
305.209.009).
E001050
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
1/4 in. BSPP female x 6 mm stud coupling

30880063 The 1/4 in. BSPP female Material: Brass
x 6 mm stud coupling 32 mm Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP female x
connects the decom-
6 mm stud coupling
pression screw (Part
No. 30027301) and the Maximum working 150 bar
bleed valve (Part No. pressure:
302.200.075) through a Overall size: 32.0 mm x 17.0 mm
1/4 in. Dowty seal (Part hex A/F
No. 31199816) to the
6 mm copper tube. Weight: 0.034 kg
E00924
1/4 in. NPT socket

309.001.002 On systems using both Material: A105N
6 mm copper nickel pipe
and flexible actuation hose,
a 1/4 in. NPT socket is used Type: 3000 lb fitting
to make the connection. 36 mm
One side of the socket Connection: 1/4 in. NPT female
connects to the pilot hose
(Part No. 306.205.003) via
Working 207 bar at 37 ºC
the 1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in.
pressure:
BSPP adaptor (Part No.
309.013.006). The other
side of the socket connects Overall size: 36 mm x 20.0 mm (Dia)
to the pilot line copper
nickel pipe via the 1/4 in.
NPT x 6 mm stud coupling Weight: 0.057 kg
(Part No. 30880061). E001006
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
1/4 in. NPT bleed valve

302.200.076 This bleed valve is used in Body: Stainless steel
system configurations with
master and subordinate
Internal parts: Stainless steel
containers. On manifolded
systems with a connected
reserve, the bleed valve must Seat: Nitrile
be fitted to the pneumatic
actuator tee of the last subor-
dinate container using a 1/4 Connection: 1/4 in. NPT female
in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP swivel
female adaptor (Part No.
309.013.048) where actuation 32 mm
Closing 3.5 bar
32
hoses are utilized. For 6 mm A/F pressure:
A / F16
16
copper tube, use a 6 mm
stud coupling x 1/4 in. NPT
Maximum 120 bar
adaptor (Part No. 30880061).
1/41/4”
in. NPT working
The bleed valve relieves a NPT
pressure:
gradual pressure build up in
the actuation line. Overall size: 32.0 mm x 16.0 mm
hex A/F
The bleed valve automat-
ically relieves a pressure
of up to approximately 3.5
bar minimum, and seals at Weight: 0.04 kg
pressures above this.
025404
1/4 in. BSPP bleed valve

302.200.075 The 1/4 in. BSPP bleed valve Body: Stainless steel
is used in system configu-ra-
tions with a pilot container. Internal parts: Stainless steel
Systems utilizing a pilot
container for operation require
Seat: Nitrile
a fitted bleed valve in the pilot
line.
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP male
The bleed valve relieves a
gradual pressure build-up in 19 mm
the actuation line. The bleed Closing 3.5 bar
valve automatically relieves pressure:
a minimum pressure build-up
to approximately 3.5 bar Maximum 370 bar
minimum. working
pressure:
It connects into the outlet
adaptor on the pilot container Overall size: 19.0 mm x 16.0 mm
assembly and is supplied hex A/F
within the pilot container
assemblies. Weight: 0.02 kg
E001003
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
1/4 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. BSPP swivel female adaptor
309.013.048 The 1/4 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. Material: Steel 11SMnPb37,
BSPP swivel female adaptor passivated
connects the bleed valve Connection: 1/4 in. NPT male x
(Part No. 302.200.076) to the 39
39 mm
MM
1/4 in. BSPP swivel
male actuation tee (Part No. female
309.200.021).
Maximum 350 bar
working
pressure:
Overall size: 39.0 mm x 19.0 mm hex
A/F
Weight: 0.04 kg
E001004
1/4 in. Dowty seal

31199816 The Dowty seal fastens the Material: Nitrile and steel. 85 ± 5
decompression screw (Part DIA 20.57 mm
Shore A
No. 30027301) or the bleed
Maximum ≤ 1500 bar
valve (Part No. 302.200.075)
working
to the appropriate 1/4 in.
pressure:
BSPP fitting.
Overall size: 2.03 mm x
20.57 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.005 kg
E000704
1/4 in. BSPP equal tee

309013049 The 1/4 in. BSPP equal male Material: Steel 230 MO7 Pb, zinc
tee connects the female 45 mm passivated
actuation hoses. Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP male
Maximum 450 bar
working
pressure:
Overall size: 44.7 mm x 19.0 mm hex
A/F
E000926
Weight: 0.33 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
1/4 in. BSPP swivel female x 1/4 in. BSPP fixed female
309013050 The 1/4 in. BSPP Material: Steel 230 MO7 Pb,
swivel female x 1/4 zinc passivated
in. BSPP fixed female 30.9 mm
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP swivel
connects the decom- female x 1/4 in. BSPP
pression screw (Part No. fixed female
30027301) through a 1/4
in. Dowty seal (Part No. Maximum working 450 bar
31199816) to the 1/4 in. pressure:
BSPP male tee. Overall size: 30.9 mm x 19.0 mm
hex A/F
E000927 Weight: 0.31 kg

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH - STANDARD

(Part No. 305.209.009)
The discharge pressure switch activates from agent pressure
during discharge and signals to a control panel that the
system discharged. The discharge pressure switch latches
on operation and contains a reset plunger. The discharge
pressure switch ordered under Part No. 305.209.009 consists
of two additional adaptors, 3/8 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. BSPP
male and 3/8 in. NPT male x 6 mm stud adaptor.
Note: If a manual actuator is fitted on the valve assembly, a discharge
pressure switch should be used.
Switch case and cover: C.R. steel (painted red)
Body: C37700 forged brass
FIGURE 3-43
Switch point: 2.8 bar rising
STANDARD DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH
Tolerance: ± 0.7 bar 025233

Electrical connection: 1/2 in. and 3/4 in. conduit Location on system
knockouts with #6-32 UNC The discharge pressure switch connects to the pilot port on
terminal screws the valve through a pilot hose or pneumatic tubing for single
Pressure connection: 3/8 in. NPT female container systems or to the pneumatic actuation line or to the
Adaptor: 3/8 in. NPT male x 1/4 in. NPT discharge pipework.
female
Range: 1 bar to 3 bar
Reset method: Manual through plunger
Minimum actuation 3.4 bar
pressure:
Maximum operating 200 bar
pressure:
Electrical ratings: 10 A 250 VAC
15 A 125 VAC
3/4HP, 250 VAC
1-, 2-, or 3-phase
Switch configuration: Three pole, double throw
(3PDT)
Installation environment: Indoor / non-corrosive
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42,
range: and 70 bar system
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25
bar system
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70
bar system
Conformity: EN 12094-10*
Marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, part
number, maximum working
pressure, CE*
Method of marking: Permanent, non-flammable
component: 305.209.009
Overall size: 114 mm (L) x 114 mm (H) x
67 mm (W)
Weight: 1.0 kg
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
Note: * The CE mark on the component relates to the electrical switch
mechanism (not for constructions product regulation [CPR] as the discharge
pressure switch is not covered by EN12094-10). Additionally, the discharge
pressure switch has been tested in accordance with EN12094-10 for LPCB
redbook listing.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH - STANDARD

(Continued)
Installation instructions Operating instructions

Mechanical installation: The discharge pressure switch is designed to work within the
pre-determined system operating conditions. The switch auto
• Install the discharge pressure switch adjacent to the valve
resets following the end of a system discharge.
using the integral bracket.
• Ensure the container is bracketed securely before Maintenance instructions
connecting the switch. In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
Single container systems:
1. Remove the plug from the pilot port.
2. Fit the appropriate adaptors.
3. Using either pneumatic tubing or pilot hose, connect the
switch to the pilot port on the master valve.
Multiple container systems:

2. Using either pneumatic tubing or pilot hose, connect
the switch to the tee on the final subordinate valve or
discharge pipework.
Electrical installation:
2. Connections can be made either normally open or normally
closed. The end-of-line resistor must be installed to suit the
control unit, typically 4K7.
FIGURE 3-44
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH CONTACT
ARRANGEMENT
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH - ATEX

(Part No. 305.205.003)
76 mm
The pressure switch is normally operated from the pneumatic
pilot line and may be used to provide an electrical indication 1/4 in. 1/4"
NPT NPT
of the release of Novec 1230 fluid. FEMALE FEMALE
Technical specification 87 mm
Switch case and cover: Anodised aluminium alloy

Microswitch type: 1 x SPDT, contact rated 3 A
at 30 VDC
Element: Nitrile diaphragm
MOUNTING
Conduit thread: M20 x 1.5 ISO
MOUNTING
BRACKET
BRACKET
Maximum working 49 bar 2-OFF DIA 7.0 mm

pressure: FIXING
2-OFF Ø7.0
HOLES
FIXING HOLES
Proof pressure: 75 bar M20 x 1.5 mm

M20 x 1.5 154 mm
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
Process connection: 1/4 in. NPT female

Range: 1 to 3 bar
Switch point: 2 bar Rising
Accuracy: 1% BS6134: 1991
Peak ambient temperature: 55 °C
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C
range: FIGURE 3-45
ATEX DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH
Weight: 3.14 kg 025030
Certification: ATEX/Sira CEII2GD Ex EExd II

B+H2 T6 Ta -55 °C to 75 °C
Conformity: EN 12094-10 *
Marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark,
PF261A1B/2R10F16B/16S2AA,
Serial No., 2 bar, and CE *
label
Approvals: LPCB and VdS
Note: * The CE mark on the component relates to the electrical switch
mechanism (not for constructions product regulation(CPR) as the discharge
pressure switch is not covered by EN12094-10). Additionally, the discharge
pressure switch has been tested in accordance with EN12094-10 for LPCB
redbook listing.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH - ATEX (Continued)
Location on system Operating instructions

Single container systems: The ATEX discharge pressure The discharge pressure switch is designed to work within the
switch is connected to the pilot port on the valve through pilot pre-determined system operating conditions. The switch auto
hose or pneumatic tubing. resets following the end of a system discharge.
Multiple container systems: The ATEX discharge pressure
switch is connected to the final subordinate pneumatic Maintenance instructions
actuator through pilot hose or pneumatic tubing or to the In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
discharge pipework. services to organise a replacement part.
Installation instructions (mechanical installation)

1. Install the discharge pressure switch adjacent to the valve
using the integral bracket.
2. Ensure the container is bracketed securely before
connecting the switch.
Single container systems:
1. Remove the plug from the pilot port.
2. Fit the appropriate adaptors and using either pneumatic
tubing or pilot hose, connect the switch to the pilot port on
the master valve.
Multiple container systems:
2. Using either pneumatic tubing or pilot hose, connect
the switch to the tee on the final subordinate valve or
discharge pipework.
Installation instructions (electrical installation)

1 AND 2 MAKE CONTACT

ON RISING PRESSURE
(NORMALLY OPEN)
1 AND 3 BREAK CONTACT
ON RISING PRESSURE
(NORMALLY CLOSED)
FIGURE 3-46
ATEX DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH CONTACT
ARRANGEMENT
025075
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (25 BAR SYSTEMS ONLY)

(Part No. 304.205.006 and 305.209.005) 38 mm
The low pressure warning switch is factory fitted and must

1/8 in. NPT
be ordered separately. The device continuously monitors the
below 20 bar, the switch operates to provide an electrical
signal.
16 mm
The operating pressure is factory set and no adjustments
may be carried out on-site.
The connection to the switch is 1/8 in. NPT (male). FIGURE 3-47
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
025032
TABLE 3-25: LOW PRESSURE SWITCH DETAILS
304.205.006 Low pressure switch (standard - open on fall)
305.209.005 Low pressure switch (special - close on fall)
Location on system
The low pressure switch is fitted opposite the outlet of the
container valve assembly.
The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the low pressure
switch installed. The flying leads from the low pressure
switch are not polarity sensitive but require the addition of an
end-of-line resistor in series (typically 4K7) when connecting
to the control unit.
The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
with an appropriate control unit.
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Standard - open on fall (Part No. 304.205.006) Standard - close on fall (Part No. 305.209.005)
Body: Stainless steel Body: Stainless steel
Electrical housing: Epoxy sealed terminals Electrical housing: Epoxy sealed terminals
Ingress Protection class: IP65 Ingress Protection class: IP65
Connection: Brass 1/8 in. NPT Connection: Brass 1/8 in. NPT
Switch type: Normally open at atmospheric Switch type: Normally closed at atmospheric
pressure pressure
Switch point: Open on fall at 20 bar Switch point: Close on fall at 20 bar
Close on rise at 24.1 bar Open on rise at 24.1 bar
Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
Maximum working 33.5 bar Maximum working 33.5 bar
pressure: pressure:
Proof pressure: 345 bar Proof pressure: 345 bar
Electrical connection: 0.9 m x 2 core cable Electrical connection: 0.9 m x 2 core cable
Maximum current: 2.9 A Maximum current: 2.9 A
Voltage range: 5 VDC to 28 VDC Voltage range: 5 VDC to 28 VDC
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2048 CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2048
2831-CPR-S2048 2831-CPR-S2048
Year of CE marking: 2008 and 2021 Year of CE marking: 2008 and 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, PS80-K2- CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, PS80-K1-
1949 (designation), Serial No., 1949 (designation), Serial No.,
290-350 (set point and switch 290-350 (set point and switch
point), and CE0832 or CE2831 point), and CE0832 or CE2831
Method of marking: Permanent, non-flammable Method of marking: Permanent, non-flammable
screenprint screenprint
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (25 BAR SYSTEMS ONLY) -

ALTERNATE TRANSFER ON FALL OPTION NO. 1 - GEMS*
Location on system
(Part No. 305.209.007)
A low pressure warning switch is factory fitted and must be
ordered separately. The device continuously monitors the
container pressure and in the event of the pressure dropping
below 20.3 bar, the switch operates to enable the condition to
be signalled to a control unit. Mechanical installation:
This low pressure switch is the primary supply, (option No. The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the low pressure
1), of a dual source component used in order to maintain switch installed.
the supply chain and ensure that adequate stock levels are Electrical installation:
available to fully support customers and installers.
1. Remove the DIN connector to access the wiring terminals.
Note: Not available for use with TPED or DOT/TPED seamless containers.
Removal of the connector is accomplished by removing the
set-screw from the connector and removing the terminal
block from the DIN housing.
1 AND 2 MAKE CONTACT ON

PRESSURE DECREASE
FIGURE 3-48
ALTERNATE LOW PRESSURE SWITCH 1 AND 3 BREAK CONTACT ON
(OPTION NO. 1 - GEMS) PRESSURE DECREASE
025033
Technical specification CONTACTS SHOWN WITH PRESSURE

SWITCH INSTALLED AT NOMINAL SYSTEM
Pressure port Zinc plated steel PRESSURE
material:
Element: Kapton diaphragm FIGURE 3-49
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
Switch type: 1 x SPDT (Single pole, double throw) 025074
Switch point: Transfers on fall at 20.3 bar

Resets on rise at 24.1 bar
Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
range: with an appropriate control unit.
Proof pressure: 206.8 bar
Contact reset Auto resetting contacts
method: In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT male
Electrical rating: 5 A at 24 VDC
*GEMS is a trademark of its respective owner.
Electrical connection: DIN 43650A connector with
1/2 in. NPT female conduit connection
Pin 1: Common at atmospheric pressure
Pin 2: Normally closed at atmospheric
pressure
Pin 3: Normally open at atmospheric
pressure
Certification: UL Listed (EX4510)
IP rating: IP65
Overall size: 104 mm (L) x 28 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.16 kg
CE marking Manufacturer’s mark, PS71, 570585,
requirements: Serial No., 294F (Set Point), CE
Method of marking: Pin stamped
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (25 BAR SYSTEMS ONLY) -

ALTERNATE TRANSFER ON FALL OPTION NO. 2 - NASON*
(Part No. 305.209.007)
A low pressure warning switch is factory fitted and must be Location on system
ordered separately. The device continuously monitors the
container pressure and in the event of the pressure dropping
below 20 bar, the switch operates to enable the condition to
be signalled to a control unit.
This low pressure switch is the secondary supply, (option
No. 2), of a dual source component used in order to maintain Mechanical installation:
the supply chain and ensure that adequate stock levels are The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the low pressure
available to fully support customers and installers. switch installed.
Note: Not available for use with TPED or DOT/TPED seamless containers.
1. Remove the DIN connector to access the wiring terminals.
Removal of the connector is accomplished by removing the
set-screw from the connector and removing the terminal
block from the DIN housing.
FIGURE 3-50
ALTERNATE LOW PRESSURE SWITCH 1 AND 2 MAKE CONTACT ON
PRESSURE DECREASE
(OPTION NO. 2 - NASON)
025033
1 AND 3 BREAK CONTACT ON

Technical specification PRESSURE DECREASE
Body: Brass and anodised aluminium

CONTACTS SHOWN WITH PRESSURE
Switch type: Single pole, double throw (SPDT) SWITCH INSTALLED AT NOMINAL SYSTEM
Switch point: Transfers on fall at 20 bar PRESSURE
Resets on rise at 22.8 bar

FIGURE 3-51
Tolerance: +/-1.0 bar LOW PRESSURE SWITCH CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C 025074
range:
Proof pressure: 413.7 bar Operating instructions
Contact reset Auto resetting contacts The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
method: pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT male with an appropriate control unit.
Electrical rating: 5 A at 24 VDC
Electrical connection: DIN 43650A connector with
1/2 in. NPT female conduit connection In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
Pin 1: Common at atmospheric pressure services to organise a replacement part.
Pin 2: Normally closed at atmospheric
pressure *NASON is a trademark of its respective owner.
Pin 3: Normally open at atmospheric
pressure
Certification: UL Listed (EX4510),
IP rating: IP65
Overall size: 104 mm (L) x 32 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.21 kg
CE marking Manufacturer’s mark, FVFC CD 234,
requirements: 290 (set point), Serial No., and CE
Method of marking: Identification label
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH - ATEX (25 BAR SYSTEMS

ONLY)
76 mm
(Part No. 305.205.004)
The low pressure ATEX switch is fixed to the wall in close 1/4 in. 1/4"
NPT NPT
FEMALE
proximity to the container and is used to continuously monitor
FEMALE
the container pressure.

87 mm
In the event of the container pressure falling below 20 bar,
the switch operates to provide an electrical signal.
This switch must be ordered separately from the container.
MOUNTING
MOUNTING
BRACKET
BRACKET
2-OFF DIA 7.0 mm

2-OFF Ø7.0
FIXING HOLES
FIXING HOLES
M20 X 1.5 mm
M20 x 1.5 154 mm
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
FIGURE 3-52
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (ATEX)
025034
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH - ATEX (25 BAR SYSTEMS

ONLY, Continued)
Installation instructions (Continued)
Technical specification Mechanical installation (pipe option):
Switch case and cover: Anodised aluminium alloy This unit should be connected to the 1/8 in. NPT female
Microswitch type: 1 x SPDT, contact rated 3 A outlet of the container valve via a 1/8 in. NPT x 6 mm stud
at 30 VDC coupling, 6 mm copper nickel pipe and a 1/4 in. NPT x
Element: Nitrile diaphragm 6 mm stud coupling into the low pressure switch. After fitting
Conduit thread: M20 x 1.5 ISO the containers, pipework and discharge nozzles, fix the low
Maximum working 33.5 bar pressure switch to the wall in close proximity to the container
pressure: in the following sequence:
Proof pressure: 75 bar 1. Cut and bend the 6 mm pipe so that it is ready to fit at the
Process connection: 1/4 in. NPT female container valve and at the pressure switch. Make good the
connections on each end of the pipe.
Range: 4 to 28 bar
Switch point: 20 bar falling 2. Wrap PTFE on the 1/8 in. NPT taper thread of the 1/8 in.
Accuracy: 1% BS6134: 1991 NPT x 6 mm stud coupling.
Peak ambient 55 °C 3. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from the container valve and
temperature: tighten the grub screw inside to stop the leak.
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C 4. Remove the 1/8 in. NPT stud coupling from the copper
range: tubing, screw into the container valve and tighten it.
Weight: 3.14 kg 5. Using an Allen key, insert it through the stud coupling and
Certification: ATEX/Sira CEII2GD Ex EExd unscrew the grub screw half a turn. Gas leaks from this
IIB+H2 T6 Ta -55 to 75 °C, location. Make the connection to the copper tubing without
EN12094-10 delay.
6. Make certain that the correct plug is identified at the
Approvals: LPCB and VdS container valve and that the correct tools are available to
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2051 carry out this work.
2831-CPR-S2051
CE marking Manufacturer’s mark, Remove cover plate to access the wiring terminals.
requirements: PF261A1B/2W10F16B/16S2AA, Connections can be made either normally open or normally
Serial No., 20 bar, and CE0832 or closed. The end-of-line resistor must be installed to suit the
CE2831 control unit, typically 4K7.
Method of marking: Aluminium identification tag 1 AND 2 MAKE CONTACT ON

Overall size: 154 mm x 87 mm RISING PRESSURE (NORMALLY
OPEN)
1 AND 3 BREAK CONTACT ON
Mechanical installation (hose option): RISING PRESSURE (NORMALLY
CLOSED)
This unit should be connected to the 1/8 in. NPT female
outlet of the container valve via a 1/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP
adaptor, flexible pilot hose and a 1/4 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP FIGURE 3-53
adaptor into the switch. After fitting the containers, pipework, LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (ATEX) CONTACT
and discharge nozzles, fix the low pressure switch to the wall ARRANGEMENT
in close proximity to the container using the integral bracket 025034
in the following sequence:

1. Wrap PTFE on the 1/8 in. NPT taper thread of the 1/8 in.
The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP adaptor.
pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
2. Remove the 1/8 in. NPT plug from the container valve and with an appropriate control unit.
tighten the grub screw inside to stop the leak.
3. Remove the 1/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in. BSPP adaptor from the Maintenance instructions
pilot hose, screw into the container valve and tighten it. In case of faults or suspected faults contact customer
4. Using an Allen key, insert it through the adaptor and services to organise a replacement part.
unscrew the grub screw half a turn. Gas leaks from this
location. Make the connection to the pilot hose without
delay.
5. Leak check the fittings with leak detection spray.
6. Make certain that the correct plug is identified at the
container valve and that the correct tools are available to
carry out this work.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Part No. 305.207.001)
The fitting of a low pressure switch to the SAPPHIRE
container assembly is mandatory. The low pressure switch
is factory fitted and must be ordered separately. The device
continuously monitors the container pressure and in the event
of the pressure falling below 34 bar, the switch operates to
provide an electrical signal.
The operating pressure is factory set and no adjustments
may be carried out on-site.
The connection to the switch is 1/8 in. NPT male.
CABLE 1.0 m LONG
TINNED FOR 6 mm
25 mm
20 mm
LABEL
69 mm
19 mm
14.0 mm / 13.6 mm A/F HEX
11 mm
1/8 in. NPT

DIA 38 mm
DIA 43 mm
FIGURE 3-54
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (42 BAR)
025074
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
OW PRESSURE SWITCH (42 BAR SYSTEMS ONLY)

L
(Continued)
Technical specification Location on system

Body: Medium density polythene The low pressure switch is fitted opposite the outlet of the
Internals: Beryllium copper container valve assembly.
Ingress Protection Class: IP65
Seal material: Nitrile
switch installed. The low pressure switch is supplied with
Weight: 0.165 kg a connector and can be wired normally open or normally
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C closed. The terminals from the low pressure switch are not
Switch point: 34 bar falling at 20 °C polarity sensitive but require the addition of an end-of-line
Adjustment range: 5 to 60 bar resistor in series (typically 4K7) when connecting to the
Vendor switch point +/- 2.4 bar over working control unit.
tolerance: temperature
Factory tested switch point +/- 1.377 bar at 20 °C TABLE 3-26: LOW PRESSURE SWITCH TERMINALS
Tolerance:
Correct container Low container
Maximum working pressure: 47.8 bar Terminal pressure pressure
Proof pressure: 75 bar
Brown (red) Common Common
Electrical connection: Plug and socket
Maximum current: 5A Yellow Normally open Normally closed
Maximum voltage: 250 VAC Blue Normally closed Normally open
Mechanical life: 106 operations Green / yellow Earth Earth
Electrical life: 200,000 operations
Approvals: LPCB and VdS Operating instructions
Certification: EN 12094-10 The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2049 pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
2831-CPR-S2049 with an appropriate control unit.
Year of CE Marking: 2008 and 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark,14HT,
Serial No, 34 bar Fall, 5-60 bar In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
range, and CE0832 or CE2831 services to organise a replacement part.
label
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
EXPLOSION-PROOF LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (25 BAR)

(Part No. 453979)
The explosion-proof low pressure switch continuously
monitors the pressure of a container in a total flood fire
suppression system. The explosion-proof low pressure switch
fits opposite the outlet of the container valve assembly. If the
container pressure falls below 20 bar, the switch operates
though an electrical signal. Order the low pressure switch FIGURE 3-55
separate from the container. EXPLOSION-PROOF LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
E002096
Location on system Technical specification

The low pressure switch is fitted opposite the outlet of the Body: 316L stainless steel
Piston: Stainless steel with viton o-ring
Installation instructions Switch point: 20 bar (falling)
The container valve is supplied pre-assembled from ANSUL® Switch point tolerance: ± 2.75 bar
with the low pressure switch installed. The low pressure Set point: Factory set
switch is supplied with a connector and can be wired normally
open or normally closed. The terminals from the low pressure Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X
switch are not polarity sensitive but require the addition of an Mechanical life piston >106 operations
end-of-line resistor in series or parallel (typically 4K7) when design:
connecting to the control unit. Ingress Protection IP67
rating:
TABLE 3-27: WIRE DETAILS
Pressure connection: 1/8 in. NPT male
Wire Correct container Low container
color Switch pressure pressure Electrical connection: 1/2 in. NPT male
Red SW1 Normally open Normally closed Electrical rating: 5 A at 28 VDC maximum
White SW1 Common Common Temperature rating: -18 °C to 54 °C (UL)

(25 bar system)
Blue SW1 Normally closed Normally open
Green – Earth Earth
Certification: ATEX/IECEx Haz-loc:
Operating instructions II 2GD
Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb
The low pressure switch works within the pre-determined Ex tb IIIC T85°C/100°C Db
system operating conditions in conjunction with an appro- T5 or T6
priate control unit.
UL Haz-loc:
Maintenance instructions Class I Division 1 Groups A, B, C, and
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact ANSUL® D
customer services to organise a replacement part. Class II Division 1 Groups E, F, and G
T5 or T6
Overall size: Dia. 28.6 mm x 97.4 mm (L) excluding
wires
Weight: 0.25 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
EXPLOSION-PROOF LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (70 BAR)

(Part No. 453980)
The explosion-proof low pressure switch continuously
monitors the pressure of a container in a total flood fire
suppression system. The explosion-proof low pressure switch
fits opposite the outlet of the container valve assembly. If the
container pressure falls below 65 bar, the switch operates
though an electrical signal. Order the low pressure switch FIGURE 3-56
separate from the container. EXPLOSION-PROOF LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
E002096

The low pressure switch is fitted opposite the outlet of the Body: 316L stainless steel
Piston: Stainless steel with viton o-ring
Installation instructions Switch point: 65 bar (falling)
The container valve is supplied pre-assembled from ANSUL® Switch point tolerance: ± 2.75 bar
with the low pressure switch installed. The low pressure Set point: Factory set
switch is supplied with a connector and can be wired normally
open or normally closed. The terminals from the low pressure Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X
switch are not polarity sensitive but require the addition of an Mechanical life piston >106 operations
end-of-line resistor in series or parallel (typically 4K7) when design:
connecting to the control unit. Ingress Protection IP67
rating:
TABLE 3-28: WIRE DETAILS
Pressure connection: 1/8 in. NPT male
Wire Correct container Low container
color Switch pressure pressure Electrical connection: 1/2 in. NPT male
Red SW1 Normally open Normally closed Electrical rating: 5 A at 28 VDC maximum
White SW1 Common Common Temperature rating: -18° C to 65° C (UL)

(70 bar system)
Blue SW1 Normally closed Normally open
Green – Earth Earth
Certification: ATEX/IECEx Haz-loc:
Operating instructions II 2GD
The low pressure switch works within the pre-determined Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb
system operating conditions in conjunction with an appro- Ex tb IIIC T85°C/100°C Db
priate control unit. T5 or T6
UL Haz-loc:
lass I Division 1 Groups A, B, C,
C
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact ANSUL® and D
customer services to organise a replacement part.
Class II Division 1 Groups E, F, and
G T5 or T6
Overall size: Dia. 28.6 mm x 97.4 mm (L) excluding
wires
Weight: 0.25 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PNEUMATIC TRIP 86 mm
(Part No. 305.200.001)
The pneumatic trip is designed to pneumatically operate
fuel valves, self-closing doors, dampers, or to release drop
curtains. 79 mm
Drop curtains used to cover openings do not provide a gas

tight seal and where possible, a more positive sealing method
should be considered.
A standpipe adaptor (Part No. 304.001.004) is required to
provide a connection between the pneumatic trip and the
3/8 in. pipework from the system discharge pipework.
The pneumatic trip is designed to be used in the horizontal
plane only.
The net weight is 1.5 kg.
184 mm
FIGURE 3-57
PNEUMATIC TRIP
025036
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
• The discharge nozzles are available in a 180º and 360º • All nozzles with an orifice area less than 7 mm2, (equivalent
pattern and are designed to uniformly distribute Novec 1230 to a drill size of less than 3 mm), are required to have an
fluid throughout the hazard area. The aim of the nozzles is additional nozzle filter to protect the nozzle from blockage.
to be clearly indicated on the approved drawing. Order the nozzle filter separately.
• The 180º type has seven ports and the 360º type has • Where the size of any hazard enclosure determines that
sixteen ports. one nozzle does not provide coverage within the above
• Engineered nozzles are drilled with the specific design parameters the hazard should be theoretically sub-divided
requirement. See Tables 2-4 to 2-8. into appropriately sized modules.
• Tables 3-29 and 3-30 list the nozzle types and part • Where the system design requires a 360° nozzle greater
numbers. than 25 mm diameter, use 180° nozzles back-to-back.
When using the nozzles back-to-back, they should be
• Figures 3-59 and 3-60 indicate the maximum areas of placed 0.1 m to 0.6 m apart. Consult Technical Services for
coverage for each nozzle type. further details.
• The maximum coverage height for the nozzles is 5 m. • Nozzles are available in brass and stainless steel.
TABLE 3-29: NOZZLE TYPE AND PART NUMBERS (BSPT)

Nozzle type
BSPT thread Weight Weight
mm Brass kg Stainless steel kg
25 (180°) 310.207.205 0.84 310.207.305 0.79
25 (360°) 310.207.206 0.84 310.207.306 0.79
32 (180°) 310.207.207 1.19 310.207.307 1.11
40 (180°) 310.207.209 1.48 310.207.309 1.38
50 (180°) 310.207.211 2.55 310.207.311 2.41
TABLE 3-30: NOZZLE TYPE AND PART NUMBERS (NPT)

Nozzle type
NPT thread Weight Weight
mm Brass kg Stainless steel kg
25 (180°) 310.207.217 0.84 310.207.317 0.79
25 (360°) 310.207.218 0.84 310.207.318 0.79
32 (180°) 310.207.219 1.19 310.207.319 1.11
40 (180°) 310.207.221 1.48 310.207.321 1.38
50 (180°) 310.207.223 2.55 310.207.323 2.41
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE NOZZLES (Continued)

22.5º OFFSET
30º OFFSET
4 HOLES BETWEEN ROWS
BETWEEN ROWS
THIS ROW 8 HOLES
3 HOLES BOTH ROWS
60º TYP THIS ROW
45º TYP
DIM A DIM A
DIM B DIM B
7 PORT (180º) NOZZLE DETAILS 16 PORT (360º) NOZZLE DETAILS
FIGURE 3-58
NOZZLE DETAILS
025037
TABLE 3-31: NOZZLE DETAILS
Nozzle size (mm) 25 32 40 50

A (mm) 32.0 38.0 41.0 53.0
B (mm) 40.0 49.0 53.0 67.0
Length (mm) 52.0 63.1 68.0 89.0
Nozzle diameter (mm) 56.2 64.4 70.4 83.0
Diameter (knurl) (mm) 58.9 66.5 72.9 88.9
TABLE 3-32: MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DRILL SIZES FOR JENSEN HUGHES SOFTWARE (25 BAR SYSTEMS)

180º minimum drill size (mm) 4.6 6.0 7.0 8.9
180º maximum drill size (mm) 9.0 11.8 13.8 17.7
360º minimum drill size (mm) 3.0 – – –
360º maximum drill size (mm) 5.9 – – –
TABLE 3-33: MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DRILL SIZES FOR VdS SOFTWARE (25 AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS)
180º nozzle 180º nozzle 360º nozzle 360º nozzle
Nominal pipe minimum calcu- maximum calcu- minimum calcu- maximum calcu-
size Pipe ID lation drill size lation drill size lation drill size lation drill size
mm Schedule mm mm mm mm mm
25 40 26.64 4.6 9.0 3.0 5.9
32 40 35.08 6.0 11.8 – –
40 40 40.94 7.0 13.8 – –
50 40 52.48 8.9 17.7 – –
25 80 24.3 4.2 8.2 2.8 5.4

32 80 32.5 5.5 10.9 – –
40 80 38.14 6.5 12.8 – –
50 80 49.22 8.4 16.6 – –
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TABLE 3-34: MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DRILL SIZES FOR SCHEDULE 40 PIPE (70 BAR SYSTEMS)

TABLE 3-35: MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DRILL SIZES FOR SCHEDULE 80 PIPE (70 BAR SYSTEMS)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

The nozzles are located at the end of the discharge pipework. Material: Brass or stainless steel
Thread type: BSPT or NPT female
(NPT thread is denoted by
1. B
efore connection, ensure the pipework supports have
v-groove around knurling)
been fitted at the correct intervals and are adequate for
Sizes: 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, and
purpose.
50 mm
2. F
or connection to pipework, apply PTFE tape to the inlet Drilling increments: 0.1 mm
and tighten securely.
Nozzle types: 16 port 360° or 7 port 180°
3. E
nsure that the nozzle is fitted in accordance with Coverage radius: 6.9 m (16 port 360°)
the design requirements and are aimed in the correct
alignment away from obstructions or barriers that could 10.9 m (7 port 180°)
prevent adequate distribution or mixing of the agent. Protection height: 5m
Maximum distance from 300 mm
Operating instructions ceiling:
The discharge nozzles are designed to work within the Min./Max. distance from wall 50 mm to 300 mm
pre-determined system operating conditions. to centre of 180° nozzle:
Maximum coverage area per 96 m2
Maintenance instructions nozzle:
• The nozzles should be inspected for dust and debris every Minimum nozzle pressure: 5.5 bar (25 bar JENSEN
six months, and cleaned out where necessary. HUGHES)
• If any doubt exists concerning the integrity of the pipework, 7 bar (25 bar and 42 bar VdS
arrange for it to be purged. Remove the nozzles and the software)
nozzle filter mesh to check that they are free of debris 6.33 bar (70 bar SDC)
following the purge. Working temperature range: -20 ºC to 50 ºC (LPCB)
• In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer 25, 42, and 70 bar system
services to organise a replacement part. -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
25 bar system
70 bar system
10.9 m
Orientation: Pendant and upright
(SDC 70 bar software and
JENSEN HUGHES 25 bar
180º NOZZLE software)
or
VdS Approved nozzle
coefficients (VdS 25/42 bar
software)
Marking requirement: Manufacturer’s mark, part
number, serial number, and
6.9 m drill size in mm
Note: The area coverage detailed is valid for the system temperature range
-20 °C to 50 °C.
360º NOZZLE
FIGURE 3-59
STANDARD NOZZLE COVERAGE
025038
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

The discharge nozzles are located at the end of the discharge Material: Brass or stainless steel
pipework. Thread type: BSPT or NPT female
(NPT thread is denoted by
v-groove around knurling)
1. Before connection, ensure that the pipework supports have Sizes: 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, and
been fitted at the correct intervals and are adequate for 50 mm
purpose. Drilling increments: 0.1 mm
2. For connection to pipework, apply PTFE tape to the inlet Nozzle types: 16 port 360° or 7 port 180°
and tighten securely. Coverage radius: 9.1 m (16 port 360°)
3. Ensure that the nozzle is fitted in accordance with 15.0 m (7 port 180°)
the design requirements and are aimed in the correct Protection height: 5m
alignment away from obstructions or barriers that could
Maximum distance from 300 mm
prevent adequate distribution or mixing of the agent.
ceiling:
Operating instructions Min./Max. distance from wall 50 mm to 300 mm
to centre of 180° nozzle:
The discharge nozzles work within the pre-determined system
Maximum coverage area per 167.2 m2
operating conditions.
nozzle:
Maintenance instructions Minimum nozzle pressure: 5.5 bar (25 bar JENSEN
HUGHES)
• The nozzles should be inspected for dust and debris every
six months, and cleaned out where necessary. 7 bar (25 bar and 42 bar VdS
software)
• If any doubt exists concerning the integrity of the pipework,
arrange for it to be purged. Remove the nozzles and the 6.33 bar (70 bar SDC)
nozzle filter mesh to check that they are free of debris Working temperature range: 0 °C to 50 °C (LPCB)
following the purge. 25, 42, and 70 bar system
• In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer 0 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
services to organise a replacement part. 25 bar system
0 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM)
70 bar system
Orientation: Pendant and upright
15.0 m Approvals: UL and FM
(SDC 70 bar software and
JENSEN HUGHES 25 bar
software)
180º NOZZLE
or
VdS Approved nozzle coeffi-
cients (VdS 25/42 bar
software)
Marking requirement: Manufacturer’s mark, part
number, serial number, and
9.1 m drill size in mm
Note: The area coverage detailed is valid for the system temperature range of
0 °C to 50 °C.
360º NOZZLE
FIGURE 3-60
EXTENDED NOZZLE COVERAGE
025038
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTAINER BRACKETS
The bracket assembly consists of a nut and bolt with two
bracket straps and a 41 mm x 41 mm back channel, to
securely hold the container in position. Each container
requires two bracket assemblies.
Each strap is notched for insertion into the back channel
allowing for the correct alignment of the container. The
bracket assembly mounts to a rigid vertical surface with
the container assembly resting fully on the floor. Container
bracket assemblies are available for single containers (Part
No. 311700002 to 311700006) and for multi-containers (Part
No. 311700007 to 311700012). Each installation requires
two sets of bracket assemblies. The following table lists the
mounting bracket details.
Material: Stainless steel 316 FIGURE 3-61
CONTAINER BRACKET
E000928
TABLE 3-36: CONTAINER BRACKET DETAILS

Container Container Channel
size Container diameter length Weight
Part No. Description L type mm mm kg
311700002 Container bracket assembly 15 Seamless 204 400 1.67
311700003 Container bracket assembly 30 Seamless 229 400 1.72
311700004 Container bracket assembly 34, 45, 60, 80 Seamless 267 400 1.78
311700005 Container bracket assembly 120, 150 Seamless 360 600 2.43
311700006 Container bracket assembly 120, 140, 180 Seamless 406 600 2.50
52, 106, 147, Welded 406 600 2.50
180
311700013 Container bracket assembly 4.5 Welded 178 400 1.47
311700014 Container bracket assembly 8, 16, 32 Welded 254 400 1.63
311700007 Multi-container bracket assembly 120, 150 Seamless 360 1200 9.62
with back channel x 4 containers
311700010 Multi-container bracket assembly 120, 140, 180 Seamless 406 1200 9.85
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE HOSES FOR 25 AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS

1 in. NPT FIXED MALE
25 mm discharge hose
(Part No. 306.207.002)
SAPPHIRE agent container installations may be connected
to the system with a flexible discharge hose. This enables
containers to disconnect for maintenance or recharge without
dismantling other container mountings, manifold connections,
and pipework. The flexible discharge hose has a swivel fitting
at the inlet and an o-ring fitted to the sealing face. 405 mm
Hose construction: Single steel wire braided oil
resistant seamless synthetic
rubber core to DIN EN 853 1SN
Connection: Zinc passivated mild steel
1 in. NPT straight fixed male
1 in. BSPP 90° female swivel
union with o-ring
O-ring: 21.95 mm x 1.78 mm 92 mm 1 in. BSP
SWIVEL NUT
chromium-free)
Internal hose inner 25.4 mm
FIGURE 3-62
diameter:
25 mm FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE HOSE
Connection inner diameter: 19.5 mm E000857
Maximum working 49 bar (According to EN

pressure: 12094-8) Location on system
Test pressure: 88 bar The 25 mm discharge hose is connected between the
Minimum burst pressure: 350 bar container valve outlet and the adjustable height adaptor
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) (where used) or manifold check valve.
range: -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM)
Installation Instructions
Maximum bend radius: 300 mm
Maximum bend angle: 15° 1. Ensure the container and the manifold complete with
check valves are bracketed securely and aligned before
Equivalent length: 3.14 m
connecting the hoses, or adjustable height adaptors and
Weight: 1.25 kg
hoses.
Hose type: Type 1
2. Fit the hose outlet to the check valve or adjustable height
adaptor and check valve mounted in the manifold. Securely
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM tighten using appropriate tools ensuring the correct
Certification: EN 12094-8 alignment for the connection of the hose inlet to the outlet
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2040 or of the container valve.
2831-CPR-S2040
3. Fit the inlet of the hose to the container valve outlet. Once
Year of CE marking: 2008 and 2021 alignment is confirmed, securely tighten using the appro-
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No., priate tools.
Batch No., WP-49bar, hose
type 1, and CE0832 or CE2831 Operating instructions
Part number marked on 306.207.002 The flexible discharge hose is a pressure connector and
component: requires no operating instructions.
Method of marking: Laser
The flexible discharge hose should be replaced after five
years. In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE HOSES FOR 25 AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS

(Continued)
50 mm discharge hose 2 in. NPT FIXED MALE

(Part No. 306.207.003)
at the inlet and an o-ring fitted to the sealing face.
520 mm
Hose construction: Twin steel wire braided oil
rubber core to DIN EN 853
2SN
union with o-ring
O-ring: 47.35 mm x 1.78 mm
chromium-free)
Internal hose inner 50.8 mm
diameter: 2 in. BSP FEMALE
125 mm SWIVEL NUT
Maximum working 49 bar (according to EN FIGURE 3-63
pressure: 12094-8) 50 mm FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE HOSE
E000858
Minimum burst pressure: 320 bar Location on system
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) The 50 mm discharge hose is connected between the
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) container valve outlet and the adjustable height adaptor
Maximum bend radius: 630 mm (where used) or manifold check valve.
Maximum bend angle: 15°
Equivalent length: 5.36 m Installation instructions
Weight: 3.9 kg 1. Ensure the container and the manifold complete with
Hose type: Type 1 check valves are bracketed securely and aligned before
Overall size: 125 mm x 520 mm connecting the hoses or adjustable height adaptors and
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM hoses.
Certification: EN 12094-8 2. Fit the hose outlet to the check valve or adjustable height
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2040 or adaptor and check valve mounted in the manifold. Securely
2831-CPR-S2040 tighten using appropriate tools ensuring the correct
Year of CE marking: 2008 and 2021 alignment for the connection of the hose inlet to the outlet
of the container valve.
Batch No, WP-49 bar, Hose 3. Fit the inlet of the hose to the container valve outlet. Once
Type 1, and CE0832 or CE2831 alignment is confirmed, securely tighten using the appro-
Part number marked on 306.207.003 priate tools.
component:
The flexible discharge hose is a pressure connector and
requires no operating instructions.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE HOSES FOR 70 BAR SYSTEMS
(Part No. 306700001)
at the inlet and an o-ring fitted to the sealing face. 405 mm
Hose construction: Twin steel wire braided oil
rubber core to EN853 2SN
union with o-ring
Plating specification: ZINKLAD 1000 plating
81.5 mm
(Hexavalent Chromium-Free)
Hose inner diameter: 25.4 mm FIGURE 3-64
O-ring: 21.92 mm x 1.78 mm 25 mm FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE HOSE
Connection inner diameter: 19.5 mm E000857
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar (according to EN Location on system

12094-8)
Maximum system pressure: 102.3 bar The 25 mm discharge hose is connected between the
container valve outlet and the adjustable height adaptor
(where used) or manifold check valve.
Minimum burst pressure: 660 bar
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) Installation instructions
1. Ensure the container and the manifold complete with
Minimum bend radius: 300 mm check valves are bracketed securely and aligned before
Maximum bend angle: 34° connecting the hoses or adjustable height adaptors and
Equivalent length: 3.81 m hoses.
Weight: 1.34 kg 2. Fit the hose outlet to the check valve or adjustable height
Hose type: Type 1 adaptor and check valve mounted in the manifold. Securely
Overall size: 102 mm x 429 mm tighten using the appropriate tools ensuring the correct
Centre dimensions: 405 mm ± 5 mm alignment for the connection of the hose inlet to the outlet
81.5 mm ± 1.5 mm of the container valve.
Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM 3. Fit the inlet of the hose to the container valve outlet. Once
Certification: EN 12094-8 alignment is confirmed, securely tighten using the appro-
CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0071 priate tools.
2831-CPR-S0071
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, part The flexible discharge hose is a pressure connector and
number, batch number, requires no operating instructions.
WP-120 bar, hose type 1,
CE0832
Part number marked on 306700001 The flexible discharge hose should be replaced after five
component: years. In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
Method of marking: Laser services to organise a replacement part.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DISCHARGE HOSES FOR 70 BAR SYSTEMS (Continued)
(Part No. 306700002)
at the inlet and an o-ring fitted to the sealing face.
520 mm
Hose construction: our steel wire braided oil
F
rubber core to EN856 4SH
union with o-ring
Plating specification: ZINKLAD 1000 plating
(Hexavalent Chromium-Free)
Hose inner diameter: 51 mm
O-ring: 47.35 mm x 1.78 mm
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar according to EN
12094-8 144.2 mm
Maximum system pressure: 102.3 bar

FIGURE 3-65
Test pressure: 240 bar 50 mm FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE HOSE
Minimum burst pressure: 1000 bar E000858
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB)

Location on system
Minimum bend radius: 315 mm The 50 mm discharge hose is connected between the
Maximum bend angle: 38° container valve outlet and the adjustable height adaptor
(where used) or manifold check valve.
Equivalent length: 4.56 m
Weight: 6.0 kg Installation instructions
Hose type: Type 1
1. Ensure the container and the manifold complete with
Overall Size: 160 mm x 560 mm check valves are bracketed securely and aligned before
Centre dimensions: 520 mm ± 5 mm connecting the hoses or adjustable height adaptors and
144.2 mm ± 1.5 mm hoses.
Approvals and listings: LPCB, UL, and FM 2. Fit the hose outlet to the check valve or adjustable height
Certification: EN 12094-8 adaptor and check valve mounted in the manifold. Securely
CE certification number: 0832-CPR-S0071 tighten using the appropriate tools ensuring the correct
2831-CPR-S0071 alignment for the connection of the hose inlet to the outlet
Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021 of the container valve.
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, part 3. Fit the inlet of the hose to the container valve outlet. Once
number, batch number, alignment is confirmed, securely tighten using the appro-
WP-120 bar, hose type 1, priate tools.
CE0832
Part number marked on 306700002 Operating instructions
component: The flexible discharge hose is a pressure connector and
Method of marking: Laser requires no operating instructions.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT ADAPTORS

(Part No. 306700003 and 306700004)
TABLE 3-37: ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT ADAPTOR DETAILS
All manifolded systems have the option of using the adjustable
height adaptor to provide a height adjustment functionality Part No. Description
due to possible variations in seamless container heights. The 306700003 25 mm hose adjustable height adaptor
adaptor is installed between the hose outlet and manifold check 306700004 50 mm hose adjustable height adaptor
inlet and allows a maximum height adjustment of 35 mm.
Note: The adjustable height adaptor is an optional item.
DIA 65 mm 50mm Adjustable Height Adaptor

1 in. NPT
FIXED MALE DIA 100 mm
2 in. NPT
FIXED MALE
152 mm
168 mm
1 in. NPT FIXED

FEMALE
2 in. NPT FIXED

FEMALE
Specification: Body, Union Nut: Steel F211 AISI/SAE 1213
FIGURE 3-66
Movable Tube:
Seal Material: FIGURE 3-67
Steel F112 AISI/SAE 1020
NBR Y9
25 mm ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT ADAPTOR 50 mm ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT ADAPTOR

Plating Specification:
Connections:
ZinkladTM 1000 (Hexavalent Chromium-Free)
Inlet 2”NPT Female, Outlet 2”NPT Male
025837 Nominal Working Pressure: 25bar, 42bar & 70bar @ 20°C 025838
Max Working Pressure: 120bar
Test Pressure: 180bar
Working Temperature Range: Various (see system operating conditions)
Technical specification Weight: 4.94kg
Approvals: LPCB, UL, FM
Certification: EN12094-8
Adjustable height adaptor size: 25 mm 50 mm
CE Certification No:
CE Body Certification No:
0832-CPR-S0071
0832
Body, unionMethod
nut:of Marking:
Connector Type:
Steel
Laser F211 AISI/SAE 1213
Type 5
Steel F211 AISI/SAE 1213
Year of CE Marking:
CE Marking Requirements:
2018
Mfr. Mark, Part No, Batch No, CE0832, WP, Size
Movable tube: Steel F112 AISI/SAE 1020 Steel F112 AISI/SAE 1020
Seal material: NBR Y9 NBR Y9
Plating specification: ZINKLAD 1000 (Hexavalent chromium-free) ZINKLAD 1000 (Hexavalent chromium-free)
Connections: Inlet 1 in. NPT female, outlet 1 in. NPT male Inlet 2 in. NPT female, outlet 2 in. NPT male
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar 120 bar
Test pressure: 180 bar 180 bar
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42, and 70 bar -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB) 25, 42 and 70 bar
system system
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25 bar system -18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) 25 bar system
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70 bar system -18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) 70 bar system
Equivalent length: 0.44 m 0.96 m
Installation information: 55 mm and 39 mm A/F 65 mm and 90 mm A/F
Approvals: LPCB, UL, and FM LPCB, UL, and FM
Certification: EN12094-8 EN12094-8
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPR-S0071 or 2831-CPR-S0071 0832-CPR-S0071 or 2831-CPR-S0071
CE body Certification No.: 0832 or 2831 0832 or 2831
Year of CE marking: 2018 and 2021 2018 and 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No., Batch No., Manufacturer’s mark, Part No., Batch No.,
WP, Size, Connector type, and CE0832 or WP, Size, Connector type, and CE0832 or
CE2831 CE2831
Part number marked on 306700003 306700004
component:
Method of marking: Laser Laser
Connector type: Type 5 Type 5
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD CHECK VALVES
25 mm manifold check valve

(Part No. 302.209.004)
The check valve prevents loss of suppression agent
discharge from an outlet, should a container be removed. The
check valve is installed between the flexible discharge hose
73
73 mm
and the manifold or the adjustable height adaptor and the
manifold, where utilised. Manifold check valves are available
in two sizes; 25 mm and 50 mm.
Stem: Stainless steel 61
60 mm
Spring: Stainless steel
Top plate: Stainless steel FIGURE 3-68
Bottom plate: Brass CW614N (CZ121) 25 mm MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE
025043
Inlet connection: 1 in. NPT female Location on system
Outlet connection: 1 1/2 in. NPT male
The manifold check valve is connected between the flexible
Maximum working 120 bar discharge hose or adjustable height adaptor and the manifold.
pressure:
Test pressure: 180 bar Installation instructions
1. Remove the plastic protection cap and apply PTFE tape to
range: 25, 42, and 70 bar system
male threads.
25 bar system 2. Fit check valve to manifold port and tighten securely using
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) the appropriate tools.
70 bar system
Cross sectional area: 320 mm²
Equivalent length: 0.40 m The manifold check valve automatically opens on system
Weight: 0.63 kg discharge and closes at end of discharge. It requires no
operating instructions.
Overall size: 73 mm (L) x 60 mm (W)
Method of marking: Engraving or laser Maintenance instructions
The stem assembly that houses the seal disc should be
replaced after 10 years of service. In case of faults or
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2041 suspected faults, contact customer services to organise a
0832-CPR-S0070 replacement part.
2831-CPR-S0070
component:
DN25, WP-120 bar, Vertical,
, Serial No., and CE0832 or
CE2831
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD CHECK VALVES (Continued)
50 mm manifold check valve

(Part No. 302.209.005)
The check valve prevents loss of suppression agent
discharge from an outlet should a container be removed. The
check valve is installed between the flexible discharge hose
96 mm
73
and the manifold or the adjustable height adaptor and the
manifold where utilised. Manifold check valves are available
in two sizes; 25 mm and 50 mm.
Stem: Stainless steel
Spring: Stainless steel
61
94 mm
Top plate: Stainless steel

FIGURE 3-69
Bottom plate: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
50 mm MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE
Seal material: Nitrile 025043
Inlet connection: 2 in. NPT female

Outlet connection: 2 1/2 in. NPT male Location on system
Maximum working 120 bar The manifold check valve connects between the flexible
pressure: discharge hose or adjustable height adaptor and the manifold.
range: 25, 42, and 70 bar system 1. Remove the plastic protection cap and apply PTFE tape to
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) the male threads.
25 bar system 2. Fit the check valve to the manifold port and tighten
-18 °C to 50 °C (UL and FM) securely using the appropriate tools.
70 bar system
Cross sectional area: 1400 mm² Operating instructions
Equivalent length: 6.66 m The manifold check valve automatically opens on system
Weight: 1.6 kg discharge and closes at the end of discharge. It requires no
Overall size: 96 mm (L) x 94 mm (W) operating instructions.
Method of marking: Engraving or laser
Approvals: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM Maintenance instructions
Certification: EN 12094-13 The stem assembly that houses the seal disc should be
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2041, 0832-CPR- replaced after 10 years in service. In case of faults or
S0070, or 2831-CPR-S0070 suspected faults, contact customer services to organise a
Year of CE marking: 2008, 2018, and 2021 replacement part.
component:
DN50, WP-120 bar, Vertical,
, Serial No., and CE0832 or
CE2831
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLDS
Manifolds are assembled from screwed pipe and fittings or OVERALL LENGTH
are a welded construction. They enable multiple containers to
connect to a common pipe network reducing the amount of INLET TO END CAP DISTANCE
piping required by utilising a single pipe run. They may also INLET TO INLET DISTANCE
be used in systems where main or reserve container arrange-
ments are required. Table 3-42 lists the manifold part details.
The following list specifies the manifolding requirements:
•U
se Schedule 80 black iron, galvanised, chrome-plated, or
stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, or A106. All FIGURE 3-70
fittings must be a minimum Class 3000, malleable or ductile TYPICAL MANIFOLD SYSTEM
E000933
iron.
• After welding, make certain all inlet holes in the pipe are TABLE 3-38: MANIFOLD REDUCING BUSH DETAILS
clean of any weld spatter and are completely open.
• Pipe unions are acceptable.
309.008.040 2.5 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush
• Reducing bushings and reducing fittings is allowed when galvanised 3000 lb
reducing pipe size.
309.008.033 3 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush
• Cast iron pipe and fittings are not acceptable. galvanised 3000 lb
• PTFE (TEFLON*) tape is the only acceptable pipe sealant 309.008.034 4 in. NPT x 1/2 in. NPT reducing bush
and must be applied to male threads only. galvanised 3000 lb
• Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening, as this could 309.008.041 2.5 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush
cause possible blockage of the agent. Thread sealant or galvanised 3000 lb
compound must not be used.
309.008.035 3 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush
• Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all galvanised 3000 lb
ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips, debris,
309.008.036 4 in. NPT x 1/2 in. BSPT reducing bush
and scale. The inside of the pipe and fittings must be free of
galvanised 3000 lb
oil and dirt.
•N
PT sockets (see Table 3-39) in conjunction with manifold TABLE 3-39: NPT SOCKETS FOR MANIFOLD ENDS
reducing bushings (see Table 3-38) can be utilised for
connecting to the discharge pressure switch. Alternatively,
manifold blind caps (see Table 3-41) or a combination of 309.001.010 2 1/2 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb
sockets / reducing bushings and plugs (see Table 3-40) can 309.001.011 3 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb
be used to close the manifold end.
309.010.012 4 in. NPT socket galvanised 3000 lb
•A
ssemblies do not include check valves and end caps.
Flanges are only available on 6 in. manifolds. Table 3-39
For selector valve systems, additional discharge pressure
lists the NPT sockets available for closing manifold ends.
switches can be installed downstream of each selector valve
•N
PT × NPT union adaptors should be utilised where for confirmation of the correct direction of the suppressant.
screwed manifold sections are required to be joined. Table 3-40 lists the manifold reducing bushing plug details.
Note: A
ll check valves, unions, blind caps, sockets, reducing bushings and Table 3-41 lists manifold blind cap details.
plugs must be ordered separately.
TABLE 3-40: MANIFOLD REDUCING BUSHING PLUGS
Material: ASTM A53 or ASTM A106 Grade B 309.007.003 1/2 in. NPT plug galvanised 3000 lb
Inlet: NPT
309.007.013 1/2 in. BSPT plug galvanised 3000 lb
Outlet: NPT - 6
5 mm, 80 mm, and 100 mm
manifolds
TABLE 3-41: MANIFOLD BLIND CAPS
Flanged - 150 mm manifolds
Maximum working 120 bar (welded manifolds) Part No. Description
pressure: 50 bar (flanged manifolds) 35009006 2 1/2 in. NPT blind cap
Test pressure: 180 bar (welded manifolds) 35009007 3 in. NPT blind cap
75 bar (flanged manifolds)
35009008 4 in. NPT blind cap
Finish: Primed and ready to paint on-site
*TEFLON is a trademark of Chemours Chemical Corporation.

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLDS (Continued)
TABLE 3-42: MANIFOLDS

Nominal Inlet to Inlet to Inlet to end
manifold end cap inlet connection Container Overall
pipe size distance distance distance size length Weight
No. of End thread
Part No. inlets mm mm mm mm L mm connection kg
307.209.001 2 65 145 350 145 4.5 to 45 640 2 1/2 in. NPT 8.06
307.209.002 3 65 145 350 145 4.5 to 45 990 2 1/2 in. NPT 12.44
307.209.003 4 65 145 350 145 4.5 to 45 1340 2 1/2 in. NPT 19.79
307700004 2 80 216 500 216 52 to 180 932 3 in. NPT 12.57
307700005 3 80 216 500 216 52 to 180 1432 3 in. NPT 19.20
307700006 4 80 216 500 216 52 to 180 1932 3 in. NPT 25.84
307700007 5 80 216 500 216 52 to 180 2432 3 in. NPT 32.47
307700008 6 80 216 500 216 52 to 180 2932 3 in. NPT 39.10
307700009 2 100 216 500 216 52 to 180 932 4 in. NPT 21.85
307700010 3 100 216 500 216 52 to 180 1432 4 in. NPT 33.55
307700011 4 100 216 500 216 52 to 180 1932 4 in. NPT 45.24
307700012 5 100 216 500 216 52 to 180 2432 4 in. NPT 56.93
307700013 6 100 216 500 216 52 to 180 2932 4 in. NPT 68.62
307209050 3 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 1400 6 in. flange 85.0
307209051 4 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 1900 6 in. flange 136.8
307209052 5 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 2400 6 in. flange 160.4
307209053 6 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 2900 6 in. flange 184.0
307209054 7 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 3400 6 in. flange 207.5
307209055 8 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 3900 6 in. flange 231.1
307209056 9 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 4400 6 in. flange 282.9
307209057 10 150 200 500 200 52 to 180 4900 6 in. flange 278.3
For ease of assembly, flanged manifolds are available for

150 mm diameter. 150 mm flanged manifolds with either
three or four ports are supplied as a one piece assembly.
Manifolds with five to ten ports are made up from smaller
sections due to the size and weight. See the following list for
details:
• 5 port manifold - 2 port + 3 port
• 6 port manifold - 3 port x 2
• 9 port manifold - 3 port x 3
• 10 port manifold - 4 port + 3 port x 2
All 150 mm flanged manifolds include an end cap.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD INLET SOCKET

For some markets, manifold inlets are available for the
construction of system manifolds. Refer to the local price list
for availability. Table 3-43 lists manifold inlet part details.
OVERALL OVERALL HEIGHT
Technical specification DIAMETER
Material: Carbon steel per

ASTM A105 / ASTM A350 LF2
Dimensions: ANSI B16.11 / BS3799 THREAD CONNECTION
Pressure rating: 1361 kg

FIGURE 3-71
MANIFOLD INLET SOCKET
E000904
TABLE 3-43: MANIFOLD INLET PART DETAILS

Manifold pipe Overall Overall
size Container size diameter Thread height Weight
Part No. mm L mm connection mm kg
17036 65 15, 30, 34, and 45 (seamless) 75 1 1/2 in. NPT 44 0.71
4.5, 8, 16 and 32 (welded)
17037 80 60, 80, 120, 140, 150, and 180 100 2 1/2 in. NPT 63 1.20
(seamless)
52, 106, 147, and 180 (welded)
17038 100 60, 80, 120, 140, 150, and 180 100 2 1/2 in. NPT 63 1.52
(seamless)
52, 106, 147, and 180 (welded)
17467 150 60, 80, 120, 140, 150, and 180 100 2 1/2 in. NPT 63 1.54
(seamless)
52, 106, 147, and 180 (welded)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVE MANIFOLD

MANIFOLD END CAP
Selector valve manifolds enable the fitting of selector valves
to container banks. Two to six ports and 1 in. to 4 in. sizes SELECTOR VALVE
MANIFOLD BLIND
allow the connection of all selector valve types. They are CAP
supplied with a matt black painted finish (synthetic enamel).
The manifolds are manufactured from schedule 80 pipe OUTLET NIPPLES
FITTED HERE
and pressure tested to 250 bar. All connections are NPT. A
plugged port is included for connection to the pressure relief
system (manifold burst disc assembly and vent valve). A
3000 lb threaded cap is also included to blank off one end
of the manifold. The manifold part numbers include outlet
nipples required for connection to the selector valves. Specify
this at the point of order.
Material: Steel Schedule 80
350 mm
Specification: ASTM A106 GR. B
Finish: Painted, black (RAL 9005)
Pressure relief valve port: G 1/2 in. FIGURE 3-72
Pipe connections: NPT thread SELECTOR VALVE MANIFOLD (2 PORT EXAMPLE)
025779
Supplied length: 800 mm - 2 port
1150 mm - 3 port
1500 mm - 4 port
1850 mm - 5 port
2200 mm - 6 port
Note: W
here more than six ports are required, contact ANSUL® Technical
Services.
TABLE 3-44: SELECTOR VALVE MANIFOLD PART

NUMBERS
Manifold size
mm 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port
65 36266000 36366600 36466660 36566666 36666666
80 36277000 36377700 36477770 36577777 36677777
100 36288000 36388800 36488880 36588888 36688888
TABLE 3-45: SELECTOR VALVE MANIFOLD OUTLET

NIPPLE PART NUMBERS
Outlet nipple size
mm Part No.
25 31280619
40 31280611
50 31280616
65 31280612
80 31280617
100 31280618
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD DROP SECTIONS

Manifold drop sections aid the connection of the selector
valve manifold to the main system manifold where sufficient
ceiling height is not available. The drop sections give a drop
of 900 mm or 1500 mm from pipe centres and all have NPT
connections. They are supplied with a matt black painted
finish (synthetic enamel).
Material: Steel Schedule 80
Specification: ASTM A106 GR. B
Finish: Painted black (RAL 9005)
Connections: NPT thread
900 mm OR 1500 mm
CENTRE TO CENTRE
FIGURE 3-73
MANIFOLD DROP SECTION
025780
TABLE 3-46: MANIFOLD DROP SECTION PART

NUMBERS
Drop section size 900 mm centres 1500 mm centres Width (Dimension A)
65 mm 19263006 19263014 464 mm
80 mm 19263007 19263015 518 mm
100 mm 19263008 19263016 620 mm
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD UNION ADAPTORS

Manifold union adaptors connect threaded manifolds and/or
threaded selector valves to the system pipework. Manifold
union adaptors are available in NPT x NPT and NPT x BSPT
thread types. See the following table for connector sizes.
Material: Zinc plated steel (nut)
Nitrile (o-ring)
Marking requirements: Part number, nominal size,
flow direction and serial FIGURE 3-74
number MANIFOLD UNION ADAPTOR
E000905
TABLE 3-47: MANIFOLD UNION ADAPTORS

Connector
size NPT to NPT NPT to BSPT Weight
mm (Female) (Female) kg
25 30888002 30888028 0.8
40 30888004 30888030 1.5
50 30888005 30888031 3.0
65 30888006 30888032* 4.1
80 30888007 30888033 5.8
100 30888008 30888034 8.3
Note: *Special orders only.
Spare o-rings
Spare o-rings are available for the union adaptors, should
they become lost or damaged.
TABLE 3-48: SPARE O-RINGS

Connector size
mm (in.) Part No.
25 (1) 22000524
40 (1 1/2) 22000527
50 (2) 22000528
65 (2 1/2) 22000529
80 (3) 22000530
100 (4) 22000531
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD BRACKET ASSEMBLIES

(Part No. 311.205.015, 311.205.010, 311.205.011, and
311700001)
A manifold bracket assembly consists of two lengths of
channel mounted vertically on a wall or bulk head to enable
height adjustment of the manifold assembly. Cantilever
brackets are fastened to the channel and are held in position
using a uninut long spring, washer, and hex head screw.
Manifold brackets slot into the cantilever and are clamped
using a hex head screw and plain nut. Each manifold bracket
assembly is supplied in pairs. Where double manifold
brackets are required, installers should construct to local
requirements taking into account the manifold weight and wall
specifications.
FIGURE 3-75
MANIFOLD BRACKET
E000906
Part No.: 311.205.015 311.205.010 311.205.011 311700001

Manifold bracket size: 65 mm 80 mm 100 mm 150 mm
Channel length: 400 mm 500 mm 500 mm 500 mm
Cantilever arm length: 150 mm 300 mm 300 mm 300 mm
Weight per bracket: 2.4 kg 2.5 kg 2.6 kg 2.7 kg
TABLE 3-49: MANIFOLD BRACKET MOUNTING HEIGHTS

(SEAMLESS CONTAINERS)
Manifold bracket Manifold bracket height
Nominal volume height without AHA with AHA
Container type L mm mm
Seamless containers
TPED or DOT/TPED 15 1151 1308
PESO 34 1321 1478
PESO 80 2372 2544
PESO 120 (356 mm Dia) 2172 2344
PESO 150 2532 2704
PESO 120 (406 mm Dia) 1897 2069
PESO 140 2072 2244
PESO 180 2417 2589
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLD BRACKET ASSEMBLIES (Continued)
TABLE 3-50: MANIFOLD BRACKET MOUNTING HEIGHTS

(WELDED CONTAINERS)
Nominal height
Container Valve Manifold from floor to top of
size size size cantilever
L mm mm mm
4.5 25 65 727
8 25 65 750
16 25 65 949
32 25 65 1289
52 50 80 1133
106 50 80 1601
106 50 100 1061
147 50 80 1931
147 50 100 1931
147 50 150 1931
180 50 100 2210
180 50 150 2210

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (25 BAR AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS)

(Part No. 308.209.101 to 308.209.111)
The distribution valves enable one bank of containers
to distribute the stored Novec 1230 fluid to a number of Construction: Full bore
separate risk areas. When using a valve in the pipe line Ends: Screwed / flanged
consideration must be given to the safe release of gas that Body: CF8M, WCB / DIN 1.4408, 1.0619
may be trapped in the manifold. This is accomplished with a Ball and stem: Stainless steel
pressure relief valve. The distribution valves can be closed Seats: Reinforced TEFLON
manually by using a spanner.
Actuator: Cast iron
All the distribution valves are equipped with double acting Body: Stainless steel
pneumatic actuators, and supplied with a 300 bar pressure Maximum pressure: 69 bar (threaded valves)
regulator set at 7 bar. 49 bar (flanged valve - Part No.
The 150 mm distribution valve is suitable only for 25 bar 308.209.106)
systems, all other sizes are 25 bar and 42 bar compatible. Working Temperature -20 °C to 50 °C
range:
Approvals: VdS
A 117 mm D
FIGURE 3-76
SELECTOR VALVE
025241
TABLE 3-51: SELECTOR VALVES
Valve size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D
Part No. mm Outlet mm mm mm mm
308.209.101 40 NPT 215 209 119 132
308.209.102 50 NPT 215 216 131.4 132
308.209.103 65 NPT 215 240 164 132
308.209.104 80 NPT 215 250 182.5 132
308.209.105 100 NPT 254 302 235.5 167
308.209.106 150 * Flanged 342 573 350 232
308.209.107 40 BSPT 215 209 119 132
308.209.108 50 BSPT 215 216 131.4 132
308.209.109 65 BSPT 215 240 164 132
308.209.110 80 BSPT 215 250 182.5 132
308.209.111 100 BSPT 254 302 235.5 167
Note: * The 150 mm distribution valve is suitable only for 25 bar systems.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (25 BAR AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS, Reset instructions

Continued) There are two methods for re-setting a distribution valve.
The first method uses pneumatic pressure. For the second
method, use a spanner to re-set the actuator.
Install the selector valve onto the manifold system at a
Method 1
location after the branch to each risk area. Ensure that the
selector valve is fully supported before continuing to connect This method uses pressure from a pneumatic source (min.
the remainder of the manifold system. 2 bar/max. 300 bar) to rotate the actuator back to the set
position.
Connect the actuation line copper nickel pipework to the
selector valve regulator through the 1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm stud 1. Disconnect the regulator from the actuator. Remove the
coupling. adaptor and silencer.
2. Replace the adaptor into the silencer port and tighten.
Commissioning instructions
3. Replace the regulator to the adaptor and tighten.
Leak and function test the selector valve after it has been
installed. Ensure that the selector valve is closed. 4. Connect the regulator to the pneumatic source and
tighten the fittings.
Operating instructions 5. Apply pressure to the regulator. The top of the actuator
The distribution valve may be operated either through should rotate to the set position. The following figure
pressure from the actuation line or by direct mechanical shows the closed (set) position.
manual operation. A minimum pressure of 7 bar is required to 6. Shut off the pneumatic pressure.
correctly operate the selector valve when the actuation line is
7. Disconnect the pneumatic source.
used.
8. Disconnect the regulator from the actuator. Remove the
Maintenance instructions adaptor.
In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer 9. Replace the adaptor and silencer into the correct ports
services to organise a replacement part. and tighten.
10. Replace the regulator to the adaptor and tighten.
Method 2
This method uses a spanner to rotate the actuator back to the
set position.
1. Disconnect the regulator from the actuator.
2. Remove the position indicator.
3. Using the appropriate spanner, rotate the actuator 90° to
the set position. The following figure shows the valve in
the open and closed (set) position.
4. Refit the solenoid and tighten all fittings.
INDICATOR IN OPEN POSITION INDICATOR IN CLOSED POSITION
FIGURE 3-77
OPEN AND CLOSED POSITION (TOP VIEW)
025052
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM (PILOT CONTAINER

ARRANGEMENT FOR 25 BAR AND 42 BAR SYSTEMS)
The arrangement shown in the following figure details a
typical selector valve system when using pilot containers.
The selector valves are operated by pilot pressure, as is the
master container of the required system.
The vent valve in the standard by-pass arrangement
assembly is used to allow Novec 1230 fluid to be safely
vented to the atmosphere if it becomes trapped in a closed
pipework section.
PRESSURE SWITCH BLEED VALVE

(CONNECTED USING
TO RISK DISTRIBUTION VALVE 1/4 in.NPT X 6 mm STUD
AREA A COUPLING)
TO RISK NON-RETURN
AREA B CHECK VALVE
1/2 in. PIPEWORK

MANIFOLD
VENT
VALVE
RELIEF VALVE 6 mm PIPE

STANDARD NOZZLE PILOT CONTAINER
USED TO VENT (FOR RISK AREA A)
DISCHARGE
EXCESS GAS TO PNEUMATIC
HOSE AND
ATMOSPHERE ACTUATOR
CHECK VALVE
PILOT CONTAINER
(FOR RISK AREA B)
COMPONENTS ORIENTED FOR CLARITY
FIGURE 3-78
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM
TABLE 3-52: COMPONENTS (PILOT CONTAINER ARRANGEMENT)
E001895
Component Part No.
Discharge nozzle Example (Various)
Relief valve 302.209.021
Vent valve 302700014
Bleed valve 302.200.076
1/4 in. NPT x 6 mm stud coupling 30880061
Non-return valve Example (Various)
Manifold assembly Example (Various)
Selector valve Example (Various)
Pressure switch 305.209.009
Pneumatic actuator 304.209.004
Pilot container Example (Various)
Electrical actuator (bridge rectifier) 304.209.001
Manual actuator 304.209.002
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (70 BAR SYSTEMS)

The selector valve is used in applications where multiple
areas require protection from a single bank of containers. The
valves are pneumatically operated by a pilot container that
provides the pressure to open the valve.
The pressure enters through the inlet port of the pneumatic
INLET PORT
container. When the selector valve is fully open, the
contained pressure exits through the outlet port. Pressure
from the outlet port is connected through a suitable pilot line VALVE
PNEUMATIC PISTON
to operate the appropriate number of containers required to
protect a particular hazard. Figure 3-80 illustrates a typical
selector valve system.
OUTLET PORT
The following points outline the operation of a typical selector
valve system:
1. The fire detection system in one of the protected hazards
operates.
2. A fire signal is sent to the solenoid on the pilot container
and it operates. At the same time, a signal operates a
second solenoid that connects to the pilot line from the pilot
container. This second solenoid opens and pilot container
pressure passes to the appropriate selector valve. FIGURE 3-79
3. The piston in the pneumatic container operates and opens SELECTOR VALVE
E000907
the selector valve. When the piston is at its fullest travel,
the selector valve is fully open.
4. Pressure passes from the outlet port of the pneumatic
piston to the container bank. This pressure operates the
container bank. The agent discharges through the selector
valve and into the hazard.
The unit is supplied with a non-return valve. The selector
valves are full bore. With each selector valve shipping
assembly, the selector valve solenoid actuator, non-return
valve, and appropriate fittings are included. Order the selector
valve solenoid brackets separately.
If faults or suspected faults arise, contact customer services
to organise a replacement part.
Factory testing
Each selector valve is function tested five times at the
minimum actuation pressure of 60 bar to confirm the correct
operation (open and closing) of the valve and the time
taken to complete this operation. Each selector valve is also
hydrostatically tested to 210 bar. FIGURE 3-80
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM
Pneumatic container volumes E001000
The volume of a pneumatic container on a 25 mm to 75 mm

selector valve is equivalent to 14 m of 6 mm pneumatic
actuation line tubing. For a 100 mm selector valve,
the volume equates to 32 m of tubing. See Section 4 -
Installation. These volumes must be deducted from the total
allowable volume of pneumatic actuation line when using a
selector valve in a system.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (70 BAR SYSTEMS, Continued)

The selector valve connects to the manifold system after Valve bore size: 25 mm to 100 mm
each manifold branch where multiple areas require protection Valve construction: Steel
from a single bank of containers. Valve connection (threaded):Threaded NPT female inlet
NPT male outlet
Selector valve ancillaries Valve body: Steel 1.0570
A selector valve microswitch (Part No. 30116011) is available Valve seat 25 mm to 40 mm: POM
and when fitted, electronically signals that the selector valve Valve seat 50 mm to 100 mm: GEMPTFE
operates correctly. A lever (Part No. 20010013) is also Valve seal: NBR
available to manually close the selector valve after operation.
! CAUTION Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C
When mounting the selector valve, allow sufficient clearance
Mounting position: Horizontal or vertical
for operating the manual lever.
Pneumatic port connection 1/4 in. BSPP
Minimum actuation 60 bar
Pneumatic cylinder volumes pressure:
For the equivalent length values of the pneumatic actuation Nominal actuation 100 bar
line tubing of a 25 mm, 80 mm, and 100 mm selector valve, pressure:
see Section 4 - Installation. When using a selector valve in Maximum actuation pressure: 115 bar
a system, deduct these volumes from the total allowable Actuation triggering range: 60 bar to 115 bar
volume of the pneumatic actuation line. Valve flow direction: One-way
Approvals: LPCB
CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30199
Year of CE Marking: 2016
CE Marking Requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part
No., working pressure,
size, flow direction, actuator
pressure range, actuator
working pressure, VdS
Approval number, CE0786
TABLE 3-53: SELECTOR VALVE SHIPPING ASSEMBLYS
Contents within the selector valve assembly
Selector 6 mm O.D.
Selector valve Selector Non-return (outer dia.) 1/4 in. Dowty Dimensions
valve size assembly valve valve tube fittings (bonded) seal (length x width) Weight
(mm) Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. (mm) (kg)
25 445044-C5M 21100060V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 524 x 203 8.8
40 445046-C5M 21100080V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 543 x 243 13.0
50 445047-C5M 21100090V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 560 x 256 17.0
65* 445048-C5M 62116006V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 590 x 283 27.5
80 445049-C5M 62116004V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 612 x 310 33.9
100 445050-C5M 62116005V 20006020 2 x 309.010.008 2x 31199816 748 x 363 58.0
Note: Special orders only.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (70 BAR SYSTEMS, Continued) Technical specification (Continued)

Electrical connection: DIN plug
Selector valve solenoid - solenoid with manual release
(Part No. 448384) IP rating: IP65
The selector valve solenoid is installed between the pilot
container and the selector valve. It allows a pneumatic VdS Certificate No.: G307006
release on receipt of an electrical signal from the control Approvals and listings: VdS, UL and FM
panel. Selector valve solenoids are offered as standard with a Solenoid actuator assembly: 30130253V consists of the
manual release, bleed valve, and metric tube connections. Following core components:
Solenoid actuator - 26114004
Part No. 448384 is the packed version of the selector valve
Burst disc - 20999999
solenoid – solenoid with manual release, with metric tube
Manual actuator - 31009401
connections (Part No. 30130253V). Additional selector valve
VdS Bleed Valve - 302200074
solenoids may be required for main and reserve systems
depending on the actuation line setup and should be ordered Weight: 0.25 kg
under Part No. 448384. Limit switch rating: 24 VDC
Selector valve solenoids are offered as standard with a
manual release and bleed valve (Part No. 302.200.074) in a
metric tube connection. ! WARNING
Note: If the selector valve is actuated manually, the actuation disc (Part No.
20999999) must be replaced.
The selector valve solenoid requires continuous duty during
discharge.
! WARNING
Failure to replace the actuation disc following operation and/or
resetting the manual release before fitting onto the solenoid,
could result in the system discharging into the wrong hazard
area and not enough agent discharging into the required
hazard area.
Selector valve solenoid brackets

FIGURE 3-81 (Part No. 30650013, 30650014, and 30650022)
SELECTOR VALVE SOLENOID ACTUATOR
WITH MANUAL RELEASE Brackets are available to mount the selector valve solenoid.
E000908 The following table lists selector valve solenoid bracket
Technical specification details.
Actuator body: Steel AISI/SAE 1025, Steel

AISI/SAE 12L13 FIXING CENTRES
Actuator seal: NBR

Solenoid body: Brass CW614N (base
coupling) LENGTH OVER ALL
Minimum solenoid rating: 20.4 VDC, 0.48 A

Nominal solenoid rating: 24 VDC, 0.56 A
Maximum solenoid rating: 27.6 VDC, 0.62 A FIGURE 3-82
Solenoid rating (50% 10.3 VDC, 0.24 A SELECTOR VALVE SOLENOID BRACKET
E000909
power):
Solenoid duty: Continuous during operation TABLE 3-54: SELECTOR VALVE SOLENOID BRACKETS
Actuation type: Solenoid (normally closed)
Reset method: Manually (if manually Overall Fixing
triggered) length centres
Automatically (if electrically Part No. Description mm mm
triggered) 30650022 Selector valve solenoid 360 330
Connection: 6 mm stud coupling mounting bracket
(Part No. 448384) (2 solenoids)
Voltage: 24 VDC ± 15% 30650013 Selector valve solenoid 505 475
Maximum working pressure: 115 bar mounting bracket
Consumption: 13 W (3 solenoids)
Maximum current: 0.55 A 30650014 Selector valve solenoid 650 620
Minimum duration of trigger Continuous duty mounting bracket
signal: (4 solenoids)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Placement indicator switch assembly kit - selector valve

solenoid actuator
(Part No. 441893)
The placement indicator switch assembly consists of a
monitoring device (Part No. 441857) and a mounting bracket
(Part No. 441884). The monitoring device indicates the
correct placement of the selector valve solenoid actuator and
the nitrogen pilot container solenoid valve. The placement
indicator switch mounts to the electrical actuator, and is
active when depressed. This allows a small electric current
to pass through the end-of-line resistor that enables the fire
control panel to indicate that the electrical actuator is in the
correct position for system operation. If the electrical actuator
is not in the correct position, the placement indicator switch
is open and the current does not pass through the end-of-line
resistor or indicate that the actuator is in the correct position.
FIGURE 3-83
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH KIT
E000910
Switch housing: Molded plastic (nylon)
Switch mechanism: Stainless steel
Mount bracket: Stainless steel
Fasteners: Stainless steel
Contacts: Gold plated
Connection: 1/2 in. - 14 NPSM
Nominal voltage: 24 VDC
range:
Approvals and UL and FM
listings:
Part number marked 441857
on component: FIGURE 3-84
Overall size: 46 mm (W) x 73 mm (H) x 20 mm (D) PLACEMENT INDICATOR MOUNTING BRACKET
E000911
Weight: 0.23 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Placement indicator switch assembly kit - selector valve Installation instructions

solenoid actuator (Continued) To install the placement indicator switch, complete the
These installation instructions are intended for use with the following steps:
electrical actuator placement indicator switch assembly kit 1. Set the placement indicator mounting bracket in the correct
(Part No. 441893). location on the solenoid mounting bracket. To do this,
complete the following steps:
a. Align the short vertical leg of the placement indicator
! CAUTION mounting bracket against the vertical leg of the solenoid
mounting bracket. See the following figure.
Personnel responsible for the installation, recharge, or mainte-
nance must read and fully understand these instructions before b. Confirm that the horizontal leg of the placement indicator
attempting to install the placement indicator switch. The place- mounting bracket is against the selector valve assembly.
ment indicator switch does not function correctly if installed See Figure 3-87.
incorrectly. Read and follow all instructions carefully. Ensure Note: Ensure that the bracket aligns as shown in Figure 3-87.
that the placement indicator switch correctly communicates
with the fire control panel before leaving the location.
PLACEMENT
INDICATOR
Description MOUNTING
BRACKET
The placement indicator switch is a monitoring device to
indicate the correct placement of the system’s electrical
actuator. The switch mounts directly to the actuator, and is
active when the sensor switch is depressed, allowing a small
electric current to pass through the end-of-line (EOL) resistor.
SOLENOID
Passing current through the EOL resistor enables the fire MOUNTING
control panel to indicate that the actuator is in the correct BRACKET -
VERTICAL LEG
position for system operation.
If the electrical actuator is not in the correct position, the
placement indicator switch is closed and inactive. The current
does not pass through the EOL resistor and the fire control
ALIGN SHORT VERTICAL LEG WITH
panel indicates that the actuator is not in the correct position. SOLENOID MOUNTING BRACKET
Note: Refer to the fire control panel for the correct EOL resistor value.
FIGURE 3-86
MOUNTING BRACKET LOCATION
009614
2. Once the placement indicator mounting bracket is correctly

46 mm aligned, as shown in the following figure, mark the bolt-hole
location on the solenoid mounting bracket.
73 mm
56 mm
MARK BOLT-HOLE
LOCATION
HORIZONTAL LEG
AGAINST SELECTOR
VALVE
SENSOR SWITCH
20 mm
FIGURE 3-87
BOLT HOLE LOCATION
009618
FIGURE 3-85
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH
009586
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVES (70 BAR SYSTEMS, Continued) DETAIL A

solenoid actuator (Continued)
SENSOR SWITCH
3. D
rill a hole through the solenoid mounting bracket at the (SHOWN FULLY
DEPRESSED)
mark made from Step 2 using a 2 bit.
PLACEMENT
! CAUTION INDICATOR
SWITCH
Exercise caution when drilling through the bracket. Ensure

that the debris does not make contact with the solenoid.
4. S
ecurely bolt the placement indicator mounting bracket to
the solenoid mounting bracket using the bolt and lock-nut
provided.
MOUNTING NUT
(FASTENS TO
INTEGRAL BOLT)
FIGURE 3-89
DEPRESSED SENSOR SWITCH
009620
BOLT (PROVIDED) 7. Secure the placement indicator switch in a horizontal

position by tightly snugging the mounting nut.
LOCK-NUT
SOLENOID MOUNTING BRACKET (PROVIDED)
! CAUTION
Do not over-tighten the mounting nut to the housing on the
FIGURE 3-88 placement indicator switch.
SECURING THE MOUNTING BRACKET
009619
5. S
ecure the mounting bracket to the placement indicator
switch housing using the nut provided. Secure the nut to
the integral bolt on the placement indicator switch. Leave
the nut slightly loose for later adjustment. See the following
figure.
6. A
djust the horizontal position to ensure that the sensor
switch is fully depressed. See Detail A in the following
figure.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

9. Disconnect the upper switch connector from the lower
solenoid actuator (Continued)
switch connector by pulling the upper connector apart
8. Locate the cable gland found in the placement indicator from the assembly.
switch installation kit and complete the following steps:
UPPER SWITCH
a. Remove the cover of the placement indicator switch CONNECTOR
using the appropriate screwdriver.
Note: Do not remove the connector retainer cover.
SENSOR SWITCH AND

HOUSING
CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY LOWER SWITCH
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR RETAINER
COVER (DO NOT REMOVE)
PLACEMENT INDICATOR
COVER SWITCH
SCREW
(COVER)
INTEGRAL BOLT
SCREW - TWO PLACES FIGURE 3-92

(FOR CONNECTOR EOL RESISTOR SWITCH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
RETAINER COVER) 009615
10. Separate the conductor wires, strip the wire covering,

FIGURE 3-90
remove the covering from the ends, and install into the
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH INTERNAL
upper switch connector, referencing the wiring diagram.
COMPONENTS
009592 Reference the AUTOPULSE, or alternative fire control
panel documentation for the correct EOL resistor value.
b. Run a 16-18 AWG, 2 conductor power-limited cable
Install the correct EOL resistor referencing the wiring
through the cable gland and continue into the placement
diagram.
indicator switch as shown in Figure 3-91.
c. H
and-tighten the cable gland to the placement indicator
switch housing as shown in the following figure.
+ OR – 4
TO CONTROL PANEL 3
HOUSING INPUT CIRCUIT
PROGRAMMED FOR
SUPERVISORY
2
EOL RESISTOR SPECIFIC
TO FIRE CONTROL
PANEL
+ OR – 1
CABLE GLAND FIGURE 3-93

EOL RESISTOR ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
009621
16-18 AWG, 2 CONDUCTOR

SHEATHED WIRE
FIGURE 3-91
INSERTING THE WIRE AND THE CABLE GLAND
009591
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Selector valve microswitch

(Part No. 30116011)
When fitted, the selector valve microswitch (Part No.
30116011) electronically signals that the selector valve has
operated. When the selector valve opens, the detector screw SELECTOR
VALVE
makes contact with the plunger on the microswitch. An
electrical signal is then sent to the panel to indicate that the
selector valve is open. The microswitch is supplied with the
detector screw and the required fixings.
Note: The optional microswitch should be installed before installing the
selector valve, if required. M4 X 20
HEXAGONAL SCREW
To assemble the microswitch, complete the following steps:
THREADED
1. A
ttach the microswitch to the threaded plate using the PLATE
MICROSWITCH
M4 x 20 hexagonal screw. See Figure 3-94.

2. Mount the detector screw using the two M8 nuts provided.
3. Wire the microswitch according to Figure 3-95.
Type: Modular pre-wired switch with plunger M8 NUTS DETECTOR SCREW

Housing: Metal housing, 20 mm fixing points
Contact block: 1 NO + 1 NC snap action
Cable: PVC cable, 5 x 0.75 mm2
2.0 m length
Ingress Protection IP67 (EN 60529) and
class: IP69K (ISO 26053)
Switch type: Positive opening (IEC 60947-5-1)
Thermal current 10 A
(lth):
Rated insulation 250 VAC
voltage (UI):
Fuse: 10 A 500 V type gG FIGURE 3-94
SELECTOR VALVE MICROSWITCH
Conformity: Low Voltage Directive (2014/35/EU) 025671
EMC Directive (2014/30/EU)
RoHS Directive (2011/65/EU)
BROWN
GREY
GREEN - YELLOW BLACK

BLUE
FIGURE 3-95
MICROSWITCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
025672
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Installing the selector valves Selector valve solenoid and manual release
To install the selector valve, complete the following steps: The selector valve solenoid with manual release controls the
1. Fit the selector valve manifold directly to the end of the opening of the selector valve. Brackets are available to mount
discharge manifold using the appropriate manifold union two, three, or four selector valve solenoids.
adaptor. Alternatively, fit a manifold drop section between
the discharge manifold and selector valve manifold to
reduce the selector valve outlet height in situations where To install the selector valve solenoid and manual release,
the enclosure height is restricted. complete the following steps:
2. Apply PTFE (TEFLON) tape to the male thread on 1. Secure the bracket to the wall at an appropriate height to
the selector valve manifold outlet. Do not apply PTFE enable easy manual actuation.
(TEFLON) tape to the first two threads. 2. Use actuation tubing to connect the outlet of the pilot
3. Fit the selector valve to the selector valve manifold. container to the inlets of the selector valve solenoids.
4. Place the Dowty seal (Part No. 31199816) in the threaded 3. Fit the actuation tubing between the outlet of the selector
end of the 1/4 in. BSPP x 6 mm stud coupling (Part No. valve solenoid and the inlet of the appropriate selector
309.010.008) or 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in. stud coupling (Part valve pneumatic piston. The inlet and outlet ports on the
No. 309.010.009). Then fit a stud coupling to both the inlet selector valve solenoid are denoted by the IN and OUT
and outlet port of the selector valve pneumatic piston with markings.
a tightening torque of 30 N•m. When tightening the stud
coupling in the pneumatic piston outlet port, fasten the ! CAUTION
non-return valve with a fixed wrench to avoid over-tight-
ening at the non-return valve inlet connection. It is essential that the pressure from the pilot container goes to
the inlet part of the selector valve solenoid. If accidentally fitted
5. Connect the pneumatic actuation tubing to the inlet port of
to the outlet, the wrong selector valve could operate when the
the pneumatic piston.
pilot container discharges. After the manual operation of the
6. Connect the pneumatic actuation tubing to the outlet port of selector valve solenoid, the actuation disc (Part No. 20999999)
the pneumatic piston and run the pneumatic actuation line must be replaced.
to the container bank to operate the appropriate number of
containers for the hazard.
! CAUTION
The selector valve pneumatic piston pivots on its top mounting
during actuation and the pneumatic actuation line needs to be
able to flex to accommodate this movement. Typically, a pigtail
(coil) in the pneumatic actuation line is sufficient. Alternatively,
a female actuation hose (Part No. 306.205.003) and appropri-
ate 1/4 in. BSPP adaptor (Part No. 309.013.007) and Dowty
seal (Part No. 31199816) for connection to the selector valve
inlet and outlet pneumatic port and a 1/4 in. BSPP x 6 mm
stud coupling (Part No. 309.010.008) or 1/4 in. BSPP x 1/4 in.
stud coupling (Part No. 309.010.009) for connection from the
female actuation hose to the 6 mm or 1/4 in. actuation tubing
may be used.
FIGURE 3-97
SOLENOID VALVE AND MANUAL RELEASE
025331
INLET PORT
VALVE
PNEUMATIC PISTON
OUTLET PORT
FIGURE 3-96
SELECTOR VALVE
E000912
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Release systems for selector valves

The use of selector valves in a SAPPHIRE system allows
! CAUTION
the protection of multiple hazards from a single bank of The selector valve pneumatic piston pivots on its top mounting
containers. Figure 3-98 shows a system where two containers during actuation and the pneumatic actuation line needs to be
can be discharged into either one of two unequal risks. able to flex to accommodate this movement. A pigtail (coil) in
If there is a fire in Area A, the selector valve needs to the pneumatic actuation line is usually sufficient. Alternatively,
operate and the two containers in the container bank need to a female actuation hose (Part No. 306.205.003) and appropri-
release agent. A typical operating sequence is as follows: ate 1/4 in. BSPP adaptor (Part No. 309.013.007) and Dowty
seal (Part No. 31199816) for connection to the selector valve
1. T
he fire detection system in Area A activates and sends
inlet and outlet pneumatic port and a 1/4 in. BSPP x 6 mm
a signal to the solenoid mounted on the pilot container.
stud coupling (Part No. 309.010.008) for connection from the
At the same time an electrical signal is sent to open the
female actuation hose to the 6 mm actuation tubing may be
selector valve solenoid for Area A.
used.
2. T
he pilot container operates and sends pressure into the
actuation line and through the open selector valve solenoid
DISCHARGE TO AREA A
for Area A. DISCHARGE TO AREA B
3. Pilot container pressure from the outlet of the open selector

valve solenoid flows to the inlet of the selector valve
actuation piston.
4. T
his pressure operates the selector valve actuation piston
and opens the selector valve.
5. W
hen the selector valve is fully open, pilot line pressure
flows from the outlet port of the selector valve pneumatic
piston and operates the containers in the container bank.
NOTICE
Only specified connection adaptors can be
used with the non-return valve (Part No.
20006020). Failure to use the specified
fittings may result in the pilot line non-re-
turn valve malfunctioning and cause the
suppression system operation to fail.
AREA B SOLENOID
AREA A SOLENOID
If the fire is in Area B, the following operating sequence
occurs:
CONTAINER CONTAINER
1. T
he fire detection system in Area B sends a signal to 1 2
operate the Area B selector valve solenoid.
2. T
he actuation pressure is supplied to container 1 but FIGURE 3-98
prevented from being supplied to container 2 by the RELEASE SYSTEMS FOR SELECTOR VALVES
E001001
actuation line non-return valve. This results in only one
container discharging to Area B.
Both the pilot container and the selector valve solenoid are
fitted with manual releases to operate the system in the
event of an electrical failure. The system can be designed to
operate any number of SAPPHIRE containers to enable the
protection of hazards of unequal size. In these installations,
pilot line non-return valves control the number of containers
discharged into a particular hazard.
The pilot line non-return valve connects directly to the male
actuation tee on the pneumatic actuator using a 1/4 in. Dowty
seal (Part No. 31199816). Use the 1/4 in. BSPP adaptor (Part
No. 309.200.021) and Dowty seal to connect to the female
actuation hose. Where a 6 mm actuation tube is used, a
1/4 in. BSPP x 6 mm stud coupling (Part No. 309.010.008)
and Dowty seal (Part No. 31199816) should be selected to
connect to the non-return valve.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Relief valve
(Part No. 302.209.021 for 25 and 42 bar systems)
The installation of a relief valve is necessary if the system
requires the use of selector valves. The relief valve is
installed in parallel with the vent valve that vents to the
atmosphere within the closed pipework section. It is designed
to automatically relieve excess pressure that may be created
within the closed pipework section.
An increase in pressure in the manifold due to trapped Novec 210 mm
1230 fluid and high temperature causes the relief valve to

operate and relieve the pressure. It is a requirement that the
outlet of the relief valve is piped to the atmosphere away from
personnel and should terminate in a discharge nozzle.
Note: The manifold burst disc assembly (Part No. 13281 for 25 bar systems
or Part No. 302.200.070 for 42 bar systems) can be utilised as an alternative
33 mm
method of pressure relief for closed section pipework.
Material: Chrome steel body G 1/2 in.
ISO 228
Stainless steel disc
Stainless steel spring FIGURE 3-99
Connection: G1/2 in. male inlet RELIEF VALVE
025262
G1/2 in. female outlet

Set pressure: 50 bar
Weight: 1.2 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)
Manifold burst disc assembly 64 mm
(Part No. 13281 and 302.200.070 for 25 and 42 bar systems)

(Part No. 302700007 for 70 bar systems)
The installation of a manifold burst disc is necessary if the
system requires the use of selector valves. The manifold
burst disc is installed in parallel with the vent valve which
vents to the atmosphere within the closed pipework section. It
is designed to automatically relieve excess pressure that may
be created within the closed pipework section.
An increase in pressure in the manifold due to trapped Novec
1230 fluid and high temperature causes the manifold burst FIGURE 3-100
disc to operate and relieve the pressure. It is a requirement MANIFOLD BURST DISC ASSEMBLY
that the outlet of the manifold burst disc is piped to the (PART NO. 13281 AND 302.200.070)
025058
atmosphere, away from personnel, and should terminate in a
discharge nozzle.
(Part No. 13281 and 302.200.070)
Material: Brass CZ121
Connection: 3/4 in. BSPT x 3/4 in. BSPT
Burst disc rating: 53.4 bar (Part No. 13281
for 25 bar systems)
65.5 bar (Part No. 302.200.070
for 42 bar systems)
Weight: 0.15 kg
Note: The relief valve (Part No. 302.209.021) can be utilised as an alternative
method of pressure relief for closed section pipework.
(Part No. 302700007)
Material: Brass CZ121
Connection: 3/4 in. BSPT x 3/4 in. BSPT
Burst disc rating: 108 bar
Tolerance rating: 108 bar ± 5% at 50 °C
range:
Weight: 0.15 kg
Approvals and LPCB
listings:
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER - STANDARD

Alternative pilot containers are available depending upon
market requirements (TPED / DOT/ PESO). These pilot
containers pneumatically operate a SAPPHIRE system.
They also operate selector valves, if utilized in the system.
Table 3-55 lists the maximum number of SAPPHIRE
containers operated by these actuation containers. The
maximum actuation line tubing length detailed in Section 4 -
Installing the Pilot Container Components, reduces if used in
conjunction with selector valves.
The pilot container is supplied with a solenoid, manual
actuator, contacted pressure gauge, outlet adaptor, bleed A
valve, pipe / hose adaptors, and brackets. The contacted
B
pressure gauge has a switch point that is factory set to 90 bar.
Note: If actuated manually, the actuation burst disc (Part No. 20938000) must
be replaced.
Valve body: Brass CZ121
Thread type DIN477 (W28.8)
(3 L, 13 L, and 50 L TPED):
C
Thread type 1 in. NGT
(3 L, 13 L, and 50 L DOT):
Thread type 1 in. NGT
(13 L and 50 L PESO): FIGURE 3-101
PILOT CONTAINER
Valve outlet: DIN477 (W21.7) E001055
Valve outlet adaptor 1/4 in. BSPP

connection:
Container volume: See Table 3-55
Gas type: Nitrogen
Container: Carbon steel
Container pressure: 100 bar at 15 °C
Container test pressure (TPED): 300 bar
Container test pressure (PESO 13 L 250 bar and 334 bar
and 50 L):
Container test pressure (DOT): 207 bar
Actuation method: Manual and electrical
Bracket type: Wall mounted (3 L)
Weight: See Table 3-55 FIGURE 3-102
PILOT CONTAINER VALVE SETUP
E001055
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER - STANDARD (Continued)
TABLE 3-55: PILOT CONTAINER DETAILS

Pressure Maximum
Nom. Water Gauge Height Height Dia number of
size capacity Type A B C containers Weight Approvals
Part No. L L mm mm mm operated kg and listings
304700009 (TPED 50 °C) 3 3 CPG 542 495 100 12 10.6 UL and FM
304700008 (TPED CE 50 °C) 3 3 CPG-NO 542 495 100 12 10.6 LPCB and VdS
452491 (TPED CE 50 °C) 3 3 CPG-NC 542 495 100 12 10.6 LPCB and VdS
1
304700010 (DOT 50 °C) 3 3.4 CPG 403 356 133 12 11.3 UL and FM
304700017 (TPED 50 °C) 13 13.4 CPG 1111 1064 140 12 21.2 UL and FM
304700016 (TPED CE 50 °C) 13 13.4 CPG-NO 1111 1064 140 12 21.2 LPCB and VdS
452492 (TPED CE 50 °C) 13 13.4 CPG-NC 1111 1064 140 12 21.2 LPCB and VdS
1
304700019 (DOT 50 °C) 13 14.2 CPG 695 648 188 12 23.5 UL and FM
304700014 (PESO 50 °C) 13 13.5 CPG 1162 1115 140 12 21.2 UL
304700022 (TPED 50 °C) 50 50 CPG 1527 1481 229 12 51.2 UL and FM
304700021 (TPED CE 50 °C) 50 50 CPG-NO 1527 1481 229 12 51.2 LPCB and VdS
452493 (TPED CE 50 °C) 50 50 CPG-NC 1527 1481 229 12 51.2 LPCB and VdS
304700024 (DOT 50 °C)1 50 50 CPG 1482 1435 236 12 67 UL and FM
304700026 (PESO 50 °C) 50 50 CPG 1532 1485 229 12 51.2 UL
Notes: 1
. Not supplied by Great Yarmouth, UK
CPG = Contacted pressure gauge
CPG NO = Contacted pressure gauge normally open under zero pressure (container empty) and normally closed under nominal working pressure
CPG NC = Contacted pressure gauge normally closed under zero pressure (container empty) and normally open under nominal working pressure
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE (CE PILOT CONTAINER)

SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
(Part No. 42116068)
1
The pilot container is supplied factory fitted with a 0 bar to
160 bar pressure gauge complete with a contact switch set to
signal if the container pressure drops to 90 bar.
Alternatively, order this gauge separately for on-site fitting, if
necessary.
Model type: PGS21.040 Item Description
1 Fixing nut
Entry: Back axial
Measurement system: Copper alloy FIGURE 3-103
Movement: Copper alloy CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE
E001585
Units of outer scale: bar
Connection: M10 × 1 DIN13
NOTICE
Case: Stainless steel The set point of the contacted pressure
IP rating: IP65 gauge is 90 bar giving an indication of a
Window: Polycarbonate 10% loss in pressure. At low temperatures,
Restrictor: Brass 0.5 mm (Dia) the developed pressure of nitrogen can fall
Accuracy: ± 1.6% below 90 bar giving the impression that the
container pressure is low. For this reason,
Language: English
the effects of low temperatures should
be taken into account. For installations
range:
susceptible to low temperatures, the use of
Pressure range: 0 bar to 160 bar temperature controlled areas for container
Nominal working pressure: 100 bar storage should be considered.
(Charge pressure)
Maximum operating 113.6 bar
pressure:
Setpoint: 90 bar
! WARNING
Cable: 4 core x 1 m Pressure gauges should not be exposed to high pressure
Voltage: 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC water streams.
Current: 5 mA to 100 mA The contacted pressure gauges should not be exposed to
Maximum consumption: 2.4 W excess mechanical shock or vibration. The limits for the
Approvals and listings: LPCB gauges are < 0.5 g (5 m/s2) for mechanical shock and a
Certification: EN 12094-10 frequency range < 150 Hz for vibration. If the gauges are
CE certification number: 0786-CPR-30089
specified limits they may send a false signal to the panel indi-
cating low container pressure, resulting in a false alarm.
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar,
CL1.6, CE0786 For SAPPHIRE systems that could be exposed to higher levels
Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork of shock and vibration, then the alternative normally open
under nominal working pressure gauges (Part No. 30245010)
Weight: 0.10 kg
should be used, and the installation of anti-vibration mats and
Gauge Part No.: 30245009 brackets considered.
Fixing nut number: 30210808
O-ring Part No.: 22000502
Protector Part No.: 35116444 (required when Location on system
gauge is not factory fitted) The pressure gauge fits to the pilot container discharge valve.
working pressure.
The contact breaks (opens) on falling pressure.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE (CE PILOT CONTAINER)

(Continued)
When pilot container valves are fitted with CPG (Part No.
42116068 [gauge part number 30245009]), the gauge is
normally open under zero pressure (container empty) and
normally closed under nominal working pressure.
The CPGs are connected in parallel with an end-of-line
(EOL) device. The CPG contacts are normally closed at 100
bar nominal charge pressure. The contacts open on fall of
pressure at 90 bar. The required voltage range is 4.5 VDC to
24 VDC. The following figure illustrates the wiring diagram.
STANDARD CABLE
TO
EOL RESISTOR
CONTROL
GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE PANEL
WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW
BROWN GREEN BROWN GREEN

GAUGE CONTACTS SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION (ALARM CONDITION)
FIGURE 3-104
PILOT CONTAINER CPG ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
E001585
The pressure gauge works within the pre-determined system
to organise a replacement part. If pressure drops to 90 bar
when adjusted for temperature, refill or replace the container.
End users must check pressure gauges weekly. Pressure
gauges are field-replaceable.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ALTERNATIVE CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE (CE

PILOT CONTAINER) Technical specification
(Part No. 42116069) Model type: PGS21.040
For systems that could be exposed to vibration, an alternative Type: Bourdon tube pressure gauge
contacted pressure gauge is available for the 100 bar Entry: Back axial
nitrogen pilot container valve (Part No. 42116069). Consider Measurement system: Copper alloy
installing anti-vibration mats and brackets. Movement: Copper alloy
This pressure gauge is designated normally closed under Nominal size: 41 mm (Dia) × 53 mm (L)
zero pressure (container empty), and as such is normally Units of outer scale: bar
open under nominal working pressure. Connection: M10 × 1 DIN13
If this pressure gauge is used to replace an existing normally Case: Stainless steel
closed under nominal working pressure gauge, then changes IP rating: IP65
may be required to the alarm and releasing panel, depending Window: Polycarbonate
upon the panel type and input module. Restrictor: Brass 0.5 mm (Dia)
Accuracy: ± 1.6%
NOTICE Language: English
The set point of this contacted pressure
gauge gives an indication of a 10% loss Pressure range: 0 bar to 160 bar
in pressure as required by VdS system Nominal working pressure: 100 bar
rules. At low temperatures, the developed (Charge pressure)
pressure can fall below the set point giving Maximum operating 113.6 bar
the impression that the container pressure pressure:
is low. For this reason, the effects of low Set point: 90 bar
temperatures should be taken into account. Cable: 4 core x 1 m
For installations susceptible to low tempera- Voltage: 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC
tures, the use of temperature controlled
Current: 5 mA to 100 mA
areas for container storage should be
Maximum consumption: 2.4 W
considered.
Approvals and listings: LPCB
CE certification number: 0786-CPR-30089
WARNING
! CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar,
Pressure gauges should not be exposed to high pressure CL1.6, CE0786
water streams. Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork
Weight: 0.10 kg
excess mechanical shock or vibration. The limits for the Gauge Part No.: 30245010
gauges are < 0.5 g (5 m/s2) for mechanical shock and a Fixing nut number: 30210808
frequency range < 150 Hz for vibration. If the gauges are O-ring Part No.: 22000502
exposed to mechanical shock or vibration outside of these Protector Part No.: 35116444 (required when
specified limits they may send a false signal to the panel indi- gauge is not factory fitted)
cating low container pressure, resulting in a false alarm.
For SAPPHIRE systems that could be exposed to higher levels
of shock and vibration, the installation of anti-vibration mats working pressure.
and brackets considered.
The contact breaks (closes) on falling pressure.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ALTERNATIVE CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE (CE

PILOT CONTAINER, Continued)
When pilot container valves are fitted with an alternate CPG
(Part No. 42116069 [gauge - Part No. 30245010]), the gauge
is normally closed under zero pressure (container empty) and
normally open under nominal working pressure. The CPGs
are connected in parallel with an end-of-line (EOL) device.
The CPG contacts are normally open at 100 bar nominal
charge pressure. The contacts closes on fall of pressure at
90 bar. The required voltage range is 4.5 VDC to 24 VDC.
The following figure illustrates the wiring diagram.
STANDARD CABLE
BROWN WHITE WHITE BROWN BROWN WHITE

EOL RESISTOR
TO
GAUGE
GAUGE
GAUGE
CONTROL
PANEL
GREEN YELLOW YELLOW GREEN GREEN YELLOW

GAUGE CONTACTS SHOWN IN CLOSED POSITION (ALARM CONDITION)
FIGURE 3-105
ALTERNATIVE CONTACTED PRESSURE
GAUGE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(NORMALLY CLOSED UNDER ZERO PRESSURE)
E001882
to organise a replacement part. If the pressure drops to
90 bar when adjusted for temperature, refill or replace the
container. End users must check the pressure gauges
weekly. The pressure gauges are field replaceable.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE

- TPED, DOT, AND PESO PILOT CONTAINER
(Part No. 30213401)
A contacted pressure gauge (CPG) is factory fitted to
the TPED, DOT, and PESO pilot container valve and is
field-replaceable.
Note: Pilot container assemblies fitted with MIJA contacted pressure gauge
are for use outside UK and EU only.
Entry: Back axial FIGURE 3-106
Measurement system: Copper alloy MIJA CONTACTED PRESSURE GAUGE FOR DOT, TPED,
Movement: Copper alloy AND PESO PILOT CONTAINER
025586
Nominal size: DN40 (1.6 in.)
Units of outer scale: bar
Case: Stainless steel Installation instructions
All pilot container valves are fitted with a CPG. The CPGs
Connection: M10 x 1 DIN13 are connected in series with an end-of-line (EOL) device. The
Ingress Protection Class: IP 54 CPG contacts are normally closed at 100 bar nominal charge
Window: Polycarbonate pressure. The contacts open on fall of pressure at
Restrictor: Brass 0.5 mm (Dia) 88 bar. The required voltage range is 18 VDC to 30 VDC.
Accuracy: ± 4% at charge Figure 3-107 illustrates the wiring diagram.
± 8% at upper and lower limits
Language: English
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
AUXILIARY
(Part No. 30213401)
CONTROL PANEL

Nominal charge pressure: 100 bar BREAK
BLUE
Setpoint: 88 bar BLUE BLUE BLUE
Voltage: 18 VDC to 30 VDC YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW
Current: 5 mA to 100 mA
DEPENDING
Maximum consumption: 3W ON
NORMAL PRESSURE: BLUE/YELLOW CLOSE CIRCUIT
Weight: 0.06 kg HIGH OR LOW PRESSURE: BLUE/YELLOW OPEN CIRCUIT
CONTROL
PANEL
POWER OFF-CONDITION: BLUE/YELLOW OPEN CIRCUIT
Approvals and listings: UL and FM
FIGURE 3-107
Location on system PILOT CONTAINER CPG ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
025824
The pressure gauge fits to the pilot container discharge valve.
The pressure gauge works within the pre-determined system
to organise a replacement part. If the pressure drops to
88 bar when adjusted for temperature, then refill or replace
the container. End users must check the pressure gauges
weekly. The pressure gauges are field-replaceable.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER SAFETY BURST DISC PILOT CONTAINER ACTUATION BURST DISC
A burst disc is factory fitted to every valve assembly. It This burst disc must be replaced if the pilot container has
ruptures if the container becomes over pressurised if been manually actuated.
subjected to temperatures above the designed storage
temperature of the container. Technical specification
Part No.: 20938000 (orange color)
Material: Copper nickel
15 mm 2.2 mm
Burst pressure: 285 bar to 315 bar at 20 °C
Overall size: 14.0 mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.2 kg
FIGURE 3-108
PILOT CONTAINER SAFETY BURST DISC
E000930
Valve size: 12 mm
Disc Part No.: 29999911 (violet color)
Plug Part No.: 22000001
Body material: Copper / Nickel (disc)
Brass CW614N (plug)
Rating: 160 bar to 180 bar at 20 °C
152 bar to 172 bar at 55 °C
Thread: M12 x 1.5 DIN13
Hole orientation: 2 x 180° radial, 1 x axial
Torque: 20 N•m
Overall size: 15 mm x 15.5 mm A/F (plug)
10 mm (Dia) x 2.2 mm (disc)
Weight: 0.02 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER SOLENOID - CE

(Part No. 3023024B)
The pilot container includes a factory fitted solenoid.
• The solenoid valve is supplied factory fitted to the pilot
container.
• Do not electrically connect the unit until the system is ready
for commissioning.
! WARNING
In the event of a fault with the solenoid valve, return the
complete pilot container to ANSUL®. Do not attempt to remove
the solenoid base from the pilot container on-site.
• Ensure the electrical power supply is disconnected during

electrical connections and that the top cap is removed.
• Connect the solenoid valve as shown in the following figure.
• Once connected, place the top cap back on the pilot valve.
FIGURE 3-109
PILOT CONTAINER SOLENOID VALVE
E000914
FIGURE 3-110
Technical specification SOLENOID VALVE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Actuation type: Solenoid 025337
Reset method: Automatic

Connection: Factory fitted
Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 - 27.6)
Consumption: 11 W
Minimum duration of trigger Continuous duty
signal:
Electrical connection: DIN plug
Protection: IP 65
Weight: 0.25 kg
Approvals and listings: LPCB and VdS
Certification: EN 12094
nominal voltage, current,
Batch No., CE0786
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER SOLENOID – CE, VdS, UL, AND FM

(Part No. 21006401)
The pilot container includes a factory fitted solenoid.
FIGURE 3-111
PILOT CONTAINER SOLENOID VALVE
E000914
Actuation type: Solenoid
Reset method: Automatic
Connection: Factory fitted
Voltage: 24 VDC (21.6 to 27.6)
Maximum working pressure : 115 bar
Consumption: 13 W
Minimum duration of trigger Continuous duty
signal:
Electrical connection: DIN Plug
Protection: IP 65
Weight: 0.25 kg
Approvals and listings: CE, VdS, UL, and FM
Certification: EN 12094
nominal voltage, current,
Batch No., CE0786
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY - PILOT

CONTAINER SOLENOID
(Part No. 441872)
The placement indicator switch assembly consists of a
monitoring device (Part No. 441857) and a mounting bracket
(Part No. 441883). The placement indicator switch mounts
to the pilot container solenoid, and becomes active when
depressed. This allows a small electric current to pass
through the end-of-line resistor which enables the fire control
panel to indicate that the pilot container solenoid is in the
correct position for system operation. If the pilot container
solenoid is not in the correct position, the placement indicator
switch is open. This means that the current does not pass
through the end-of-line resistor, and does not indicate that the
solenoid is in the correct position.
Housing: Plastic
FIGURE 3-112
Switch: Stainless steel PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH KIT
Mount bracket: Stainless steel E000915
Contacts: Gold
Connection: 1/2 in. - 14 NPSM
range:
Part number marked 441857
on component:
Overall size: 46 mm (W) x 73 mm (H) x 20 mm (D)
Weight: 0.23 kg
FIGURE 3-113
PLACEMENT INDICATOR MOUNT BRACKET
E000916
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

CONTAINER SOLENOID (Continued)
These installation instructions are intended for use with the
electric actuator placement indicator switch assembly kit Housing: Plastic
(Part No. 441872). Current rating: 0.4 A
Personnel responsible for the installation, recharge, or Rated voltage: 24 VDC
maintenance must read and fully understand these instruc- Fasteners: Stainless steel
tions prior to attempting to install the placement indicator
switch. Installation instructions
To install the placement indicator switch, complete the
following steps:
! CAUTION
1. Remove the gauge shroud from the valve assembly.
The placement indicator switch does not function correctly if Shroud removal can be done by hand.
not correctly installed. Read and follow all instructions care-
fully. Ensure the placement indicator switch communicates VALVE ASSEMBLY
with the fire control panel correctly before leaving the location.
Description GAUGE SHROUD
The placement indicator switch (see Figure 3-114) is a

monitoring device to indicate the correct placement of the
system electric actuator. The switch mounts directly to the
actuator, and is active when the sensor switch is depressed,
allowing a small electric current to pass through the REMOVE
end-of-line (EOL) resistor. Passing current through the EOL SHROUD
resistor enables the fire control panel to indicate the actuator

is in the correct position for system operation.
If the electric actuator is not in the correct position, the FIGURE 3-115
placement indicator switch is closed (not active). The current PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH
009594
does not pass through the EOL resistor, and therefore the
fire control panel indicates the actuator is not in the correct 2. Install the placement indicator mounting bracket. See the
position. following figure.
Note: Refer to fire control panel for correct EOL resistor value. Note: Ensure the finger tabs are positioned on each side of the square base
on the underside of the valve and are correctly aligned. Finger tabs should
fit snugly over the valve assembly. See the following figure for the finger tab
location.
46 mm
FINGER TABS ON
73 mm
PLACEMENT INDICATOR
MOUNTING BRACKET
56 mm INSTALL
BRACKET
SQUARE
BASE
SENSOR SWITCH
FIGURE 3-116
20 mm
PLACEMENT INDICATOR MOUNTING BRACKET
INSTALLATION
FIGURE 3-114 009622
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH

009586
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY - PILOT DETAIL A

3. Reinstall the gauge shroud that was removed in Step 1.
See Figure 3-117 and Figure 3-118.
PLACEMENT
INDICATOR
SWITCH SENSOR SWITCH
MOUNTING (SHOWN FULLY
BRACKET DEPRESSED)
DETAIL A
GAUGE
SHROUD
MOUNTING BRACKET
INSTALL MOUNTING NUT
SHROUD (FASTENS TO INTEGRAL BOLT)

REINSTALL GAUGE SHROUD PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH
009623
MOUNTING BRACKET
009625
GAUGE
SHROUD 6. Secure the placement indicator switch horizontal position
by snugging the mounting nut tight.
! CAUTION
Do not over-tighten the mounting nut to the placement indicator
switch housing.
MOUNTING
BRACKET
7. Locate the cable gland found in the placement indicator
switch installation kit.
FINGER TAB
SQUARE
BASE
(TWO PLACES) a. Remove the cover of the placement indicator switch
using the appropriate screwdriver. See Figure 3-120.
FIGURE 3-118
UNDERSIDE OF VALVE WITH GAUGE SHROUD AND Note: Do not remove the connector retainer cover.
MOUNTING BRACKET ASSEMBLED
009624
Note: Ensure the finger tabs are positioned toward the bottom of the valve
and correctly aligned. See Figure 3-118. SENSOR SWITCH AND
HOUSING
CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
4. Secure the mounting bracket to the placement indicator

switch housing using the nut provided. See Figure 3-119. CONNECTOR RETAINER COVER
(DO NOT REMOVE)
The nut secures to the integral bolt on the placement
indicator switch. See Figure 3-120. Leave the nut slightly
loose for adjustment later.
COVER
5. Adjust the horizontal position to ensure the sensor switch
is fully depressed. See Figure 3-119, Detail A.
SCREW
(COVER) INTEGRAL BOLT
SCREW - TWO PLACES

(FOR CONNECTOR
RETAINER COVER)
FIGURE 3-120
PLACEMENT INDICATOR SWITCH INTERNAL
COMPONENTS
009592
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

Step 7 (Continued)
b. Run a 16-18 AWG, 2 conductor power-limited 9. Separate the two conductor wire, strip the wire covering,
cable through the cable gland and continue into the remove the covering from the ends, and install it into the
placement indicator switch. See Figure 3-121. upper switch connector per the wiring diagram. Reference
the AUTOPULSE fire control panel documentation for
c. Hand-tighten the cable gland to the placement
the correct EOL resistor value and install the correct EOL
indicator switch housing. See the following figure. At
resistor from the wiring diagram.
this time, do not tighten the cable gland to the wire.
+ OR – 4
HOUSING
TO CONTROL PANEL 3
INPUT CIRCUIT
PROGRAMMED FOR
SUPERVISORY
EOL RESISTOR SPECIFIC

2
TO AUTOPULSE FIRE
CABLE GLAND CONTROL PANEL
+ OR – 1
16-18 AWG, 2 CONDUCTOR
SHEATHED WIRE
FIGURE 3-123
EOL RESISTOR ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
009621
10. Reconnect the upper and lower connectors that were

disconnected in Step 8 ensuring complete insertion.
FIGURE 3-121
11. Arrange the wiring within the placement indicator switch
INSERT WIRE AND CABLE GLAND
009591 housing.
8. D
isconnect the upper switch connector from the lower 12. T
ighten the cable gland to the wire. Tightening the nut to
switch connector by pulling the upper connector apart from cable gland will compress the cable gland grommet, and
the assembly with your fingers. bind the grommet to the wire.
13. Re-assemble the cover to the housing using the appropri-
UPPER SWITCH
CONNECTOR
ate screw driver.
14. Once in place, run the other end of the wire to the wall
mounted junction box that will be wired through conduit to
the fire control panel.
15. Ensure that all other electrical connections are complete,
LOWER SWITCH and ensure that the placement indicator switch is indicat-
CONNECTOR ing the correct position at the fire control panel.
FIGURE 3-122
SEPARATE UPPER SWITCH CONNECTOR
009615
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANUAL ACTUATOR – PILOT CONTAINER SOLENOID

(Part No. 30180APB and 31009401)
The manual actuator fits to the pilot valve to mechanically
operate the actuation system. The manual actuator also fits to
the selector valve solenoid to manually operate the selector
valve.
A steel safety pin prevents accidental manual release. To
allow the use of the local manual actuator, remove the steel
safety pin. After removing the steel safety pin, pull the lever
in the direction indicated by the arrow embossed on the unit’s
body to achieve manual operation. The manual actuator is
included in the pilot container assembly.
! WARNING
Failure to reset the actuator prior to fitting onto the container
valve results in the immediate operation of the container valve FIGURE 3-124
and a potentially hazardous discharge of the container. MANUAL ACTUATOR
E000917
Location on system
The manual actuator connects to the side of the pilot valve or
the selector valve solenoid.
Part No. 30180APB 31009401
Body: Brass Brass
Safety pin: Steel Steel
Lever: Brass Brass
Swivel nut: Brass Brass
Pin nominal stroke: 6.0 mm 6.0 mm
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C -20 °C to 50 °C
range:
Overall size: 82.0 mm x 72.0 mm 82.0 mm x 72.0 mm
Approvals and listings: LPCB and VdS VdS, UL, and FM
Certification: EN 12094-4 EN 12094-4
CE certification No.: 0786-CPR-30062 0786-CPR-30062
Year of CE marking: 2014 2014
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, part Manufacturer’s mark, part
number, batch number, and number, batch number, CE0786
CE0786
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER VALVE

For pilot container valve options, see Table 3-56.
! WARNING
Should the solenoid valve malfunction in any way, return the
complete pilot container assembly to ANSUL®. Do not attempt
to remove the solenoid base on-site.
Location on system
The pilot container valve connects to the container.
FIGURE 3-125
Technical specification PILOT CONTAINER VALVE
Body material: Brass CZ 121 E000918
Piston: Brass
Thread type (128 - 90): W28.8 DIN477 Year of CE marking: 2014
Thread type (128 - 97): 1 in. NGT CE marking requirements Manufacturer’s mark, 20012128,
Outlet connection: W21.7 DIN477 128-90UL: 128-90UL, batch number,
Outlet safety cap Brass CW617N 140 bar, CE 0786, π 2831,
material: VdS G300020
Maximum working 166 bar CE marking requirements Manufacturer’s mark, 21114008,
pressure: 128-97: 128-97, batch number, 140 bar,
CE 0786, π 2831, VdS G300020
Free flow cross sectional 50.26 mm2
area: CE marking requirements Manufacturer’s mark, 29012804,
Maximum actuation force: 111 N at maximum working 128-90: 128-90, batch number, 140 bar,
pressure CE 0786, π 2831, VdS G300020
Burst disc rating: 170 bar ± 10 bar Method of marking: Laser or engraved
Burst disc port: M12 x 1.5 Valve type: Type 2
Gauge port: M10 x 1 Overall size: 148 mm x 76 mm
range:
Weight: 1.95 kg
Approvals and listings: UL and FM (Valve Part No.
20012128 and 441400)
UL (Valve Part No. A16381396F)
LPCB and VdS (Valve Part No.
29012804 and 29012804NC)
CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30062 (CPR)
2831-TPED-015 (TPED)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER VALVE (Continued)
TABLE 3-56: PILOT CONTAINER VALVE DETAILS

Valve Thread
Part No. type Components included within the valve part number Where used
441400 1 in. NGT · 128-97 valve (Part No. 21114008) 3 L, 13 L, and 50 L (DOT) UL and
FM pilot container assembly (Part
·5
0 °C MIJA contacted pressure gauge 0 bar to 134 bar, normally
No. 304700010, 304700019 and
closed under pressure (Part No. 30213401)
304700024)
· Solenoid (Part No. 21006401)
· Manual actuator (Part No. 31009401)
20012128 28.8 DIN 477 · 128-90 UL valve including 50 °C MIJA contacted pressure gauge 3 L, 13 L, and 50 L (TPED) UL and
0 bar to 134 bar, normally closed under pressure (Part No. 30213401) FM pilot container assembly (Part
No. 304700009, 304700017, and
·T
he pilot container assembly includes a solenoid (Part No.
304700022)
21006401) and manual actuator (Part No. 31009401)
29012804 28.8 DIN 477 ·L
PG128-90 valve including 50 °C WIKA contacted pressure gauge 3 L, 13 L, and 50 L (TPED) CE
0 bar to 160 bar, normally closed under pressure (Part No. certified pilot container assembly
30245009) (Part No. 304700008, 304700016
and 304700021)
·T
21006401 / 3023024B) and manual actuator (Part No. 30180APB)
29012804NC 28.8 DIN 477 ·L
PG128-90 valve including 50 °C WIKA contacted pressure 3 L, 13 L, and 50 L (TPED) LPCB
gauge 0 bar to 160 bar, normally closed under pressure (Part No. and VdS CE certified pilot container
30245010) assembly (Part No. 452491, 452492
and 452493)
·T
21006401 / 3023024B) and manual actuator (Part No. 30180APB)
A16381396F 1 in. NGT ·1
28-97 valve (Part No. 21114008) with additional PESO marking 13 L and 50 L (PESO) UL pilot
container assembly
·5
0 °C MIJA contacted pressure gauge 0 bar to 134 bar, normally
(Part No. 304700014 and
closed under pressure (Part No. 30213401)
304700026)
· Solenoid (Part No. 21006401)
· Manual actuator (Part No. 31009401)
Note: For valve part numbers 20012128, 29012804, and 29012804NC the solenoid actuator and manual actuator are included in the pilot container bill of
materials. If replacing the pilot container valves, the solenoid actuator and manual actuator must be purchased separately.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT VALVE ADAPTOR

(Part No. 35116381)
54 mm
The pilot container valve adaptor connects the valve to the
pilot actuation hose or tubing and bleed valve (302.200.075).
Body: Steel (zinc coated)
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP
Working pressure: 100 bar
Overall size: 53.5 mm x 39 mm
Weight: 0.26 kg
FIGURE 3-126
PILOT VALVE ADAPTOR
E000919
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT LINE NON-RETURN VALVE PILOT LINE EXTENDED NON-RETURN VALVE

(Part No. 20006020 and 20006025) (Part No. 302700015)
The pilot line non-return valve is used in systems with The pilot line extended non-return valve is used when there
selector valves. It prevents the actuated selector valve from is a requirement to either maintain pressure in a particular
closing due to the nitrogen pressure going backwards during section of the actuation line or to ensure that nitrogen
the discharge, causing the interruption of the agent discharge. pressure from the pilot container is operating the correct
The pilot non-return valve is factory mounted. SAPPHIRE containers.
For example, a system using selector valves where differing
TABLE 3-57: PILOT LINE NON-RETURN VALVE PART numbers of containers are required for each hazard area use
DETAILS the pilot line non-return valve to ensure that pilot pressure
Part No. Description opens only the correct bank of containers and the correct
selector valve. Various adaptors are available to fit the pilot
20006020 Non-return valve, adaptor, and Dowty seal line non-return valve.
20006025 Non-return valve only
Location on system
Location on system The non-return valve (Part No. 302700015) is used in the
The non-return valve is used in the actuation line at the outlet actuation line between the containers.
of the selector valve pneumatic container.
66 mm
54 mm

PILOT LINE NON-RETURN VALVE PILOT LINE EXTENDED NON-RETURN VALVE
E000920 E000921

Body material: Brass CW614N Body material: Brass CW614N
Connections: 1/4 in. BSPP female Connections: 1/4 in. BSPP female
Backup ring material: NBR Backup ring material: NBR
Seal material: NBR Seal material: NBR
Maximum working 240 bar Maximum working 240 bar
pressure: pressure:
Cracking pressure: 3.6 bar Cracking pressure: 3.6 bar
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C
range: range:
Free cross sectional area: 15.9 mm2 Free cross sectional area: 15.9 mm2
Approvals and listings: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM Approvals and listings: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30036 CE Certification No.: 0786-CPR-30036
Year of CE marking: 2018 Year of CE marking: 2021
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No., CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part No.,
Batch No., 240 bar, , 1/4 in., Batch No., 240 bar, , 1/4 in.,
and CE0786 and CE0786
Part number marked on 20006025 Part number marked on 302700015
component: component:
Overall size: 24 mm x 54 mm Overall size: 24 mm x 65.5 mm
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER BRACKET ASSEMBLY

The bracket assembly consists of two bolts and either two
brackets or a bracket with channel and plastic bumpers
to securely hold the container in position during system
discharge. Each container requires two bracket assemblies
which are supplied as part of the pilot container assembly.
TABLE 3-58: BRACKET DETAILS

Dimensions
Part No. Bracket (Width x Height)
30621310 3 L B
racket assembly 208 mm x 164 mm
- DOT
13 L B
racket Assembly
3 L (DOT) and 13 L (TPED, PESO) Pilot Container Bracket
- TPED, PESO
(Part No. 30621310)
30620310 3 L B
racket Assembly 160 mm x 143 mm E001056
- TPED
441408 13 L B
racket Assembly 292 mm x 203 mm
- DOT
30625010 50 L B
racket Assembly 303 mm x 273 mm
- DOT, TPED, PESO File EX4510 Vol. 29 Sec. 1 ILL-291
Container mounting type

Wall mounted – 3 L
Floor mounted – 13 L and 50 L
CHANNEL LENGTH
50 L (DOT, TPED, and PESO) Pilot Container Bracket

(Part No. 30625010)
E001057
3 L (TPED) Pilot Container Bracket

(Part No. 30620310)
E000932
13 L (DOT) Pilot Container Bracket

(Part No. 441408)
E001058
FIGURE 3-129
PILOT CONTAINER BRACKETS
E001058
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DECOMPRESSION SCREW VENT VALVE

(Part No. 30027301) (Part No. 302700014)
After actuation of a container bank, the pneumatic actuation The vent valve allows for the safe venting of Novec 1230
line retains pressure from the pilot container. To enable fluid to the atmosphere if it becomes trapped within a closed
the safe release of the pressure, a decompression screw pipework system. The vent valve is fitted with two limit
fits to the last pneumatic actuator tee using either a 1/4 in. switches to monitor a valve open or a valve closed indication.
BSPP swivel female x 1/4 in. BSPP fixed female adapter The valve is provided with a locking bracket into which a
(309013050) and a 1/4 in. Dowty seal (Part No. 31199816) or standard padlock may be fitted.
a 6 mm stud coupling x 1/4 in. fixed female adapter (Part No.
30880063) and a 1/4 in. Dowty seal (Part No. 31199816).
68 mm
1/2 in.NPT
1/4" NPT
FIGURE 3-130
DECOMPRESSION SCREW FIGURE 3-131
E000922
VENT VALVE
E000923

Body: Brass Ball valve body: 1.0737
Internal parts: Nitrile Ball valve connection: 3/4 in. NPT female
Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP Vent valve assembly 1/2 in. NPT female
Test pressure: 420 bar Connection: (3/4 in. x 1/2 in. adaptor both
Maximum working 140 bar sides)
pressure: Operation voltage: 250 VAC (50 Hz) / 24 VDC
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C Ingress Protection class: IP67 and IP69K
range: Switch indication: Valve open (OPEN)
Marking: Manufacturer, Part No., UL, Serial Valve closed (CLOSED)
No., Working Pressure
Part number marked 30027301 pressure:
on component:
Method of marking: Engraving range:
Approvals and listings: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM Part number marked on 302700014
Overall size: 68.0 mm x 23.5 mm (Hex 22.0 mm) component:
Weight: 0.23 kg Approvals and listings: LPCB, VdS, UL, and FM
Additional feature: Pad lockable
Weight: 2.3 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
VENT VALVE (Continued)
For installations utilizing selector valves, a manifold burst
disc or pressure relief valve must be installed to allow for
the safe venting of excess pressure to the atmosphere for
closed sections of pipe. A manual bypass should be installed
to allow the venting of trapped pressure to the atmosphere.
The manual bypass must be padlocked in the closed position
under normal operating conditions and the monitoring switch
wired to the panel to indicate the open or closed status of the
bypass valve.
FIGURE 3-132
MANIFOLD VENT VALVE AND BURST DISC
INSTALLATION
E001011
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANUAL RELEASE CAUTION PLATE

The manual release caution plate provides instructions to
personnel on the use of manual controls. One plate is to
be fixed adjacent to all positions from where Novec 1230
fluid can be released manually. Four 4 mm fixing holes are
required.
BLACK TEXT
RED BACKGROUND
RED TEXT
BLACK TEXT
2 mm BLACK
BORDER
RED TEXT
5 mm
DIA 4 mm
FIGURE 3-133
MANUAL RELEASE CAUTION PLATE
025184
TABLE 3-59: MANUAL RELEASE CAUTION PLATES

Part No. Language
Material: White PVC
314.207.003 English
Sign size: 312 mm x 75 mm
Font type: Helvetica medium 314.207.007 Polish
Colors: Black, white, and red 314.207.079 French
Language: English, Polish, and French 314.207.066 Spanish
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DOOR CAUTION PLATE - LOCK-OFF

The door caution plate (lock-off) provides instructions to
personnel who may enter an area protected with Novec
1230 fluid. This version of the caution plate is used when
it is necessary to instruct personnel to place the system on
manual control before entering the protected area. One plate
is to be fixed to all entrance doors into an Novec 1230 fluid
protected area. Four 4 mm fixing holes are required.
WHITE
YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLACK TEXT
2 mm BLACK
BORDER
5 mm
4 HOLES
DIA 4 mm
FIGURE 3-134
DOOR CAUTION PLATE - LOCK-OFF
025185
TABLE 3-60: DOOR CAUTION PLATES (LOCK-OFF)

Part No. Language
Material: White PVC 314.207.002 English
Sign size: 210 mm x 210 mm 314.207.008 Polish
Font type: Helvetica medium
314.207.080 French
Colors: Black, white, yellow, and red
Language: English, Polish, and French 314.207.067 Spanish
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
DOOR CAUTION PLATE - NO LOCK-OFF

The door caution plate (no lock-off) provides instructions
to personnel who may enter an area protected with Novec
1230 fluid. This version of the caution plate is used when it is
permitted to leave the system on automatic control even while
the area is occupied. One plate is to be fixed to all entrance
doors into an Novec 1230 fluid protected area. Four 4 mm
fixing holes are required.
WHITE
YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLACK TEXT
2 mm BLACK
BORDER
5 mm
4 HOLES
DIA 4 mm
FIGURE 3-135
DOOR CAUTION PLATE - NO LOCK-OFF
025186
TABLE 3-61: DOOR CAUTION PLATES (NO LOCK-OFF)

Part No. Language
314.207.001 English
Material: White PVC
314.207.009 Polish
Sign size: 210 mm x 210 mm
Font type: Helvetica medium 314.207.081 French
Colors: Black, white, yellow, and red 314.207.068 Spanish
Language: English, Polish, and French
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
NOTES:
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
INSTALLATION
This section provides general guidance on the installation of
SAPPHIRE fire fighting systems. TABLE 4-1: CONTAINER BRACKET MOUNTING HEIGHTS
Height Height from
from floor floor to
NOTICE
Container to bracket bracket
Number
It is of paramount importance that persons size Dia. (A) (B)
of back
involved in the installation of this equipment L mm channels mm mm
have had previous experience in the instal- Seamless containers
lation of this or similar equipment.
15 204 2 130 450
30 229 2 300 710
Install this equipment in accordance with an approved
45 267 2 300 820
drawing. It is not permitted for changes to equipment,
pipework, or nozzle positions to be made without the authority 60 267 2 300 1130
of the Suppression Systems Design Engineer. 120 360 2 300 1190
150 360 2 300 1530
General installation steps
180 406 2 300 1370
1. Check all equipment delivered against the dispatch
note. Notify the suppression stores immediately if any PESO seamless containers
discrepancy occurs between the equipment received and 34 267 2 160 600
that indicated on the Suppression Supply Note. 80 267 2 400 1510
2. It is usual, but not essential, for the installation to start with 120 356 2 400 1315
the fitting of the containers. 120 406 2 400 980
140 406 2 400 1155
! CAUTION
150 356 2 400 1645
Make no attempt to move SAPPHIRE containers unless 180 406 2 400 1500
they are fitted with anti-recoil caps and valve bonnet caps. Welded containers
4.5 178 1 – 170
a. Fix the steel channel section to the wall or supporting
structure. 8 254 1 100 –
b. Place the container in position against the channel 16 254 2 150 320
section. 32 254 2 170 620
c. S
ecure the container to the channel using the steel 52 406 2 190 380
container strap. Install the container with the discharge 106 406 2 260 740
outlet to the left. See the following figure and table for
147 406 2 260 1070
container bracket height details.
180 406 2 260 1350
Note: Each container requires two sets of brackets with the exception of the
4.5 L and 8 L containers which only require one set. The height of the upper
bracket (A) is positioned a nominal 90 mm below the start of the curved
section of the container.
3. Remove the anti-recoil caps and install the pipework from

the container to the nozzle positions in accordance with the
approved installation drawing.
! CAUTION
For 180° nozzles, ensure that the nozzles are correctly
A
B
A oriented to achieve the correct area coverage. Ensure that all
nozzles are adequately supported to prevent movement and to
protect against the reaction force of a system discharge.
B
A
B
FIGURE 4-1
CONTAINER BRACKET LOCATION
E001009
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
General installation steps (Continued)

4. Install multiple containers in the following sequence: 13. Fit any ancillary equipment into the pneumatic actuation
a. M
ount the back channels of the container brackets tubing, such as pressure switches and pressure trips.
to the wall at the appropriate heights, using suitable a. Where the ATEX low pressure switch is required, fix
fixtures. The fixtures are not supplied. the ATEX low pressure switch to the wall in close
b. P
osition the containers against the back channels proximity to the container. Connect to the 1/8 in. NPT
with the pressure gauge facing forward at the required female port of the container valve using copper tubing
spacing for the manifold ports. (recommended) or the flexible pilot hose. For further
details, see the installation instructions in Section 3 -
c. Insert the container bracket and secure it with the bolts Low Pressure Switch - ATEX.
provided.
5. Install the manifold brackets. A typical manifold assembly ! CAUTION
consists of the manifold. Check valves, adjustable height
adaptors (optional), end caps, and reducing bush and Before commencing this installation procedure, ensure
plugs are installed separately. Where manifold brackets the appropriate fittings and tools are available for the
(Part No. 311.205.015, 311.205.010, 311.205.011 and connection of the ATEX low pressure switch to the
311700001) are utilised, ensure that the appropriate container valve low pressure switch port to minimise
height adjustment is available on the back channels. To any pressure loss.
install the manifold bracket, complete the following steps:
a. M
ount the two back vertical channels to the wall at the 14. When the pipework is complete with all of the nozzles and
appropriate height using suitable hardware. the ancillary equipment fitted, remove the valve bonnet
b. L
ocate and secure the cantilever brackets to each caps from the top of the subordinate container valves
channel using an M10 x 40 mm (3/8 UNC x 1 1/2 in.) and fit all pneumatic actuators. The firing pin must not
hex head screw and 10 mm long spring. Adjust the appear below the base of the actuator.
cantilever height as required and secure in position.
c. Position the manifold on the cantilever brackets.
! CAUTION
d. L
ocate the manifold brackets in the cantilever channel It is important to check that all of the actuators are in the
around the manifold and secure them with bolts. Fit the reset or unoperated position before fitting. Failure to do
end caps. this causes the container to discharge.
6. Install the manifold check valves using PTFE tape as the
sealing method and tighten securely. 15. Install the pneumatic actuation tubing between all master
7. If required, fit the adjustable height adaptor using PTFE and subordinate container actuators. The port on the
tape as the sealing method and tighten securely. valve of the master or sub-master containers to be used
for pneumatic actuation purposes is indicated on the
8. Remove the container valve outlet safety cap and attach valve drawings.
the discharge hose between the valve outlet and the
adjustable height adaptor or manifold check valve. Where
the adjustable height adaptor is utilised, adjust each ! CAUTION
adjustable height adaptor to allow for any variation in the
Make no attempt to remove other plugs in the valve body.
container height.
9. For safety, remove the discharge hose and replace the
16. Fit all caution and manual control point plates.
outlet safety caps while the pipe network is installed.
For details on manifold heights, see Section 3 - Manifold 17. Visually check the installation for completion in accor-
Bracket Assemblies. dance with the approved installation drawing.
10. O
n systems that use a remote pneumatic manual release, 18. Pressure test the pipework in accordance with ISO 14520
fix the manual pull box to the wall as indicated on the and EN 15004 which state the following:
approved installation drawing. “Unless the total piping contains not more than one
11. Install the pneumatic actuation tubing from the manual change in direction fitting between the storage container
pull box to the master container. and the discharge nozzle, and unless all piping has been
physically checked for tightness, the following tests shall
12. O
n systems using a remote mechanical manual release,
be carried out.
install the conduit and the manual pull box as indicated on
the approved installation drawing. All changes in direction • All open-ended piping shall be pneumatically tested in
must be accomplished using corner pulleys. Feed the a closed circuit for a period of 10 minutes at 3 bar. After
wire rope through the conduit system and make ends off 10 minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20% of
using the cable clamps. the test pressure.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
General installation steps (Continued)

Step 18 (Continued)
• All closed-section pipework and pipework upstream
of pressure-reducing devices shall be hydrostatically
tested to a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure for two minutes during which there shall be no
leakage. On completion of the test, the pipework shall
be purged to remove moisture.
It is recommended that hydrostatic testing be carried out
at the manufacturer’s works where practicable.
! WARNING
Pneumatic pressure testing creates a potential risk of
injury to personnel in the area, as a result of airborne
projectiles if a rupture of the piping system occurs. Before
conducting the pneumatic pressure test, the protected
area shall be evacuated and appropriate safeguards shall
be provided for test personnel.
A test using nitrogen, or a suitable alternative, shall

be performed on the piping network to verify that flow
is continuous and that the piping and nozzles are
unobstructed.” (ISO 14520 and EN 15004)
19. If a requirement at the time of installation, carry out
a purge of the pipework using CO2 from a handheld
portable suppressant connected to the pipework at the
container position. The container must be disconnected
from the pipework during this operation.
If a purge of the pipework is not required or possible at

this stage, ensure that this is reported to the Suppression
Systems Design Engineer so that arrangements can be
made for this to be done at the commissioning stage.
20. Carry out a pressure test on the pneumatic actuation
tubing using a foot pump or a regulated nitrogen supply
(4 bar) to confirm satisfactory operation of the pneumatic
actuators. Ensure that any pressure switches or pressure
trips connected, do not cause unwanted or unexpected
signals or events.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
INSTALLING THE PILOT CONTAINER COMPONENTS
Determine the actuation container requirements

Pilot actuation line limitations: The volume of gas in the pilot Pilot without Sub-Master: The pilot container pneumatically
container limits the pilot actuation system, along with the actuates all containers in the container bank.
requirement to actuate the last container, within one second Single Hazard: Actuation without selector valves.
of the first. The volume of gas determines the number of
actuation components, selector valves, and the length of Multiple Hazard: Actuation with selector valves.
tubing allowed when designing a system. Note: When utilizing selector valves, determine the maximum equivalent
length of the pilot actuation line for each hazard. The pressure travels through
Master Container Actuation: When you manually or electri- all tubing until a non-return (check) valve stops the flow of gas. The maximum
cally actuate the master container, the remaining subordinate equivalent length shall be used to determine the pilot container size.
containers pneumatically actuate. Table 4-2 lists the total actuation line length allowed for each
Pilot with Sub-Master: The pilot container pneumatically actuation source.
actuates the master container in the container bank. The
master container then pneumatically actuates the subordinate
containers.
TABLE 4-2: MAXIMUM ACTUATION LINE LENGTH

Maximum actuation line for 6 mm copper tubing
Actuation source (m)
Master container - 4.5 L to 180 L 30
Pilot container 3 L 60
(without sub-master container or with selector valve)
Pilot container 3 L (with sub-master container) 90
(pilot to sub-master)
+ 30
(sub-master to last subordinate)
(with sub-master container) (pilot to sub-master)
+ 30
(with sub-master container) (pilot to sub-master)
+ 30
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)

The following table lists the equivalent length for each
actuation component that is needed to calculate the total
equivalent length for the actuation line. The sum of the equiv-
alent length for the actuation line must be less than the limit
from Table 4-2.
TABLE 4-3: EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF ACTUATION

COMPONENTS USING 6 mm COPPER TUBING
Equivalent
Component length (EQ) m
A. P
neumatic actuator and tee for flexible hose 0.30
B. P
neumatic actuator and tee for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.23
C. Pneumatic actuator and tee for copper tubing (1/4 in.) 0.23
D. 710 mm flexible hose 1.70
E. 812 mm flexible hose 2.00
F. 1070 mm flexible hose 2.60
G. S
tud coupling for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.02
H. Stud coupling for copper tubing (1/4 in.) 0.02
I. 25 mm to 80 mm selector valve 14.0
J. 100 mm selector valve 32.0
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Determine the actuation container requirements Example 1: Single hazard systems - metric
The following calculation determines the total equivalent The system shown in the following figure includes six
actuation (ELTotal) line length, which is used to calculate the SAPPHIRE containers with one protected hazard. The equiv-
required pilot container size for proper actuation. alent length of actuation hardware required to discharge
ELTotal = (A/B/C) Number of actuator tee and actuation line containers into the hazard must be determined to select the
tee x EQ appropriate actuation source for the system.
+ (D/E/F) Number of flexible hose x EQ HAZARD
+ (G/H) Number of stud couplings x EQ The hazard is protected with six SAPPHIRE containers. The
length of actuation tubing (Dia 6 mm copper tubing) from the
+(I/J) Number of selector valves x EQ actuation source (A) to the first container (B) is 2.0 m. There
+ Total length of actuation line (6 mm copper tubing) is a single 1/4 in. flexible hose dedicated to the discharge
pressure switch. The tubing between the containers is made
Where EQ = equivalent length value for each item.
of Dia 6 mm copper tubing.
TUBE
FIGURE 4-2
EXAMPLE 1 - SINGLE HAZARD SYSTEM
010776
Calculate the total equivalent length (ELTOTAL) of the pilot
actuation line.
TABLE 4-4: EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF PILOT

ACTUATION LINE (EXAMPLE 1)
Component EQ (m) Quantity Total (m)
Length of 6 mm copper tubing (5 x 500 mm) + (6 x 30 mm) + 2 m N/A 4.68 4.68
= 4.68 m (15.35 ft)
Pneumatic actuator and tee for flexible hose 0.30 – –
Pneumatic actuator and tee for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.23 6 1.38
Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 710 mm 1.70 – –
Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 1070 mm 2.60 1 2.60
Stud coupling for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.02 6 0.12
25 mm to 80 mm selector valve 14.00 – –
100 mm selector valve 32.00 – –
ELTotal 8.78
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Example 1: Single hazard systems (Metric, Continued) Example 2: Single hazard systems
The equivalent length is calculated by summing the total The system shown in the following figure is made up of
equivalent length for each component within the system. six SAPPHIRE containers with one protected hazard and
Total Length6mmCopperTube = 4.68 m includes a sub-master container. The highest total equivalent
length of actuation hardware required to discharge containers
Total EQPneumaticActuator = 0.23 x 6 = 1.38 m into the hazard must be determined to select the appropriate
Total EQ1070mmFlex hose = 2.60 x 1 = 2.60 m actuation source for the system.
Total EQStudCoupling = 0.02 x 6 = 0.12 m HAZARD
ELTotal = 4.68 + 1.38 + 2.60 + 0.12 = 8.78 m The hazard is protected with six SAPPHIRE containers. The
length of actuation tubing (Dia 6 mm copper tubing) from the
actuation source (A) to the first container (B) is 3.0 m. One
RESULT 1/4 in. flexible hose is dedicated to the discharge pressure
Based on Table 4-2, the 3 L pilot container is the switch. The tubing between the containers is 1/4 in. flexible
appropriate minimum pilot container size. hose.
Options per the calculated equivalent length: a 13 L or
50 L pilot container.
SUMMARY
Based on the limitations from Table 4-2, any actuation
sources can be used because ELTotal is less than the
maximum actuation length for all sources.
Note: If the total equivalent length for this system had totaled to 66 m, a 3 L
pilot container with a sub-master container would be required.
TUBE
FIGURE 4-3
EXAMPLE 2 - SINGLE HAZARD SYSTEM
010777
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Example 2 (Continued)
actuation line.

ACTUATION LINE (EXAMPLE 2)

Length of 6 mm copper tubing N/A 3 3.00
Pneumatic actuator and tee for flexible hose 0.30 6 1.80
Pneumatic actuator and tee for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.23 – –
Stud coupling for copper tubing (6 mm) 0.02 1 0.02
25 mm to 80 mm selector valve 14.00 – –
100 mm selector valve 32.00 – –
ELTotal 15.92
The equivalent length is calculated by summing the total

equivalent length for each component within the system.
Total Length6mmCopperTube = 3.00
Total EQPneumaticActuator = 0.30 x 6 = 1.80 m
Total EQ700mmFlexHose = 1.70 x 5 = 8.50 m
Total EQ1070mmFlexHose = 2.60 x 1 = 2.60 m
Total EQStudCoupling = 0.02 x 1 = 0.02 m
ELTotal = 3
.00 + 1.80 + 8.50 + 2.60 + 0.02 = 1
5.92 m
RESULT
Based on Table 4-2, the 3 L pilot container is the
appropriate minimum pilot container size.
50 L pilot container could be used.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Example 3: Multiple hazard systems

The system shown in the following figures include ten
SAPPHIRE containers protecting two hazards. Each
hazard (H1 and H2) must be calculated to find the highest
total equivalent length for selection of an appropriate pilot
container.
TUBE
FIGURE 4-4
EXAMPLE 3 - MULTIPLE HAZARD SYSTEM (H1)
010778
TUBE
FIGURE 4-5
EXAMPLE 3 - MULTIPLE HAZARD SYSTEM (H2)
010779
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
INSTALLING THE PILOT CONTAINER COMPONENTS H2 - HAZARD TWO

(Continued) Hazard Two is protected with all ten SAPPHIRE containers
using a single 50 mm (2 in.) selector valve. There is 3.0 m
of actuation tubing from the pilot container to the selector
valve (A to E) and 2.0 m from the selector valve to the first
Example 3 (Continued)
container (F to G).
H1 - HAZARD ONE
Hazard One is protected with five SAPPHIRE containers actuation line.
using a single 40 mm (1 1/2 in.) selector valve. There is
4.0 m of actuation tubing from the pilot container to the
selector valve (A to B) and 5.0 m from the selector valve to
ACTUATION LINE EXAMPLE 3-H2
the first container (C to D).
actuation line. Length of 6 mm copper N/A 9.8 9.8
tubing
TABLE 4-6: EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF PILOT Pneumatic actuator and 0.30 – –
ACTUATION LINE EXAMPLE 3-H1 tee for flexible hose
Component EQ (m) Quantity Total (m) Pneumatic actuator and 0.23 10 2.3
Length of 6 mm copper N/A 11.15 11.15 tee for copper tubing
tubing (6 mm)
Pneumatic actuator and 0.30 – – Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 1.70 – –
tee for flexible hose 710 mm
Pneumatic actuator and 0.23 5 1.15 Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 2.00 – –
tee for copper tubing 815 mm
(6 mm) Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 2.60 – –
Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 1.70 – – 1070 mm
710 mm Stud coupling for copper 0.02 10 0.2
Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 2.00 – – tubing (6 mm)
815 mm 25 mm to 80 mm 14.0 1 14.0
Flexible hose 1/4 in. x 2.60 – – selector valve
1070 mm 100 mm selector valve 32.0 – –
Stud coupling for copper 0.02 5 0.10 ELTotal 26.30
tubing (6 mm)
25 mm to 80 mm 14.00 1 14.00 The equivalent length is calculated by summing the total
selector valve equivalent length for each component within the system.
100 mm selector valve 32.00 – – Total Length6mmCopperTube = 9.80 m
ELTotal 26.40 Total EQPneumaticActuator = 0.23 x 10 = 2.30 m
The equivalent length is calculated by summing the total Total EQSelectorValve = 14.0 x 1 = 14.0 m
equivalent length for each component within the system.
ELTotal = 2
.30 + 9.80 + 0.20 + 14.0 = 26.30 m
Total Length6mmCopperTube = 11.15 m
Total EQPneumaticActuator = 0.23 x 5 = 1.15 m
RESULT
Hazard One has the longest total equivalent actuation line
Total EQSelectorValve = 14.0 x 1 = 14.0 m length (26.40 m), meaning the pilot container should be
ELTotal = 1.15 + 11.15 + 0.1 + 14.0 = 26.40 m sized based on this value. Based on Table 4-2, the 3 L pilot
container is the appropriate minimum pilot container size.
50 L pilot container could be used.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 5 – COMMISSIONING
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
COMMISSIONING 9. If any devices fail to operate or pressure falls by more

This section provides guidance on the commissioning of than 10% over 60 seconds, investigate and rectify the
SAPPHIRE Fire Fighting Systems and is in the form of a problem. Repeat the test procedure until you achieve a
checklist to be completed by the person carrying out the satisfactory outcome.
commissioning. The commissioning schedule is intended to 10. Before disconnecting the test kit, increase the pressure in
cover the majority of the equipment or control configurations the activation line to 117 bar and close the test container
likely to be encountered. However, where appropriate it may valve. Check after 60 seconds that the pressure has not
be necessary to carry out additional checks to those listed. fallen by more than 10%.
For the system to comply fully with EN 15004 the following
Checking the operation of the standard electrical
components (supplied by others) need to conform to the
actuator, pneumatic actuator, and manual actuator
standards indicated. These products are outside the scope
of this manual therefore the installer must ensure that the 1. All of these devices must be removed from the containers
products used fully comply with the necessary standards: for the purpose of testing.
• Fire detection components: EN 54 or EN 12094, whichever 2. Electrical, manual, or pneumatic operation of these devices
applies. is confirmed by the movement of the central pin.
• Manual operating devices: EN 12094-3 3. After testing* and before fitting to the container valve,
ensure that the central pin is in the fully retracted position.
• Electrical automatic control and delay devices: EN 12094-1
Resetting of all actuators requires manual force to be
• Stop devices: EN 12094-3 applied.
All sections must be completed, if not applicable, write N/A in Note: *Test the pneumatic actuator at 4 bar for 25 and 42 bar systems and at
the appropriate space. 5.2 bar for 70 bar SAPPHIRE PLUS systems.
It is essential that persons carrying out commissioning of

SAPPHIRE Fire Fighting Systems are experienced in the ! CAUTION
commissioning of this type of equipment.
Failure to reset the actuators correctly will result in the imme-
Container pressures adjusted for temperature are to be
diate and potentially hazardous release of Novec 1230 fluid.
checked for compliance using Tables 5-1 to 5-4.
The schedule is to be completed by the responsible person
during the commissioning of all new systems and those that Checking the operation of the ATEX electrical actuator
have been modified. 1. Read Section 3 - Electrical Actuator (Flameproof [ATEX])
Pneumatic actuation tubing is to be tested in accordance with before proceeding.
the procedure outlined below, using Pneumatic Test Kit Part 2. On removable units, remove the electrical actuator from
No. 300.203.004. the valve ensuring that the Schrader assembly remains in
place on the container valve.
Test procedure for the pneumatic actuation tubing
3. Operate the actuator. Operation is confirmed when a click
1. Ensure that all pneumatic actuators are removed from the is heard. Ensure the actuator remains open for at least 20
containers. seconds.
2. Be aware that by pressurising the pneumatic actuation 4. Upon removal of the power source, the actuator should
tubing, all pressure actuated devices including pressure reset. By attempting to blow through the brass nut
switches will operate. Ensure that the consequences of this assembly and being unable to do so confirms that the
are recognised, otherwise unexpected alarms or signalling actuator has been reset. If any doubt exists about the
could occur. resetting of any device, do not fit it to the container valve
3. Disconnect the actuation tubing from the adaptor fitted into and contact the fire suppression Product Manager.
the master or sub-master container valve actuation port. Upon the completion of the commissioning of the system,
4. Connect the end of the hose from the Pneumatic Test Kit confirm in writing, any defects or actions arising to the respon-
to the end of the actuation tubing. Ensure the joint is tight. sible person in customer services or the client’s represen-
5. Set the outlet pressure on the test kit regulator to 4 bar. tative, as applicable.
6. Open the test container valve to allow nitrogen at 4 bar into A copy of the completed commissioning schedule and any
the pneumatic actuation tubing for a period of 10 seconds correspondence arising from defects or outstanding actions
and then close the valve. must be retained in the project file.
7. Check that all pneumatic actuators, pressure switches, and As soon as reasonably practicable after commissioning,
trips have operated. ensure a user manual and as Installed drawings are sent to
the client’s representative and such transmission is recorded
8. Check after 60 seconds that the pressure in the pneumatic and confirmed in writing.
actuation line has not fallen by more than 10%.
Providing the container, after allowing for temperature, is
showing at least the minimum pressure shown in Tables 5-1
to 5-4 the system retains its fire suppression capabilities. Any
containers below this minimum pressure should be reported
to the distributor for rectification.
SECTION 5 – COMMISSIONING SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
COMMISSIONING (Continued)
Temp. Pressure Temp. Pressure Temp. Pressure Temp. Pressure

ºC bar ºC bar ºC bar ºC bar
-20 20.2 18 24.8 -20 33.3 18 40.6
-19 20.3 19 24.9 -19 33.5 19 40.8
-18 20.4 20 25.0 -18 33.6 20 41.0
-17 20.5 21 25.1 -17 33.8 21 41.2
-16 20.7 22 25.2 -16 34.0 22 41.4
-15 20.8 23 25.4 -15 34.2 23 41.6
-14 20.9 24 25.5 -14 34.4 24 41.8
-13 21.0 25 25.6 -13 34.6 25 41.9
-12 21.1 26 25.7 -12 34.8 26 42.1
-11 21.3 27 25.8 -11 35.0 27 42.3
-10 21.4 28 26.0 -10 35.2 28 42.5
-9 21.5 29 26.1 -9 35.4 29 42.7
-8 21.6 30 26.2 -8 35.6 30 42.9
-7 21.7 31 26.3 -7 35.8 31 43.1
-6 21.9 32 26.4 -6 36.0 32 43.3
-5 22.0 33 26.6 -5 36.2 33 43.5
-4 22.1 34 26.7 -4 36.3 34 43.7
-3 22.2 35 26.8 -3 36.5 35 43.9
-2 22.3 36 26.9 -2 36.7 36 44.1
-1 22.5 37 27.1 -1 36.9 37 44.3
0 22.6 38 27.2 0 37.1 38 44.5
1 22.7 39 27.3 1 37.3 39 44.6
2 22.8 40 27.4 2 37.5 40 44.8
3 22.9 41 27.5 3 37.7 41 45.0
4 23.1 42 27.7 4 37.9 42 45.2
5 23.2 43 27.8 5 38.1 43 45.4
6 23.3 44 27.9 6 38.3 44 45.6
7 23.4 45 28.0 7 38.5 45 45.8
8 23.6 46 28.1 8 38.7 46 46.0
9 23.7 47 28.3 9 38.9 47 46.2
10 23.8 48 28.4 10 39.1 48 46.4
11 23.9 49 28.5 11 39.2 49 46.6
12 24.0 50 28.6 12 39.4 50 46.8
13 24.2 51 28.7 13 39.6 51 47.0
14 24.3 52 28.9 14 39.8 52 47.2
15 24.4 53 29.0 15 40.0 53 47.3
16 24.5 54 29.1 16 40.2 54 47.5
17 24.6 55 29.2 17 40.4 55 47.7
TABLE 5-1: PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CHART FOR TABLE 5-2: PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CHART FOR
FILLING AND INSPECTION OF 25 BAR SYSTEMS FILLING AND INSPECTION OF 41 BAR WELDED
CONTAINER SYSTEMS
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Temp. Pressure Temp. Pressure

ºC bar ºC bar
-20 34.3 18 41.6
-19 34.5 19 41.8
-18 34.6 20 42.0
-17 34.8 21 42.2
-16 35.0 22 42.4
-15 35.2 23 42.6
-14 35.4 24 42.8
-13 35.6 25 42.9
-12 35.8 26 43.1
-11 36.0 27 43.3
-10 36.2 28 43.5
-9 36.4 29 43.7
-8 36.6 30 43.9
-7 36.8 31 44.1
-6 37.0 32 44.3
-5 37.2 33 44.5
-4 37.3 34 44.7
-3 37.5 35 44.9
-2 37.7 36 45.1
-1 37.9 37 45.3
0 38.1 38 45.5
1 38.3 39 45.6
2 38.5 40 45.8
3 38.7 41 46.0
4 38.9 42 46.2
5 39.1 43 46.4
6 39.3 44 46.6
7 39.5 45 46.8
8 39.7 46 47.0
9 39.9 47 47.2
10 40.1 48 47.4
11 40.2 49 47.6
12 40.4 50 47.8
13 40.6 51 48.0
14 40.8 52 48.2
15 41.0 53 48.3
16 41.2 54 48.5
17 41.4 55 48.7
TABLE 5-3: PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CHART FOR

FILLING AND INSPECTION OF 42 BAR SYSTEMS
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Fill density: Fill density: Fill density: Fill density:

1.40 kg/L 1.35 kg/L 1.40 kg/L 1.35 kg/L
Temp. Pressure Pressure Temp. Pressure Pressure
ºC bar bar ºC bar bar
-20 59.4 59.4 24 71.1 71.1
-19 59.7 59.7 25 71.3 71.3
-18 59.9 59.9 26 71.6 71.6
-17 60.2 60.2 27 71.9 71.9
-16 60.5 60.5 28 72.1 72.1
-15 60.7 60.7 29 72.4 72.4
-14 61.0 61.0 30 72.7 72.7
-13 61.3 61.3 31 72.9 72.9
-12 61.5 61.5 32 73.2 73.2
-11 61.8 61.8 33 73.4 73.4
-10 62.1 62.1 34 73.7 73.7
-9 62.3 62.3 35 74.0 74.0
-8 62.6 62.6 36 74.2 74.2
-7 62.8 62.8 37 74.5 74.5
-6 63.1 63.1 38 74.8 74.8
-5 63.4 63.4 39 75.0 75.0
-4 63.6 63.6 40 75.3 75.3
-3 63.9 63.9 41 75.6 75.6
-2 64.2 64.2 42 75.8 75.8
-1 64.4 64.4 43 76.1 76.1
0 64.7 64.7 44 76.4 76.4
1 65.0 65.0 44.1 76.4 76.4
2 65.2 65.2 45 80.2 76.6
3 65.5 65.5 46 84.6 76.9
4 65.8 65.8 47 89.1 77.2
5 66.0 66.0 48 93.5 77.4
6 66.3 66.3 49 97.9 77.7
7 66.6 66.6 50 102.3 78.0
8 66.8 66.8
9 67.1 67.1
10 67.4 67.4
11 67.6 67.6
12 67.9 67.9
13 68.1 68.1
14 68.4 68.4
15 68.7 68.7
16 68.9 68.9
17 69.2 69.2
18 69.5 69.5
19 69.7 69.7
20 70.0 70.0
21 70.3 70.3
22 70.5 70.5
23 70.8 70.8
TABLE 5-4: PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CHART FOR

FILLING AND INSPECTION OF 70 BAR SYSTEMS
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SAPPHIRE 25 AND 42 BAR DEVELOPED PRESSURE CHART

(NOVEC 1230 FLUID, 25 AND 42 BAR AT 20 ºC)
42 BAR
MAX. FILL DENSITY: 1.0 kg/L
PRESSURE
(bar)
25 BAR
MAX. FILL DENSITY: 1.2 kg/L
TEMPERATURE (ºC)
FIGURE 5-1
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE GRAPH FOR NOVEC 1230
FLUID SUPER-PRESSURISED WITH NITROGEN TO
25 BAR AND 42 BAR
SAPPHIREPLUS
SAPPHIRE PLUSDEVELOPED
DEVELOPEDPRESSURE
PRESSURECHART
CHART
(NOVEC
(NOVEC1230 FLUID,
TM 1230, 7070bar
BARat AT 20 ºC)
20ºC)
110
[1595]
FILL DENSITY: 1 .4 kg/L
3
Fill density: 1.40(87.4
kg/L lb/ft )
87.4 lb/ft³
100
[1560]
FILL DENSITY: 1 .35 kg/L

Fill density: (84.3 lb/ft3)
1.35 kg/L
84.3 lb/ft³
90
[1305]
PRESSURE
Pressure, bar [psi]
(bar [psi]) 80
[1160] Fill density: 0.30 kg/L
18.7 lb/ft³
FILL DENSITY: 0
.30 kg/L
(18.7 lb/ft3)
70
[1015]
60
[870]
50
[725] ‐20 ‐10[14] 0 [32] 10 [50] 20[68] 30[86] 40[104] 50[122] 60 [140] 70 [158]
[‐4]
TEMPERATURE (ºC
Temperature, ºC [ºF])
[ºF]
FIGURE 5-2
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE GRAPH FOR NOVEC 1230
FLUID SUPER-PRESSURISED WITH NITROGEN TO
70 BAR
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
NOTES:
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 6 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND TESTING

This section provides general guidance on the maintenance This section provides general guidance on the minimum
of SAPPHIRE Fire Fighting Systems. Maintenance frequency recommended level of inspections and testing of SAPPHIRE
as detailed should be carried out in accordance with what Fire Fighting Systems based upon the requirements of MSC.
is specified in MSC. 1/Circ. 1432 and MSC. 1/Circ. 1516, 1/Circ.1432 and MSC. 1/Circ. 1516 (as it applies to fixed gas
although local conditions may indicate a need for more fire extinguishing systems).
frequent visits. Servicing of SAPPHIRE suppression systems,
such as repairs, maintenance and modifications, shall be Weekly testing and inspections
carried out by technicians approved for they type of system Weekly inspections should be carried out to ensure that the
involved. They shall have the appropriate spare parts, pipe indicated actions are taken for the specified equipment:
layouts, and hydraulic/pneumatic data of the system.
• Verify all fixed fire suppression system control panel
The service and maintenance schedule (Section 8) is to be indicators are functional by operating the lamp/indicator test
completed during each visit and a copy held in the relevant switch.
project file for future reference.
• Verify all control and section valves are in the correct
Before carrying out any checks, ensure the suppression position.
system is isolated electrically and mechanically. Remove all
electrical and pneumatic actuators if fitted. Although MSC/Circ.1432 recommends that the pressure
gauges are checked monthly, the manufacturer recommends
Upon completion of all checks ensure all electrical/mechanical the following as a weekly action:
and pneumatic actuators are reset and refitted.
• Verify that containers fitted with pressure gauges are within
Table 5-1 to 5-4 from Section 5 - Commissioning are to be the correct range.
used to determine compliance with the relevant section of the
Maintenance Schedule. Monthly testing and inspections
Pneumatic actuation tubing is to be tested in accordance with Monthly inspections should be carried out to ensure that the
the procedure detailed in Section 5 - Commissioning. indicated actions are taken for the specified equipment:
Operation and resetting of electrical, pneumatic, and • Verify the installation is free from leakage.
manual actuators is to be checked as detailed in Section 5
- Commissioning. Annual testing and inspections
On completion of the work, obtain the signature of the Annual inspections should be carried out to ensure that the
customer’s representative on the visit record and leave a copy indicated actions are taken for the specified equipment:
with the customer. If any part of the system is left inoperable
• Visually inspect all accessible components for proper
note this clearly on the visit record and point it out to the
condition.
customer’s representative when signing.
• Externally examine all high pressure containers for evidence
Notes:
of damage or corrosion.
• All system hoses shall be examined annually for damage.
• Check the hydrostatic test date of all storage containers.
If visual examination shows any defect, the hose shall be
replaced. Flexible discharge hoses should be replaced after • Functionally test all fixed system audible and visual alarms.
five years. • Verify all control/section valves are in the correct position.
• T
he containers will be hydraulically pressure tested as • Check the connections of all pilot release piping and tubing
detailed in Section 8 - Appendix. for tightness.
• The container valve should be refurbished and the o-rings • Examine all flexible hoses in accordance with manufac-
and shuttle replaced after each discharge or when the turer’s recommendations.
container is hydrostatically pressure tested.
• Test all fuel shut-off controls connected to fire-protection
• The manifold check valves should also be replaced after 10 systems for proper operation.
years of service.
• The boundaries of the protected space should be visually
• The electrical actuator should also be replaced after 10 inspected to confirm that no modifications have been made
years or 25 years from the date of manufacture. See the to the enclosure that have created uncloseable openings
replace by date section on the label. that would render the system ineffective.
Note: See the replacement by date section on the label as newer electrical
• If containers are installed inside the protected space, verify
actuator models have an extended life cycle period of up to 25 years.
the integrity of the double release lines inside the protected
space, and check low pressure or circuit integrity monitors
on release cabinet, as applicable.
SECTION 6 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Two-year testing and inspections

Two-year inspections should be carried out to ensure that the
indicated actions are taken for the specified equipment:
• All high pressure suppression agents containers and
pilot containers should be weighed or have their contents
verified by other reliable means to confirm that the available
charge in each is above 95% of the nominal charge.
Containers containing less than 95% of the nominal charge
should be refilled.
• Blow dry compressed air or nitrogen through the discharge
piping or otherwise confirm the pipe work and nozzles are
clear of any obstructions. This may require the removal of
nozzles, if applicable.
Five-year service
At least once every five years, the following inspections
should be carried out for the specified equipment:
• Perform internal inspection of all control valves.
• Although MSC. 1/Circ. 1432 and MSC. 1/Circ. 1516
recommend that the flexible discharge hoses should be
replaced every ten years, the manufacturer recommends
this as a five year action.
At least once every five years, the following action should be
carried out:
• Replace the flexible discharge hoses.
Ten-year service
At least once every ten years, the following inspections
should be carried out for the specified equipment:
• Perform a hydrostatic test and internal examination of 10%
of the system’s suppression agent and pilot containers. If
one or more containers fail, a total of 50% of the onboard
containers should be tested. If further containers fail, all
containers should be tested.
At least once every ten years, the following actions should
also be carried out:
• Replace the manifold check valves.
• Replace the electrical actuators in accordance with the
replace by date specified on the electrical actuator label for
a 10 year life span.
Note: Newer electrical actuator models have an extended life cycle period of
up to 25 years.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 7 – COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
7. APPENDIX A: COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE (EXAMPLE)

CLIENT........................................................................................ COMMISSIONED BY..........................................................................
ADDRESS................................................................................... DATE...................................................................................................
PROJECT.................................................................................... PROJECT REF................................................................................... .

ADDRESS...................................................................................
....................................................................................................
PROTECTED AREA...................................................................
7.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Complete Notes

a. Advise all personnel working in or near to the protected area of possible audible or
visual alarms.
b. Advise the client of any equipment that will be switched off during the tests.
c. R
emeasure the protected area and confirm that the quantity of agent supplied is
adequate for the measured volume.
d. Check that the system has been installed in accordance with the drawings or note any
changes to the system against the drawings.
e. Before carrying out any further checks, ensure that the suppression system is isolated
electrically and mechanically. Remove all pneumatic actuators, if fitted.
7.2 ELECTRICAL CHECKLIST

7.2.1 Systems with main and reserve containers
a. Carry out the checks as described in Section 7.2.2, 7.2.3, or 7.2.4 for the main
container bank.
b. Carry out the checks as described in Section 7.2.2, 7.2.3, or 7.2.4 for the reserve
container bank.
7.2.2 Systems with automatic electrical detection (coincidence operation)

a. Place the system in automatic mode and check that the lamps are amber on the
control panel and on all status units.
b. Operate one detection zone.
c. Check that the fire alarm makes the correct sound.
d. Check that the suppressant release solenoid does not operate.
e. Switch the system to manual mode and check that the lamps are green on the control
panel and on all status and indicator units.
f. Operate the second detection zone.
g. Check that the suppressant release solenoid does not operate.
h. Switch the system to automatic mode with two detection zones still in alarm.
i. Check that the evacuation alarm makes the correct sound.
j. Check the A/C shutdowns.
k. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
l. Check the operation of the suppressant released pressure switch. Upon operation,
check that the red lamps are lit on the control panel and on all status units.
m. Reset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system.
n. Check the operation of each electrical manual release unit in turn.
o. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sounds.
p. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
q. Reset the system. Ensure any frangible washers are refitted to the manual release units.
r. If the system is in compliance with EN 15004, the fire detection components shall be
approved in accordance with the relevant part of EN 54 or EN 12094, whichever applies.
s. If the system is in compliance with EN 15004, the manual operating devices shall be
approved in accordance with EN 12094-3.
t. If
the system is in compliance with EN 15004, the electrical automatic control and delay
devices shall be approved in accordance with EN 12094-1.
SECTION 7 – COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
7.2.3 Systems with automatic electrical detection (single zone operation) Complete Notes
a. P
lace the system in manual mode and check that the lamps are green on the control
panel and on all status units.
b. Operate the detection system.
e. Switch
the system to automatic mode with the detection system still in alarm and check
that the lamps are amber on the control panel and on all status units.
f. Check that the evacuation alarm makes the correct sound.
g. Check the A/C shutdowns.
h. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
i. Check the operation of the suppressant released pressure switch. Upon operation, check
that the red lamps are lit on the control panel and on all status and indicator units.
j. Reset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system
k. Check the operation of each electrical manual release unit in turn.
l. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sound.
m. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
n. Reset the system.
7.2.4 Systems with electrical manual release only.

a. Operate each electrical manual release unit in turn.
b. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sounds.
c. Check all A/C shutdowns.
d. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
e. Check
the operation of the suppressant released pressure switch. Upon operation,
check that the red lamps are lit on the control panel, if applicable, and on all status and
indicator units.
f. R
eset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system. Ensure that any
frangible washers are refitted to the manual release units.
7.2.5 Systems with hold switches.

a. W ith systems in a quiescent state, depress the hold switch. Check that a system fault
generates.
b. Initiate
the suppressant release sequence and during the delay period depress or hold
the switch. Check that the release sequence is interrupted and the solenoid does not
operate.
c. R
elease the hold switch and check that the preset time delay restarts from zero after
the preset time delay solenoid operates.
d. If system is in compliance with EN15004, the electrical automatic control and delay
devices shall be approved in accordance with EN 12094-1.
7.2.6 Systems with abort switches.

a. With
the system in a quiescent state, depress the abort switch. Check that the system
fault generates.
b. With
the system in automatic mode, initiate the suppressant release sequence and
during the delay period depress the abort switch. Check that the release sequence is
interrupted and the solenoid does not operate.
c. C
heck that the system status reverts to manual mode after the operation of the abort
switch.
d. If
the system is in compliance with EN 15004, the stop devices shall be approved in
accordance with EN 12094-3.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 7 – COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
7.2.7 Other items Complete Notes

a. Detach the solenoid flexible lead and check that a system fault generates.
b. Check that adequate and appropriate visual and audible warning devices are incor-
porated into the system.
c. R
ecord the time delay. This should not normally exceed 30 seconds but must be
adequate for the safe egress from the protected area.
d. Confirm that all A/C systems are linked into the suppression system to shutdown
before or upon the release of the gas and these have been checked.
7.3 Mechanical Checklist

7.3.1 Pipework/Nozzles
a. Check that the pipes and fittings are to the correct standard.
b. Check that pipework supports have been fitted at the correct intervals and are
adequate for purpose.
c. Check
that all nozzles are fitted in accordance with the design requirements and
are aimed in the correct alignment away from any obstructions or barriers that could
prevent the adequate distribution and mixing of the gas.
d. Check that all pipes and nozzles are adequately braced against the reaction to the
discharge.
e. Check that the pipework has been painted and correctly identified.
f. Purge the pipework to confirm that it is continuous and free from debris.
g. Remove the nozzles to check that they are free of debris following the purge.
h. Carry out a pressure test of the pipework in accordance with the requirements of
the applicable design standard.
i. Steps f, g, and h may be omitted from the commissioning procedure if written
evidence is available that the pipework was purged and pressure tested at an
appropriate stage during the installation.
j. Check that the dust caps are fitted, if required.
k. If the nozzle drill size is 3 mm or less, ensure that the nozzle filter is included.
7.3.2 Containers
a. Check that the containers are safe from mechanical damage, corrosion, or
unauthorised interference.
b. Check that the container brackets are fitted and all bolts are tightened.
c. Check that all containers are correctly fitted with instruction plates.
Record agent container details below

Novec 1230 Fluid
Containers Quantity Corrections
Serial Design Actual Pressure Temp Required Yes/
°
Area Protected Size (L) No. (kg) (kg) (bar) C No
SECTION 7 – COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
7.3.2 Containers (Continued)

Record pilot container details below
Containers
Serial Pilot Pressure Temp Corrections Required
°
Area Protected Size No. Gas (bar) C Yes/No
7.3.3 Ancillary Equipment Complete Notes

a. C
heck that all suppressant released pressure switches are fitted and are securely
fixed to the wall.
b. Check that all pressure trips are fitted in the correct plane and are securely fixed.
c. Check that the pneumatic actuation tubing is firmly fixed.
d. Check that all pneumatic actuation tubing connections are tight.
e. C heck that all pneumatic actuators, pressure switches, and pressure trips operate
at 4 bar for 25 bar and 42 bar systems or 5.2 bar for 70 bar systems using the
pneumatic test kit.
f. Check
the integrity of the pilot line, actuators, pressure switches, and pressure trips
by testing at 117 bar with the pneumatic test kit.
g. Check
that any dampers close and fibreglass curtains drop correctly to fully cover
any openings.
h. Check
that the supervisory pressure switches are fitted to the agent containers, if
required.
i. Check that the supervisory pressure switches are fitted to any pilot containers.
j. C
heck that the solenoid flexible lead is correctly fitted and secured using a fixing
screw.
k. U pon completion of all checks, ensure that the solenoid is reset. Fit the solenoid to
the master container and ensure it is correctly tightened.
l. On systems utilising a local manual actuator, check that the safety pin is fitted.
m. E nsure that the local manual actuator is reset. Fit it to the master container and
ensure it is correctly tightened.
n. Ensure
that the pneumatic actuators are reset. Fit them to the containers as
required and ensure they are correctly tightened.
o. Check that the door caution plates are fitted at all doors into the protected areas.
p. Check that the manual release caution plates are fitted at all manual control points.
7.3.4 Enclosure Integrity

a. Record whether a room integrity test has been performed on the protected area.
b. If not, visually inspect the perimeter of the area and record any leakage areas.
c. If so, record whether a satisfactory retention time was obtained.
7.3.5 Completion
a. On
completion, ensure that the client is informed of any outstanding actions on their
part and confirm these in writing.
b. O
btain the signature of the client’s representative on the handover certificate and
leave a copy for the client.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 8 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
8. APPENDIX B: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXAMPLE)

CLIENT........................................................................................ SERVICED BY....................................................................................
ADDRESS................................................................................... DATE...................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
PROJECT.................................................................................... PROJECT REF...................................................................................
ADDRESS...................................................................................
....................................................................................................
PROTECTED AREA...................................................................
8.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Complete Notes

a. Advise all personnel working in or near to the protected area of possible audible or
visual alarms.
b. Advise the client of any equipment that will be switched off during the tests.
c. Check
that the character of the hazard has not altered. If any doubt exists refer to the
Suppression System Design Engineer.
d. Before carrying out any further checks, ensure that the suppression system is isolated
electrically and mechanically. Remove all electrical or pneumatic actuators, if fitted.
ELECTRICAL CHECKLIST
8.1.1 Systems with main and reserve containers.
a. Carry out the checks in Section 8.1.2, 8.1.3, or 8.1.4 for the main container bank.
b. Carry out the checks in Section 8.1.2, 8.1.3, or 8.1.4 for the reserve container bank.
8.1.2 Systems with automatic electrical detection

(coincidence operation)
a. Place the system in automatic mode and check that the lamps are amber on the
control panel and on all status units.
b. Operate one detection zone.
e. Switch the system to manual mode and check that the lamps are green on the control
f. Operate the second detection zone.
g. Check that the suppressant release solenoid does not operate.
h. Switch the system to automatic mode with two detection zones still in alarm.
i. Check that the evacuation alarm makes the correct sound.
j. Check the A/C shutdowns.
k. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
l. Check the operation of the suppressant released pressure switch. Upon operation,
check that the red lamps are lit on the control panel and on all status units
m. Reset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system.
n. Check the operation of each electrical manual release unit in turn.
o. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sounds.
p. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
q. Reset the system. Ensure that any frangible washers are refitted to the manual release
units.
SECTION 8 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
8.1.3 Systems with automatic electrical detection

(single zone operation) Complete Notes
a. Place
the system in manual mode and check that the lamps are green on the control
b. Operate the detection system.
e. Switch
the system to automatic mode with the detection system still in alarm and
check that the lamps are amber on the control panel and on all status units.
f. Check that the evacuation alarm makes the correct sound.
g. Check the A/C shutdowns.
h. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
i. Check
check that the red lamps are lit on the control panel and on all status and indicator
units.
j. Reset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system.
k. Check the operation of each electrical manual release unit in turn.
l. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sounds.
m. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
n. R
eset the system. Ensure that any frangible washers are refitted to the manual release
units.
8.1.4 Systems with electrical manual release only.

a. Operate each electrical manual release unit in turn.
b. Check that the fire alarm and evacuation alarm make the correct sounds.
c. Check all A/C shutdowns.
d. Check that the suppressant release solenoid operates after the preset time delay.
e. Check
check that the red lamps are lit on the control panel, if applicable, and on all status
units.
f. R
eset the pressure switch and then reset the fire alarm system. Ensure that any
frangible washers are refitted to the manual release units.
8.1.5 Systems with hold switches.

a. With
systems in a quiescent state, depress the hold switch. Check that a system fault
generates.
b. Initiate
a suppressant release sequence and during the delay period, depress the
hold switch. Check that the release sequence is interrupted and the solenoid does not
operate.
c. R
elease the hold switch and check that the preset time delay restarts from zero and
after the preset time delay, the solenoid operates.
8.1.6 Systems with abort switches.

a. W
ith the system in quiescent state, depress the abort switch. Check that a system fault
generates.
b. W
ith the system in automatic mode, initiate the suppressant release sequence and
during the delay period, depress the abort switch. Check that the release sequence is
interrupted and the solenoid does not operate.
c. C
heck that the system status reverts to manual mode after the operation of the abort
switch.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 8 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
8.1.7 Other items Complete Notes

a. Detach the solenoid flexible lead and check a system fault generates.
b. Check that adequate and appropriate visual and audible warning devices are incorpo-
rated into the system.
c. R
ecord the time delay. This should not normally exceed 30 seconds but must be
adequate for the safe egress from the protected area.
d. Confirm that all A/C systems are linked into the suppression system to shutdown
before, or upon the release of the gas, and these have been checked.
8.2 Mechanical Checklist

8.2.1 Pipework/Nozzles
a. Check that the pipework has not been altered or tampered with since the last visit.
b. Check that the pipework supports have been fitted at the correct intervals and are
adequate for the purpose .
c. Check
that all nozzles are fitted in accordance with the design requirements and
are aimed in the correct alignment away from any obstructions or barriers that could
prevent the adequate distribution and mixing of the gas.
d. Check that all of the pipes and nozzles are adequately braced against the reaction to a
discharge.
e. Check that the pipework has been painted and is correctly identified.
f. If
any doubt exists concerning the integrity of the pipework, arrange for it to be purged.
Remove the nozzles to check that they are free of debris following the purge.
g. Check that dust caps are fitted, if required. If not, check the nozzles for signs of
blockage and if any doubt exists, purge the system.
8.2.2 Containers
a. Check that the containers are safe from mechanical damage, corrosion, or unautho-
rised interference.
b. Check that the container brackets are fitted and all bolts have been tightened.
c. Check that all containers are fitted with instruction plates correctly.
d. Take a note of any containers that require a hydrostatic test.
Record agent container details below

Novec 1230 Fluid
Containers Quantity Corrections
Serial Design Actual Pressure Temp Required Yes/
°
Area Protected Size (L) No. (kg) (kg) (bar) C No
SECTION 8 – SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
8.2.2 Containers (Continued)

Record pilot container details below
Containers
Serial Pilot Pressure Temp Corrections Required
°
Area Protected Size No. Gas (bar) C Yes/No
8.2.3 Ancillary Equipment Complete Remark

heck that all suppressant released pressure switches are fitted and are securely
a. C
fixed to the wall.
b. Check that all pressure trips are fitted in the correct plane and are securely fixed.
c. Check that the pneumatic actuation tubing is firmly fixed.
d. Check that all pneumatic actuation tubing connections are tight.
e. C heck that all pneumatic actuators, pressure switches, and pressure trips operate at
4 bar for 25 bar and 42 bar systems or 5.2 bar for 70 bar systems using the pneumatic
test kit.
f. Check
that any dampers close and the fibreglass curtains drop correctly to fully cover
any openings.
g. Check
that the solenoid flexible lead is correctly fitted and secured using a fixing screw.
h. U pon completion of all checks, ensure that the solenoid is reset. Fit the solenoid to the
master container and ensure it is correctly tightened.
i. Check that the safety pin is fitted to the local manual actuator.
j. E
nsure that the local manual actuator is reset and fit it to the master container and
ensure that it is correctly tightened.
k. On systems utilising a local manual actuator, check that the safety pin is fitted.
l. Ensure
that the pneumatic actuators are reset and fitted to the containers as required.
Ensure that they are correctly tightened.
m. Check that the door caution plates are fitted at all doors into the protected areas.
n. Check that the manual release caution plates are fitted at all manual control points.
8.2.4 Enclosure Integrity

a. Record whether a room integrity test has been performed on the protected area.
b. If not, visually inspect the perimeter of the area and record any leakage areas.
c. If so, record whether a satisfactory retention time was obtained.
8.2.5 Completion
a. On
completion of the visit, ensure that the client is informed of any equipment or
deficiencies requiring attention and that the details are recorded on the docket.
b. Obtain
the signature of the client’s representative on the docket and leave a copy for
the client.
SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression SECTION 9 – APPENDIX
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
NOVEC 1230
FIRE PROTECTION FLUID
SAFETY DATA SHEET
(SDS)
The SDS document in this section is a sample reference only.

Technically, SDS information is country and language specific.
Refer to the link below for the most recent and applicable version:
www.fireproductsds.com
Note: To find the SDS, enter the part number of a product containing agent.
SECTION 9 – APPENDIX SAPPHIRE Total Flood Fire Suppression
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Safety Data Sheet

This safety data sheet complies with the requirements of: Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Product name 3M™ Novec™ 1230 Fire Protection Fluid [FK-5-1-12]
SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking

1.1. Product Identifier
Product code 303207300

Product name 3M™ Novec™ 1230 Fire Protection Fluid [FK-5-1-12]
Pure substance/mixture Substance
1.2. Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Recommended use No information available
Uses advised against No information available
1.3. Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet
Company Name Macron Safety Systems (UK) Ltd.

Burlingham House, Hewett Road
Gapton Hall Industrial Estate, Great Yarmouth
United Kingdom NR31 0NN
Telephone: +44 (0) 1493 417600
For further information, please contact
psra@tycofp.com
1.4. Emergency telephone number
CHEMTREC 001-800-424-9300 or 001-703-527-3887
National Poisons Information Centre (NPIC)

+353-1809 2566
SECTION 2: Hazards identification
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Revision date 09-Sep-2020 Version 3

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Product code 303207300 /

Product name 3M™ Novec™ / PAGE 2 / 9
1230 Fire Protection Fluid
[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1. Classification of the substance or mixture

Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008
Gases Under Pressure - Compressed Gas - (H280)
2.2. Label Elements
Signal Word
WARNING
Hazard Statements
H280 - Contains gas under pressure; may explode if heated
Precautionary Statements
P410 + P403 - Protect from sunlight. Store in a well-ventilated place
2.3. Other Hazards

The components in this formulation do not meet the criteria for classification as PBT or vPvB.
SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients

3.1 Substances
Not Applicable
3.2 Mixture
Chemical name Index No EC No CAS No weight-% Classification REACH

according to registration
Regulation (EC) number
No. 1272/2008
[CLP]
1,1,1,2,2,4,5,5,5-Nonaf 606-108-00-X 436-710-6 756-13-8 90 - 100% Aquatic Chronic 3 01-0000018239-65
luoro-4-(trifluoromethyl (H412)
)-3-pentanone
Full text of H- and EUH-phrases: see section 16
SECTION 4: First aid measures

4.1. Description of first aid measures
General Advice Call 911 or emergency medical service. Remove and isolate contaminated clothing and
shoes.
Inhalation Remove to fresh air. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. (Get medical attention immediately
if symptoms occur.).
Skin contact Wash skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if irritation develops and persists.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Eye Contact Rinse thoroughly with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes, lifting lower and upper eyelids.
Consult a doctor.
Ingestion Rinse mouth. Do not induce vomiting without medical advice. If swallowed, call a poison
control centre or physician immediately.
Self-Protection of the First Aider Ensure that medical personnel are aware of the material(s) involved and take precautions to
protect themselves.
4.2. Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
Symptoms Unconsciousness.
4.3. Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
Note to doctors Treat symptomatically.
SECTION 5: Firefighting measures

5.1. Extinguishing media
Suitable Extinguishing Media

Use extinguishing measures that are appropriate to local circumstances and the surrounding environment.
Unsuitable Extinguishing Media

None
5.2. Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture
None known.
Hazardous Combustion Carbon oxides. Fluorinated oxides.

Products
5.3. Advice for firefighters
Wear self-contained breathing apparatus and protective suit. Use personal protective equipment as required.
SECTION 6: Accidental release measures

6.1. Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures
Ensure adequate ventilation, especially in confined areas.
Use personal protection recommended in Section 8.
Ventilate the area.
6.2. Environmental precautions
Prevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so. Prevent entry into waterways, sewers, basements or confined areas. See
Section 12 for additional Ecological Information.
6.3. Methods and material for containment and cleaning up
Methods for Containment Prevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Methods for Cleaning Up Pick up and transfer to properly labelled containers.
6.4. Reference to other sections
See section 8 for more information. See section 13 for more information.
SECTION 7: Handling and storage

7.1. Precautions for safe handling
Advice on safe handling

Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice.
General hygiene considerations

Do not eat, drink or smoke when using this product. Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice.
7.2. Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities
Storage Conditions
Keep containers tightly closed in a dry, cool and well-ventilated place.
7.3. Specific end use(s)
Specific Use(s)
Fire extinguishing agent.
Risk Management Methods (RMM)

The information required is contained in this Safety Data Sheet.
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection

8.1. Control parameters
Exposure Limits This product, as supplied, does not contain any hazardous materials with occupational
exposure limits established by the region specific regulatory bodies.
Derived No Effect Level (DNEL) No information available.
Predicted No Effect Concentration No information available.

(PNEC)
8.2. Exposure controls
Engineering controls Ensure adequate ventilation, especially in confined areas.
Personal Protective Equipment

Eye/Face Protection Avoid contact with eyes. Tight sealing safety goggles.
Hand protection Wear protective natural rubber, nitrile rubber, Neoprene™ or PVC gloves. Gloves must
conform to standard EN 374.
Skin and Body Protection Wear impervious protective clothing, including boots, gloves, lab coat, apron or coveralls,
as appropriate, to prevent skin contact.
Respiratory Protection In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. Wear a respirator
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
conforming to EN 140 with Type A filter or better.
Environmental exposure controls No information available.
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties

9.1. Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Physical State Liquid
Odour Characteristic Colour Colourless
Odour Threshold No data available
Property Values Remarks • Method

pH No data available
Melting Point / Freezing Point No data available
Boiling point / boiling range 49 °C
Flash Point No data available
Evaporation Rate No data available
Flammability (solid, gas) No data available
Flammability limit in air
Upper flammability limit: No data available
Lower flammability limit: No data available
Vapour Pressure No data available
Vapour Density No data available
Specific gravity No data available
Water Solubility No data available
solubility(ies) No data available
Partition coefficient No data available
Autoignition Temperature No data available
Decomposition Temperature No data available
Kinematic viscosity No data available
Dynamic viscosity No data available
Explosive Properties No data available
Oxidising Properties No data available
SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity

10.1. Reactivity
No data available.
10.2. Chemical stability
Stable under recommended storage conditions.
10.3. Possibility of hazardous reactions
None under normal processing.
Hazardous Polymerisation
Hazardous polymerisation does not occur.
10.4. Conditions to avoid
Extremes of temperature and direct sunlight.
10.5. Incompatible materials
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Strong oxidising agents. Strong acids. Strong bases.
10.6. Hazardous decomposition products
Carbon oxides. Nitrogen oxides (NOx). Fluorinated oxides.
SECTION 11: Toxicological information

11.1. Information on toxicological effects
Acute Toxicity
Product information
.
Inhalation In high concentration the gas may cause a suffocation. Victim may not be aware of
asphyxiation. In confined or poorly ventilated areas, vapours can readily accumulate and
can cause unconsciousness and death.
Eye Contact Contact with product may cause frostbite.
Skin contact Contact with product may cause frostbite.
Ingestion Not an expected route of exposure.
Skin Corrosion/Irritation No information available.

Serious eye damage/eye irritation No information available.
Sensitisation No information available.
Germ Cell Mutagenicity No information available.
Carcinogenicity No information available.
Reproductive Toxicity Lack of oxygen during pregnancy has produced developmental abnormalities in humans
and experimental animals.
STOT - Single Exposure No information available.
STOT - Repeated Exposure No information available.
Aspiration Hazard No information available.
SECTION 12: Ecological information

12.1. Toxicity
Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
12.2. Persistence and degradability
No information available.
12.3. Bioaccumulative potential
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
12.4. Mobility in soil
12.5. Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
The components in this formulation do not meet the criteria for classification as PBT or vPvB.
12.6. Other adverse effects
No information available
SECTION 13: Disposal considerations

13.1. Waste treatment methods
Waste from Residues/Unused Disposal should be in accordance with applicable regional, national and local laws and
Products regulations.
Contaminated Packaging Do not re-use container.
SECTION 14: Transport information
IMDG
14.1 UN/ID no UN1066
14.2
Proper Shipping Name Nitrogen, compressed
14.3 Hazard class 2.2
14.4 Packing group NOT REGULATED
Description UN1066, Nitrogen, compressed, 2.2
14.5
Environmental Hazard yes
14.6 Special Provisions None
EmS-No F-C, S-V
14.7 Transport in Bulk According to No information available
Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the
IBC CODE
RID
14.2
Proper Shipping Name Nitrogen, compressed, Environmentally Hazardous
Labels 2.2 (+13)
Description UN1066, Nitrogen, compressed, Environmentally Hazardous, 2.2 (13)
14.5 Environmental Hazard yes
Classification Code 1A
ADR
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

14.2
Proper Shipping Name Nitrogen, compressed, Environmentally Hazardous
Labels 2.2
Description UN1066, Nitrogen, compressed, Environmentally Hazardous, 2.2, (E)
Classification Code 1A
Tunnel restriction code (E)
ICAO (air)
14.2
IATA
14.2
ERG Code 2L
SECTION 15: Regulatory information

15.1. Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
Germany
Water hazard class (WGK) slightly hazardous to water (WGK 1)
European Union
Take note of Directive 98/24/EC on the protection of the health and safety of workers from the risks related to chemical agents at
work
Authorisations and/or restrictions on use:

This product does not contain substances subject to authorisation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex XIV) This
product does not contain substances subject to restriction (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex XVII)
Persistent Organic Pollutants

Not Applicable
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)

[FK-5-1-12]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Ozone-depleting substances (ODS) regulation (EC) 1005/2009 Not Applicable
International Inventories
TSCA Complies
DSL/NDSL Complies
ENCS Complies
IECSC Complies
KECL Does not comply
PICCS Does not comply
AICS Complies
Legend:
TSCA - United States Toxic Substances Control Act Section 8(b) Inventory
DSL/NDSL - Canadian Domestic Substances List/Non-Domestic Substances List
ENCS - Japan Existing and New Chemical Substances
IECSC - China Inventory of Existing Chemical Substances
KECL - Korean Existing and Evaluated Chemical Substances
PICCS - Philippines Inventory of Chemicals and Chemical Substances
AICS - Australian Inventory of Chemical Substances
15.2. Chemical safety assessment
Chemical safety assessments for substances in this mixture were not carried out.
SECTION 16: Other information

Key or legend to abbreviations and acronyms used in the safety data sheet
Full text of H-Statements referred to under section 3

H412 - Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects
Legend
SVHC: Substances of Very High Concern for Authorisation:
Legend SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection

TWA TWA (time-weighted average) STEL STEL (Short Term Exposure Limit)
Ceiling Maximum limit value * Skin designation
Revision date 09-Sep-2020
Revision note Not Applicable.
This material safety data sheet complies with the requirements of Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Disclaimer
The information provided in this Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of our knowledge, information and belief at the
date of its publication. The information given is designed only as a guidance for safe handling, use, processing, storage,
transportation, disposal and release and is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. The information
relates only to the specific material designated and may not be valid for such material used in combination with any other
materials or in any process, unless specified in the text.
End of Safety Data Sheet
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS –

LIMITED AVAILABILITY DUE TO END-OF-LIFE PHASE
OUT
UNION ADAPTORS
(Part No. 309.002.011 and 309.002.012)
The union adaptor is used to enable pipework to be easily
connected to and disconnected from the SAPPHIRE
container valve outlet adaptor. It is available in two sizes,
25 mm and 50 mm.
One end is provided with a parallel female thread to provide
a compatible joint to the container outlet adaptor. The other
end is provided with a female taper thread to enable the
connection of pipework. A swivel joint makes disconnecting
containers from the pipework straight forward.
The connection of the adaptor to the valve outlet does not
require any seal. It is recommended that the connection of
the adaptor to the pipework is made using a suitable pipe
sealant.
TABLE 9-1: UNION ADAPTOR PART DETAILS
Part No. Description Outlet thread

309.002.011 25 mm union adaptor NPT
309.002.012 50 mm union adaptor NPT
FIGURE 9-2
50 mm UNION ADAPTOR
025009
FIGURE 9-1
25 mm UNION ADAPTOR
025008
Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb
Plating Zinc plated and passivated
specification: BS 1708 ZN3
Joint types: BSPP swivel cone (hydraulic) / NPT
female
Weight: 0.35 kg (25 mm union adaptor)
1.07 kg (50 mm union adaptor)
Length: 63.5 mm (25 mm union adaptor)
81.0 mm (50 mm union adaptor)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTAINER BRACKETS
Container brackets (strap style)

4.5 L, 8 L, 16 L, 32 L, 52 L, 80 L, 106 L, 120 L, 147 L, and
180 L
The container brackets are designed to securely fix a single
container to a wall or supporting structure. The containers are
to be floor mounted only. The bracket assembly comprises of
two steel straps, a steel channel section, and a nut and bolt.
The steel channel sections are fixed securely to the wall
or supporting structure. The steel straps have a special
slotted section that allows each half to be fitted into the steel
channel. The two halves are clamped together in position
around the container using a nut and bolt.
Material: Mild steel
FIGURE 9-3
Coating: Black polyester
CONTAINER BRACKET (STRAP STYLE)
025040
TABLE 9-2: CONTAINER BRACKETS (STRAP STYLE)

311.205.020 4.5 L welded container bracket
311.205.013 8 L, 16 L, and 32 L welded container bracket
311.205.014 52 L, 106 L, 147 L, and 180 L welded container bracket
311.209.005 80 L seamless container bracket
311.209.004 120 L seamless container bracket
TABLE 9-3: BRACKET DETAILS

Container Height from
Container size Dimension Dimension floor to Weight of Weight of
size (Diameter) A B bracket straps assembly
L mm Part No. mm mm mm kg kg
4.5 178 311.205.020 350 132 160 0.34 1.62
8 254 311.205.013 500 170 70 0.30 1.90
16 254 311.205.013 500 170 300 0.30 1.90
32 254 311.205.013 500 170 620 0.30 1.90
52 406 311.205.014 600 223 350 0.46 2.38
106 406 311.205.014 600 223 740 0.46 2.38
147 406 311.205.014 600 223 1070 0.46 2.38
180 406 311.205.014 600 223 1350 0.46 2.38
343 610 311.205.019 900 340 1100 0.71 3.59
80 267 311.209.005 400 150 1500 0.30 1.58
120 356 311.209.004 600 198 1300 0.51 2.43
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTAINER BRACKETS (Continued)
Container brackets (hoop style)

8 L, 16 L, and 32 L
(Part No. 311.209.002)
a steel strap, a steel channel section with end caps, and two
spring nuts and bolts.
FIGURE 9-4
8 L, 16 L, AND 32 L CONTAINER BRACKET
(HOOP STYLE)
025041
Material: Mild steel TABLE 9-4: BRACKET HEIGHT DETAILS
Container size Height from floor to bracket
Weight: 0.30 kg (hoop)
(L) (mm)
1.90 kg (assembly)
8 70
16 300
32 620
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
CONTAINER BRACKETS (Continued)
Container brackets (hoop style)

52 L, 106 L, 147 L, and 180 L
(Part No. 311.209.003)
a steel strap, a steel channel section with end caps, and two
spring nuts and bolts.
FIGURE 9-5
52 L, 106 L, 147 L, and 180 L CONTAINER BRACKET
(HOOP STYLE)
025042
TABLE 9-5: BRACKET HEIGHT DETAILS
Material: Mild steel Container size Height from floor to bracket
(L) (mm)
Weight: 0.46 kg (hoop)
52 350
2.38 kg (assembly)
106 740
147 1070
180 1350
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLDS
•M
anifolds are designed to enable all containers in a row
to connect to the supply pipe and may be used in simple TABLE 9-6: MANIFOLD DETAILS
multi-container applications or main and reserve systems. Container Check
Type Part No. size valve
•F
or ease of assembly, flanged manifolds are available for
65 mm x 2 port BSPT 307.209.022 4.5 to 32 L
150 mm diameter.
65 mm x 3 port BSPT 307.209.023 4.5 to 32 L 25 mm
•T
he 65 mm, 80 mm, and 100 mm manifolds are pressure 65 mm x 4 port BSPT 307.209.024 4.5 to 32 L
tested to 90 bar, whereas the 150 mm manifolds are
80 mm x 2 port BSPT 307.209.025 52 to 180 L
pressure tested to 75 bar.
80 mm x 3 port BSPT 307.209.026 52 to 180 L
•M
anifolds are made to order but typical arrangements are 80 mm x 4 port BSPT 307.209.027 52 to 180 L
as described in this section. 80 mm x 5 port BSPT 307.209.028 52 to 180 L
•6
5 mm, 80 mm, and 100 mm manifolds with either 2, 3, 80 mm x 6 port BSPT 307.209.029 52 to 180 L
50 mm
4, 5, or 6 ports are supplied as a one-piece assembly. 80 mm x 2 port NPT 307.209.004 52 to 180 L
Manifolds with 7, 8, 9, or 10 ports are made up from smaller 80 mm x 3 port NPT 307.209.005 52 to 180 L
sections due to the size and weight. 80 mm x 4 port NPT 307.209.006 52 to 180 L
•F
or the 65 mm, 80 mm, and 100 mm manifolds, the part 80 mm x 5 port NPT 307.209.007 52 to 180 L
numbers indicated only include the manifold. 80 mm x 6 port NPT 307.209.008 52 to 180 L
100 mm x 2 port BSPT 307.209.030 52 to 180 L
•1
50 mm flanged manifolds with either 3 or 4 ports are
100 mm x 3 port BSPT 307.209.031 52 to 180 L
supplied as a one-piece assembly. Manifolds with 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, or 10 ports are made up from smaller sections due to the 100 mm x 4 port BSPT 307.209.032 52 to 180 L
size and weight. 100 mm x 5 port BSPT 307.209.033 52 to 180 L
100 mm x 6 port BSPT 307.209.034 52 to 180 L
•1
50 mm flanged manifolds use DN150 300 lb carbon steel 50 mm
100 mm x 2 port NPT 307.209.009 52 to 180 L
A105 flanges, and the mating pipework connection must be
100 mm x 3 port NPT 307.209.010 52 to 180 L
suitable for the manifold flange.
100 mm x 4 port NPT 307.209.011 52 to 180 L
•F
or the 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 port 150 mm manifolds, the 100 mm x 5 port NPT 307.209.012 52 to 180 L
part numbers indicated include the manifold, gaskets, 100 mm x 6 port NPT 307.209.013 52 to 180 L
studs, nuts, bolts and washers to enable the sections to be
150 mm x 3 port flanged 307.209.014 52 to 180 L
assembled. For all manifolds, the mating flange at the end
of the manifold where it attaches to the pipework is supplied
without gaskets or bolts.
50 mm
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
MANIFOLDS (Continued)
65 mm manifold
80 mm manifold
100 mm manifold
150 mm flanged manifold

(3 port and 5 port example)
FIGURE 9-6
MANIFOLDS
025044
Manifold Bracket Assembly
A manifold
SAPPHIRE bracket
Total Floodassembly consists of two lengths of unirax, mounted vertically on a wall or bulkSECTION
Fire Suppression 9 – APPENDIX
head to enable
25,height
42, and 70 bar Marine
adjustment manifold assembly. Cantilever brackets are located over2022-JUL-28 REV.
of theSystem the unirax and each are08 PAGE
held in 9-17
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
position using a uninut long spring, washer and hex head screw. Manifold brackets slot into the cantilever and are
clamped using a hex head screw and plain nut.

Figure
(Part 15 - Manifold Bracket Assembly
No. 311.205.012)
A manifold bracket
65mm (2.5") assembly
Manifold consists of
Bracket twoNo.
Part lengths
30460of back
channel mounted vertically
80mm (3") Manifold Bracket on a wall or bulk head to
Part No. 30500 enable
the100mm
height adjustment of the
(4") Manifold manifold assembly.
Bracket Cantilever
Part No. 30510
brackets
150mm are fastened
(6") to the
Manifold back channel
Bracket Partand
No.each
30515are
held in position using a uninut long spring, washer, and hex
head screw. Manifold brackets slot into the cantilever and are
clamped using a hex head screw and plain nut.
150 mm manifold bracket (Part No. 311.205.012)

Channel length: 500 mm
Cantilever arm length: 300 mm
Weight per bracket: 2.7 kg
FIGURE 9-7
025045 / 025046
22 FM-200® Installation Guide/11100/02.08.05/Issue 3.3

(Part No. 14A-06MA)
SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS

71 mm
Non-return valve
(Part No. 302.209.009)
The non-return valve is used when there is a requirement for
a nitrogen pilot container arrangement to operate the system.
For example, a system using selector valves with a main
and reserve supply of Novec 1230 fluid may use a pilot
container arrangement. The non-return valve ensures that
FIGURE 9-8
pilot pressure opens only the correct bank of containers and
NON-RETURN VALVE
the correct selector valve. 025056
The standpipe reducer (Part No. 302.209.010) is required

when the non-return valve is used in a 6 mm copper nickel Location on system
pipe actuation arrangement. The male adaptor (Part No. The non-return valve is used in the actuation line.
302.209.011) is required when the non-return valve is used in
a flexible hose actuation arrangement. Installation instructions
Fit the non-return valve to the actuation line 10 mm tube,
making sure that the tubing rests firmly on the shoulder of the
Body: Stainless steel tube fitting body and the direction of flow is correct. Tighten
End connections: Metric Swagelok® tube securely using the appropriate tools.
Backup ring material: PTFE
Seal material: Fluorocarbon KFM Operating instructions
Typical working pressure: 50 bar at 20 °C The non-return valve automatically opens on system
Maximum working 240 bar discharge and closes at the end of the discharge. It requires
pressure: no operating instructions.
Cracking pressure: 0.02 bar
Working temperature -20 °C to 50 °C In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
range: services to organise a replacement part.
Free cross sectional area: 55.1 mm2
Approvals: LPCB and VdS ! CAUTION
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2052 It is essential that the non-return valve is fitted the correct way
around, otherwise the system does not operate correctly. An
2831-CPR-S2052 arrow on the valve body indicates the direction of flow.
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark,
302.209.009, Serial No,
WP-240bar, and CE0832 or
CE2831
Weight: 0.15 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Non-return valve standpipe reducer Non-return valve male adaptor

(Part No. 302.209.010) (Part No. 302.209.011)
The non-return valve standpipe reducer is required when the The non-return valve male adaptor is required when the
non-return valve (Part No. 302.209.009) is used in a non-return valve (Part No. 302.209.009) is used in a flexible
6 mm copper nickel pipe actuation arrangement. Fit the hose actuation arrangement. Fit the male adaptor into each
standpipe reducer into each end of the non-return valve to end of the non-return valve to provide a connection for the
provide a connection for the 6 mm copper nickel pipe (Part flexible pilot hose (Part No. 306.025.003).
No. 308.002.001).
41 04
40 mm
41 mm
FIGURE 9-10
FIGURE 9-9
MALE ADAPTOR
STANDPIPE REDUCER 025058
025056
Material: Stainless steel
Connection: 6 mm O.D. twin olive Material: Stainless steel
x 10 mm O.D. standpipe Connection: 1/4 in. BSPP x 10 mm O.D.
Maximum working pressure: 120 bar standpipe
Overall size: 41 mm x 25 mm Maximum working pressure: 120 bar
Weight: 0.040 kg Overall size: 40 mm x 14 mm
Weight: 0.045 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
Vent valve
(Part No. 302.200.016)
The vent valve is used to safely vent Novec 1230 fluid to
the atmosphere if it becomes trapped in a closed pipework
system.
The vent valve is fitted with an IP67 rated limit switchbox to
enable an indication of valve open or valve closed to be
given. The valve is provided with a locking bracket into which
a standard padlock may be fitted.
Ball valve body: A350 LF2
Ball valve connection: 1/2 in. NPT
Switch box conduit 2 x M20
FIGURE 9-11
connections:
VENT VALVE
Voltage range: 125 VAC to 250 VAC 025055

Switch indication: Valve open (yellow)
Valve closed (red)
Additional feature: Pad lockable
Weight: 3.3 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
PILOT CONTAINER ASSEMBLY

(Part No. 304.209.007)
The pilot container may be used to pneumatically operate
the containers from a remote location or may be used to
pneumatically operate a selector valve. It may be operated
electrically, pneumatically, or by manual means. The
5 L container is manufactured in accordance with EN1964
Part 2 and ISO 9809 Part 1 and is pressure tested to 300
bar. The container is charged to 50 bar and is fitted with a
pressure gauge and low pressure switch as standard. The
low pressure switch has normally open contacts. A mounting
bracket is included.
rder the electrical and manual actuator separately. All three
O
types of electrical actuator as shown in Section 3 - System
Components can be used. The electrical actuator requires a
lead, Part No. 304.001.001, for suppression diode actuators
and Part No. 304.001.002 for bridge rectifier actuators. A
pre-wired 4KΩ DIN connection is available, but the specifica-
tions of the panel must be checked before its use.
The manual actuator part number is 304.209.002. An outlet
adaptor, Part No. 311.006.028, is included and provides an
outlet thread size of 1/4 in. BSPP female.
Valve body: Brass CZ121
Container thread type: 1 in. NGT FIGURE 9-12
PILOT CONTAINER AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
Valve outlet: BS 341 0.86 in. BSW 025268
Valve outlet adaptor 1/4 in. BSPP

connection:
Maximum pipe diameter: 8 mm
Maximum pipe length: 30 m
Container volume: 5L
Container type: TPED
Gas type: Nitrogen
Container: Carbon steel
Container pressure: 50 bar at 20 °C
Container test pressure: 300 bar
Low pressure switch setting: 45 bar falling
Pressure gauge: 0 to 100 bar
Actuation method: Manual / pneumatic / electric
Bracket type: Wall mounted
Weight: 13.0 kg
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
TPED PILOT PRESSURE GAUGES

(Part No. 302.209.012)
The TPED pilot pressure gauge is fitted to a 5L 50 bar pilot
container.
The device continuously monitors the container and in the
event of the pressure dropping, provides a visual indication if
the pressure loss is outside the allowable limits as indicated
by the coloured segments on the gauge face.
Entry: Back axial
FIGURE 9-13
Measurement system: Copper alloy
TPED PILOT PRESSURE GAUGE
Movement: Copper alloy 025007
Nominal size: 50 mm (Dia) x 53 mm

Units of outer scale: Bar Location on system
Units of inner scale: psi The pressure gauge is fitted to a 5 L 50 bar pilot container
Connection: 1/8 in. NPT valve.
Case: Stainless steel, glycerin filled
Window: Polycarbonate The valve is supplied pre-assembled with the pressure gauge
installed. Following the installation of the complete system
on-site, the nipple on the rubber bung on the back of the
Class accuracy: Class 1.6 pressure gauge must be cut or pierced with a needle.
Language: English
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C Operating instructions
Weight: 0.073 kg The pressure gauge is designed to work within the
Certification: EN 12094-10 and EN 837-1 pre-determined system operating conditions.
2831-CPR-S2042 Maintenance instructions
Year of CE marking: 2011 and 2021 • In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, bar (psi), services to organise a replacement part.
CL1.6, EN837-1, and CE0832 • If pressure loss exceeds 10% when adjusted for
or CE2831 temperature, refill or replace container. See Tables 5-1 to
Method of marking: Part of gauge artwork 5-4 in Section 5 - Commissioning
• Pressure gauges should be checked weekly by end users.
• Pressure gauges are field replaceable.
Nitrogen 0 to 100 bar gauge (Part No. 302.209.012)

Approvals: LPCB and VdS
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
NITROGEN PILOT VALVE

(Part No. 20231)
The valve is designed to pneumatically actuate the master 86
container valve and selector valves. It operates on the
pressure differential principle and is constructed with a brass Ø44.5
body and piston.
The pressure differential shuttle in the valve uses container
pressure to provide positive force and maintain the shuttle in
the closed position. Operation of the valve occurs when the
upper chamber is vented faster than the make up device in
the shuttle can replace the pressure. This causes the shuttle
to actuate and the valve to discharge.
106.9
Body material: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
Thread type: 1 in. NGT
Outlet connection: 0.5 in. CO2 BS341 (0.86 in. x
20 TPI)
Outlet safety cap material: Brass CW614N (CZ121)
Maximum working pressure: 55.1 bar
Free flow cross sectional 102 mm²
area:
Syphon tube: Rigid straight
Maximum actuation force: 30.8 N at max. working FIGURE 9-14
pressure NITROGEN PILOT VALVE
025061
Burst disc rating: 190.0 bar ± 5%
Burst disc port: M14 x 1.25g
Low pressure port: 1/8 in. NPT Operating instructions
Gauge port: 1/8 in. NPT
The discharge valve operates through electrical, manual, or
pneumatic actuation. The discharge valve actuates automati-
Weight: 1.26 kg cally upon actuation and agent discharges through the piping
Approvals: LPCB and VdS system into the protected area. After discharge, the valve
Certification: EN 12094-4 requires refurbishment before refilling.
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2039,
0832-CPR-S0072, or Maintenance instructions
2831-CPR-S0072 1. Verify that the container is empty.
Year of CE marking: 2009, 2019, and 2021 2. Remove the top cap locking grub. Remove the top cap
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, Part using the top cap spanner.
No., DN15, Serial No., and
3. Remove the shuttle bottom cap using a shuttle wrench.
CE0832 or CE2831
4. Replace the shuttle o-rings.
Valve type: Type 2 5. Apply PTFE lubricant to the shuttle o-rings and refit the
Overall size: 107 mm x 44.5 mm shuttle into the bore of the valve.
6. Replace the top cap o-ring and refit the top cap to the
valve.
Location on system 7. Refit the grub screw.
The nitrogen pilot valve connects to the container. 8. Refurbish the valve after each discharge or when the
container is hydrostatically pressure tested after 10 years
Installation instructions service.
•T
he discharge valve is supplied factory fitted to the
container.
•B
efore connecting it to the pipework or pilot hose, ensure
the container is secured with the appropriate container
brackets.
•W
hen connecting it to the pipework, apply PTFE tape to the
outlet, fit the 15 mm union adaptor, and tighten securely.
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (NITROGEN PILOT VALVE)

(Part No. 305.209.001)
A low pressure switch fits to every container valve and must
be utilised to safeguard the warranty requirements. The
device continuously monitors the container pressure and in
the event of the pressure dropping below the set point, the
switch operates to signal the condition to the control unit.
FIGURE 9-15
025061
(Part No. 14A-06MA)

(Continued)
Technical specification Location on system

Body: Medium density polythene The low pressure switch is fitted opposite the outlet of the
Internals: Beryllium copper container valve assembly.
switch installed. The low pressure switch is supplied with
Weight: 0.165 kg a connector and can be wired normally open or normally
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C closed. The terminals from the low pressure switch are not
Switch point: 45 bar falling at 20 °C polarity sensitive but require the addition of an end-of-line
Adjustment range: 5 bar to 60 bar resistor in series (typically 4K7) when connecting to the
Vendor switch point ± 2.75 bar over working control unit.
tolerance: temperature
Factory tested switch point ± 1.377 bar at 20 °C
TABLE 9-7: LOW PRESSURE SWITCH PILOT VALVE
Tolerance:
TERMINAL
Red Common Common
Proof pressure: 75 bar
Electrical connection: Plug and socket Yellow Normally open Normally closed
Maximum current: 5A Blue Normally closed Normally open
Maximum voltage: 250 VAC Green Earth Earth
Mechanical life: 106 operations
Electrical life: 200,000 operations
Approvals: LPCB and VdS Operating instructions
Certification: EN 12094-10 The low pressure switch is designed to work within the
CE Certification No.: 0832-CPD-2049 pre-determined system operating conditions in conjunction
2831-CPR-S2049 with an appropriate control unit.
CE marking requirements: Manufacturer’s mark, 14HT,
Serial No., 45 bar fall, 5-60 In case of faults or suspected faults, contact customer
bar range, and CE0832 or services to organise a replacement part.
CE2831
label
(excluding cable gland and
1/8 in. connection)
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR - DIN PLUG VERSION

(Part No. 304.205.001, 304.205.010, and 304.209.001) 88 mm 44 mm
The electrical actuator is used to electrically operate the

pilot container. The actuator is operated at 24 VDC (current
consumption - 0.25 A). Provision is made for the connection
of a manual actuator to the top of the actuator assembly.
The electrical actuator has a life span of 10 years or 25 years
from manufacture after which it must be replaced. The date of 104 mm
replacement is indicated on the unit’s label.
5.1 mm
TABLE 9-8: ELECTRICAL ACTUATORS
304.205.001 Electrical actuator (suppression diode)
304.205.010 Electrical actuator (UL suppression diode) FIGURE 9-16
304.209.001 Electrical actuator (bridge rectifier) ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR DIN PLUG VERSION
025010
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR (Continued) Technical specification (Continued)

Part number marked on 304.209.001 / 570209 / 570537
component: (304.209.001)
Body: Mild steel
304.205.001 (304.205.001)
Body finish: Electroless nickel plate
Actuation pin: Stainless steel 304.205.010 / 570209 / 570537
(304.205.010)
Loose nut: Brass CZ121
Retaining clip: Beryllium copper
Location on system
Actuation type: Latching
Reset method: Manually via reset tool The electrical actuator is connected to the top of the container
supplied discharge valve (between the valve and manual actuator).
Connection: 1 in. BSPP Brass Installation instructions
Mechanical installation:
Minimum firing voltage: 65% of Nominal (15.6 VDC)
Minimum current: 0.20 A Install the electrical actuator onto the discharge valve hand
Nominal current: 0.25 A tight only. Ensure the unit is reset in the non-fire position
(height from end of pin to base 4.8 to 5.2 mm) before fitting.
Minimum duration of trigger 1s Electrical installation (suppression diode):
signal: The electrical actuator is supplied with a DIN plug. Connect
Maximum monitoring current: 25 mA positive supply from control panel to terminal 1, negative
Manual actuation force: 50 N supply to terminal 2. Nominal supply is 24 VDC, maximum
Nominal pin travel: 4.4 mm monitoring current 25 mA.
Electrical connection: 3-pin PG 9.5 mm Hirschmann Electrical installation (bridge rectifier):
DIN plug connector The electrical actuator is supplied with a DIN plug. Due to
Back EMF protection: Suppression diode the design of the bridge rectifier, positive supply from control
(Part No. 304.205.001 and panel can be connected to either terminal 1 or 2 with the
304.205.010) reverse for the negative supply. Nominal supply is 24 VDC,
Bridge rectifier maximum monitoring current 25 mA.
(Part No. 304.209.001)
Working temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C (LPCB)
-18 °C to 54 °C (UL and FM) The electrical actuator operates after receiving a
Weight: 0.95 kg 24 VDC nominal voltage signal from the panel. The electrical
Life span: 10 years or 25 years from actuator latches in the fire position after the signal terminates.
manufacture The electrical actuator requires manual resetting by removing
the unit from the valve and inserting or screwing in the reset
Factory testing: 100% Check on start / finish
tool.
position
Maximum humidity: 80% to 90% RH, Maintenance instructions
non-condensing
1. Remove the actuator from the valve assembly.
Ingress Protection class: IP54 (when combined with
manual actuator) 2. Apply 24 VDC and observe for correct functionality
Approvals: LPCB and VdS (energised pin position 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm from base of
actuator).
(UL and FM on 304.205.010
and 304.209.001 only) 3. Terminate the supply voltage and reset the electrical
Certification: EN 12094-4 actuator by fitting or screwing in the plastic reset tool
into the base. Once reset, remove the reset tool and
reinstall on the valve assembly. In case of faults or
2831-CPR-S2046
Year of CE marking: 2009 and 2021 replacement part.
No., Serial No., 24 VDC, 0.25
A, and CE0832 or CE2831 ! CAUTION
Failure to reset the actuator prior to fitting onto the
Overall size: 88 mm x 44 mm x 104 mm container valve will result in the immediate operation of the
Actuation force / pin travel: 66.4 N at 1 mm from container valve and the potentially hazardous discharge of
unactivated the container.
60.7 N at 2 mm from
unactivated
55.0 N at 3 mm from
unactivated
49.3 N at 4 mm from
unactivated
(Part No. 14A-06MA)
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR - DIN PLUG POWER LEADS

(Part No. 304.001.001 and 301.001.002)
Order the power lead fitted with a DIN plug for connecting to
the electrical actuator separately.
• (Part No. 304.001.001 for suppression diode actuators Part
No. 304.205.001 and 304.205.010).
• (Part No. 301.001.002 for bridge rectifier actuator Part No.
304.209.001).
The bridge rectifier DIN plug is coloured grey, to enable easy
differentiation from the suppression diode DIN plug, which is
coloured black.

DIN PLUG AND LEAD ASSEMBLY - SUPPRESSION DIN PLUG AND LEAD ASSEMBLY - BRIDGE RECTIFIER
DIODE (PART NO. 304.001.001) (PART NO. 304.001.002)
025011 025012

Cable: 3 Core, 6.4 mm - 7.2 mm O.D. Cable: 3 Core, 6.4 mm - 7.2 mm O.D.
0.5 mm2 conductor cross section 0.5 mm2 conductor cross section
Plug colour: Black Plug colour: Grey
Plug connection: Pin PG 9.5 mm HIRSCHMANN Plug connection: Pin GDM Series DIN43650
DIN plug connector - A SERIES ISO4400
Diode type: Suppression (HIRSCHMANN)
Length: 1m Diode type: Bridge rectifier
Gland type: M20 x 1.5 Length: 1m
Temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C Gland type: M20 x 1.5
Testing: 100% check on start and finish Temperature range: -20 °C to 50 °C
position Testing: 100% check on start and finish
Weight: 0.12 kg position
Weight: 0.12 kg

Sapphire Total Flood Fire Suppression System - 25, 42, 70 Bar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sapphire Total Flood Fire Suppression System - 25, 42, 70 Bar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAPPHIRE® TOTAL FLOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION

25, 42, AND 70 BAR MARINE SYSTEM

DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

One Stanton Street | Marinette, WI 54143-2542, USA | +1-715-735-7411 | www.ansul.com

This manual is intended for use with the ANSUL®

3M and Novec are trademarks of 3M Company.

Date Page Description Date Page Description

Date Page Description Date Page Description

SECTION PAGE SECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION 1-1 – 1-2 3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

4 INSTALLATION 4-1 – 4-10

5 COMMISSIONING 5-1 – 5-6

6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 6-1 – 6-2

7 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE 7-1 – 7-4

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 8-1 – 8-4

9 APPENDIX 9-1 – 9-28

SAFETY OF NOVEC 1230 FLUID POST DISCHARGE VENTILATION

DESIGN STANDARDS (Continued)

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS • Chemicals containing their own supply of oxygen, such as

DETERMINATION OF NOVEC 1230 QUANTITY Where

Where W = Agent weight required (kg) W•S•100

TOTAL FLOODING QUANTITY

TABLE 2-1: NOVEC 1230 FLUID TOTAL FLOODING QUANTITY

EXTENDED DISCHARGE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

ENGINEERED SYSTEMS (Continued)

Hydraulic software (Continued)

TABLE 2-3: SOFTWARE DESIGN PARAMETERS

COMPLETING THE SYSTEM DESIGN

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS

PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

TEE SPLIT DESIGN

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS

TABLE 2-4: 50 mm x 180° (7 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS (Continued)

TABLE 2-5: 40 mm x 180° (7 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS (Continued)

TABLE 2-6: 32 mm x 180° (7 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

6.7 246.8 11.0 665.2 JENSEN HUGHES

7.1 277.1 11.4 714.5

7.2 285.0 11.5 727.1

7.3 293.0 11.6 739.8

7.4 301.1 11.7 752.6

7.5 309.3 11.8 765.5 JENSEN HUGHES and

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS (Continued)

TABLE 2-7: 25 mm x 180° (7 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

4.2 97.0 VdS Sch80, SDC 8.3 378.7 JENSEN HUGHES

NOZZLE DRILLING DETAILS (Continued)

TABLE 2-8: 25 mm x 360° (16 PORT) NOZZLE DRILLING

PNEUMATIC ACTUATION ARRANGEMENTS

3/8 in. NPT x 1/4 in.

1/4 in. BSPT x 1/4 in.

3/8 in. NPT x 6 mm

Item description Part No. Item description Part No.

System components Part No.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

System components Part No.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

System components Part No.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

System components Part No.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

System components Part No.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Continued)

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 8-1 – 8-4

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS • Chemicals containing their own supply of oxygen, such as